: “Tan ed | - Rew Dork State College of Agriculture At Cornell Gniversitp Ithaca, Nr. VB. Library RETURN TO ALBERT R. MANN LIBRARY ITHACA, N.Y. Cornell University Library SH 681.H53 1904 Wi 3 1924 003 655 606 mann Cornell University Library The original of this book is in the Cornell University Library. There are no known copyright restrictions in the United States on the use of the text. http ://www.archive.org/details/cu31924003655606 BOOK of the BLACK BASS -By James A. Hensuauyi, M. D. AUTHOR OF “CAMPING AND CRUISING IN FLORIDA,” ““YE GODS AND LITTLE FISHES,” ‘“‘ BASS, PIKE, PERCH AND OTHERS,” ETC. FULLY ILLUSTRATED NEW EDITION REVISED AND EXTENDED CINCINNATI THE ROBERT CLARKE COMPANY 1904 ) CL | CopyYRIGHT, 1881, By J. A. HENSHALL CopyRIGHT, 1904, By THE ROBERT CLARKE COMPANY PREFACE. This edition of the Boox or Tur Brack Bass includes also the Supplement, Morr Asovur tre Bracx Bass, and is complete in one volume. A new edition of these books has been necessitated owing to the destruction by fire of the stereotype plates of the former editions. Advantage was taken of this circumstance for a thor- ough revision, whereby much of the text of the old editions has been eliminated, new matter substituted, and other features added more in accordance with the present knowledge of the subject. The first edition of this book owed its origin to a long-cherished desire on the part of the author to give to the black bass species their proper place among game- fishes, and to create among anglers, and the public generally, an interest in two fishes that had never been so fully appreciated as their merits deserved, because of the want of suitable tackle for their capture, on the one hand, and a lack of information regarding their habits and economic value on the other. At the present day, however, the author’s prediction that they would eventually become the favorite game-fish of America has been fully verified. The “Book of the Black Bass” is of an entirely prac- tical nature regarding its subject-matter and its illus- trations. It has been written more with a view to instruct than to amuse or entertain. The reader will, therefore, look in vain between its covers for those [iii] lv PREFACE. rhetorical flights, poetic descriptions, entertaining ac- counts and pleasing illustrations of the pleasures and vicissitudes of angling, which are usually found in works of like character. In addition to the scientific and life history of both species of “black bass, it gives a practical treatise on angling and fly-fishing, and a full description of all tools and tackle employed for their capture. I am under obligation to the Century Company for the illustrations of “‘ Landing a Double” and the “ Still Fisher.” I was desirous to use the former inasmuch as it was originally drawn to illustrate one of my articles on black bass fishing, and my friend, the late Prof. Alfred M. Mayer posed for the drawing. I also extend my thanks to G. F. Corner for the sketch of the “ Old Kentucky Angler.” It is as well to say that the last addition to the subject that I intended to make was the supplement “ More About the Black Bass;” the credit is due, therefore, to The Robert Clarke Company for this new edition of my book, which has risen, phcenix-like, from the ashes of the former one. Bozeman, Montana, April, 1904. JAMES A. HENSHALL. CONTENTS. PART FIRST. SCIENTIFIC AND LIFE HISTORY. i PAGE. ScIENTIFIC History or THE BLACK Bass..... a ates 3 NOMENCLATURE AND MORPHOLOGY..........000ec005 26 GENERAL AND SPECIAL FEATURES OF THE BLAcK Bass. 45 CoLORATION OF THE BLACK BASS.........00..e000e 58 GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF THE Buack Bass.. 64 Hasits oF THE Biack Bass. Spawning, Hatching, ete. 74 INTELLIGENCE AND SPECIAL SENSES. Sight, Hearing. 92 Srockinc WATERS WITH BLACK BASS........-e.0+- 111 PART SECOND. TOOLS, TACKLE AND IMPLEMENTS, Fisuine Rops. Fly-rods, Bait-rods, etc...........- 127 Fisuine Rees. Click Reels, Multiplying Reels, etc. 174 Fisnine Lines, Fly Lines, Bait Lines, etc......... 205 Sirx-Worm Gur. Leaders, Snells, etc.............. 216 Fisa Hooxs. Sproat, O'Shaughnessy, Limerick, etc. 230 ARTIFICIAL Fires. Winged Flies, Hackles, etc..... 243 ARTIFICIAL Barts. Trolling-Spoons, Casting-Spoons. 258 Narurat Barts. Minnows, Frogs, Crawfish, etc.... 268 MiscELLANEOUS IMPLEMENTS. Fly-Books, Creels, etc. 276 PART THIRD. ANGLING AND FLY FISHING. THE PHILOSOPHY OF ANGLING..........0ceeeeeeeeee 3807 CoNDITIONS GOVERNING THE BITING OF FIsH....... 316 Tae Biack Bass as A GAME FISH ............-0- 338 Fry Fisuine. Tackle, Casting, Instructions, ete ... 357 Bait Fisnine. Tackle, Casting, Instructions, etc... 385 Stitt Fisurne. Tackle, Baits, Instructions, etc.... 411 Trotiine. Tackle, General Instructions, etc. ...... 420 SKITTERING AND Bogpzine. Tackle, Instructions, etc. 428 ConcLupine Itemanxs. Care of Tackle, Advice, etc. 433 [v] PART I. SCIENTIFIC AND LIFE HISTORY. BOOK OF THE BLACK BASS. CHAPTER I. SCIENTIFIC HISTORY OF THE BLACK BASS.* (Microprervs. ) “For my name and memory, I leave it to men’s charitable speeches, to foreign nations, and to the next ages.”— Bacon. THE scientific history of the black bass is a most unsatis- factory one. This is owing to a train of accidental cir- cumstances, and to the neglect of thorough investigation of its earliest history, as recorded by Lacépéde, the re- nowned French naturalist, in the original edition of his great work, “ Histoire Naturelle des Poissons.” This representative American fish was first brought to the light of science in a foreign land, and under the most unfavorable auspices. Its scientific birth was, like Mac- duff’s, untimely; it was, unhappily, born a monstrosity ; *In the first edition of this book an exhaustive review of the nomenclature and morphology of the black bass species was given, introducing a number of lengthy papers and references bearing on the subject. In the present edition the author deems it unneces- sary to reproduce much of the evidence then used to prove and corroborate his arguments, inasmuch as his views have been fully concurred in, and his restoration of Lacépéde’s names for the two species has been indorsed and adopted. It is, therefore, deemed sufficient to present in a concise form, and in chronological order, the perplexing account of the nomenclature of the species from their first description by Lacépéde to the final restoration of his generic and specific names. [3] 4 Book or THE Buiack Bass. its baptismal names were, consequently, incongruous, and its sponsors were, most unfortunately, foreign naturalists. Previous to the first edition of this book, in 1881, it had been considered by American naturalists that the first scientific description of a black bass was that published by Lacépéde, about the year 1800, in the work just re- ferred to. This description was founded upon a drawing of a black bass, and accompanying manuscript notes, sent to him by M. Bose, from the vicinity of Charleston, South Carolina, with the local name of “trout,” or “ trout- perch.”* This figure, and its accompanying description, were said to be so uncertain and inaccurate, that it had becn considered very doubtful which species of black bass was intended to be represented. However, Lacépéde named it Labrus salmoides (Labre salmoide)— the “ trout-like ” Labrus, in accordance with its general appearance and vernacular name. The European genus Labrus embraces a great many species, and some American fishes were re- ferred to it by European, as well as by our early American, naturalists. It had also been held by American ichthyologists that it was after this, in 1801, that Lacépéde received his first example of a black bass. This was a fine adult specimen * Some forty years before M. Bose sent the drawing of the Caro- lina “trout” to Lacépéde, two specimens of the same fish ‘had been sent to Linneus by Dr. Garden, of Charleston, 8. C. These specimens were pressed skins of one-half of the fish, retaining the vertical fins, and mounted in the same manner as botanical speci- mens. Linnzus failed to describe or name them, but they are still preserved in the rooms of the Linnean Society in the Burlington House, London, England, in connection with the Linnzan her- barium and library. One of the examples is labeled thus by Dr. Garden: “No. 40. Lasrus. WNostralib. Fresh-water Trout.” History oF THE BuAcKk Bass. 5 of the small-mouth species, but, unfortunately, it was an abnormal specimen, with a deformed dorsal fin, several of the last rays having been apparently bitten off and torn loose from the others when the fish was young, presenting the appearance of a separate small fin. In conformity with this accidental peculiarity, Lacépéde named it Micropterus dolomieu — Dolomieu’s “ small-fin ” — sup- posing that the little fin was a permanent and distinctive feature, and of generic value; he accordingly created the new genus Micropterus, and named the type in honor of ‘ his friend Dolomieu, a well-known French mineralogist, for whom the mineral dolomite was also named.* In 1817, C. S. Rafinesque, another French naturalist, then living in America, procured specimens, apparently of the small-mouth bass, in the region of Lake Champlain, which he named Bodianus achigan, from the Canadian vulgar name of Vachigan. He either failed to recognize, or repudiated, Lacépéde’s former descriptions of Labrus salmoides and Micropterus dolomieu. During the next few years, from 1818 to 1820, while collecting in the Ohio River and its tributaries, in Kentucky, Rafinesque took and described specimens of the small-mouth black bass, at dif- ferent stages of its growth, as Calliurus punctulatus, Lepo- mis trifasciata, Lepomis flecuolaris, Lepomis salmonea, Lepomis notata, and Etheostoma calliura, and specimens of the large-mouth bass he described as Lepomis pallida. In 1822, Charles A. Le Sueur, also a French naturalist, while in this country described and named specimens, of *In 1887 I personally examined this specimen in the Museum of Natural History in the Jardin des Plantes at Paris. It is a fine example, about a foot in length, and is in a remarkably good state of preservation. It is undoubtedly a small-mouth black bass. 6 Book oF THE BLAcK Bass. various ages, of the small-mouth black bass, as Cichla variabilis, (this name was never published by Le Sueur, but specimens sent by him and thus labeled, are still pre- served in the Museum D’Histoire Naturelle at Paris,) Cichla fasciata, Cichla ohiensis and Cichla minima, and the large-mouth bass from Florida as Cichia floridana, thus dissenting from, or entirely ignoring, Rafinesque. In 1828, the great Cuvier and his coadjutor, Valenci- ennes, received from Lake Huron a specimen of the large- mouth black bass, and which, as in the case of the first small-mouth bass sent to France, was, curiously enough, an abnormal or mutilated specimen, having likewise a de- formed dorsal fin. In this instance, the last two-rays of the spinous dorsal fin were torn off, thus leaving, apparently, two separate and distinct dorsal fins, the first composed of six spines, and the second of two spines and twelve or thir- teen soft rays. This specimen was sent to them under the local name of “black bass,” or “black perch;” and not suspecting the mutilation of the specimen, they named it Huro nigricans — the “black huron.” In the following year, 1829, Cuvier and Valenciennes obtaingd two specimens, through M. Milbert, of the large- mouth bass, from New York, under the name of “ growler,” and four specimens of the small-mouth bass, through Le Sueur, from the Wabash River, in Indiana, all of which they identified with Lacépéde’s Labrus salmoides, and Le Sueur’s Cichla variabilis, and which they named Grystes salmoides. Subsequently Cuvier and Valenciennes an- nounced that Lacépéde’s Micropterus dolomieu was also identical with their Grystes salmoides.* * These specimens I have also personally examined. The two examples sent to the museum at Paris by Milbert, and from one of ag “apy Aq YLOM STYZ IOF Ayssoadxa ‘op ‘1d FG *d TIT “TLA 3 “AND ‘SuOssIOg “epRUIyS Of ‘soprowypps sajslisf) SOUUITOUI[VA PUB LELAND JO a[HUTS OVF VW Sap oT[aINyN olLopst_y WoIF paonpoadot “IVA 3 AND SUCIOWIVS SULSATO History or THe Biack Bass. 9 The complex species, Grystes salmoides, thus created by Cuvier, was the origin and beginning of most of the subse- quent confusion that attended the nomenclature of the black bass species in America, inasmuch as he embraced both the large-mouth and small-mouth basses in this name. In 1842, Dr. James E. DeKay, in his “ Fishes of New York,” after reproducing Cuvier and Valenciennes’ figures and descriptions of Huro nigricans and Grystes salmoides, described specimens of the small-mouth black bass under two additional names: Centrarchus fasciatus and Cen- trarchus obscurus, claiming the latter as a new species. In the same year, Dr. Jared P. Kirtland adopted Cen- trarchus fasciatus as synonymous with Le Sueur’s and Rafinesque’s numerous descriptions of the small-mouth species. In 1849, Dr. John E. Holbrook recorded the large-mouth bass as Grystes salmoides (name only) in a catalogue of fauna and flora in the “ Statistics of Georgia.” It will be _ noticed that Dr. Holbrook thus considered Grystes sal- moides to be the proper name of the large-mouth black bass, or “ trout,” of Georgia. In 1850, Prof. Louis Agassiz recognized the generic identity of the former descriptions of the black bass by Le Sueur, Cuvier and Valenciennes, and DeKay, and re- tained the name Grystes for the same. In 1854, Prof. Agassiz obtained specimens of the large- mouth bass from the Tennessee River, near Huntsville, which the figure in Cuvier and Valenciennes’ “ Histoire Naturelle des Poissons” was taken, are both large-mouth black bass, one being fully eight, and the other about six inches in length. The four specimens from the Wabash River sent to the museum by Le Sueur are all small-mouth bass, the largest being at least fifteen inches in length, and the others about one-third as long. 10 Book oF THE BLACK Bass. Ala., which he named, provisionally, Grystes nobilis. In the same year, Messrs. Baird and Girard described speci- mens of the same species from Texas, as Grystes nuecensis. In 1855, in his “Ichthyology of South Carolina,” Dr. Holbrook gave an excellent figure and the first full and elaborate description of the Carolina “ trout,” under the name of Grystes salmoides Lacépéde. In 1857, Dr. Theodatus Garlick, one of the fathers of fish culture in America, described the small-mouth black bass as Grystes nigricans, and the large-mouth species as Grystes megastoma. In 1858, Dr. Charles Girard described the large-mouth bass as Dioplites nuecensis. In 1860, Dr. Theo. Gill restored Rafinesque’s earliest name for the small-mouth form of the black bass, calling it Lepomis achigan, which, however, he changed in 1866 lo Micropterus achigan, and still later, in 1873, he adopted Lacépéde’s name, Micropterus salmoides, for the same species. In 1865, Dr. Edw. D. Cope named the large-mouth bass, Micropterus nigricans, which name was also adopted by Prof. Gill in 1866. In 1874, when, apparently, the oldest generic and specific names, Micropterus salmoides for the small-mouth bass, and Micropterus nigricans for the large-mouth bass, had been restored, as in Prof. Gill’s masterly review* of the species in the previous year (when the tangled web had been, seemingly, straightened), when dry land was thought to have been reached at last ;— then came the French natu- *On the species of the genus Micropterus (Lac.) or Grystes (Auct.). By Theodore Gill, of Washington, D. C. Proceedings of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, xxur, 1873, pp. B. 55-72. History oF THE BLack Bass. 11 ralists, again. MM. Vaillant and Bocourt, of Paris, in- stead of profiting by the experience of their predecessors in this matter, tried to show that we had four species of black bass, where but two really existed, and this in spite of the fact that the Gallic misnomer of the type species still existed as a terrible warning to them, of the folly of in- dulging their national love of novelty where so grave a matter as science was concerned. They proposed the title Dioplites variabilis for the small-mouth form, and Dio- plites treculii, Dioplites nuecensis and Dioplites salmoides, for the large-mouth form, under several unimportant varietal, or individual, differences. In 1876, Dr. G. Brown Goode restored Le Sueur’s name, and called the largemouth black bass Muicropterus floridanus. In 1877, Dr. David 8S. Jordan restored the still older name of Rafinesque for this species, and with the full concurrence of Dr. Theo. Gill, designated it Micropterus pallidus. In 1878, Dr. Jordan divided the small-mouth species into two geographical varieties, distinguishing the North- ern form as M. salmoides var. achigan, and the Southern form as M. salmoides var. salmoides. Finally, MM. Vaillant and Bocourt (Miss. Sci. au Mexique: ined.) adopted the generic title Micropterus, but recognized four provisional species: M. dolomieu and M. variabilis for the small-mouth form and M. salmoides and M. nuecensis for the large-mouth form. under certain, evi- dently, unimportant variations. Thus, it will be seen that, from the first, the nomen- clature of the black bass species had been involved in great doubt, uncertainty, and confusion; and while much of the complexity had been, apparently, dissipated, there still 12 Book or THE Biack Bass. existed among ichthyologists some difference of opinion as to the proper differentiation of the species. Even the gen- erally accepted nomenclature, prior to 1881, unfortunately and unavoidably established, as it was, on an insecure basis, was liable at any time to fall to the ground while the said differences among the authorities existed. Now, if we could have felt perfectly confident and rea- sonably sure that the premises adopted by our American naturalists were correct, to wit: that Labrus salmoides Lacépéde was the first scientific description of the small- mouth bass, we could then have left the subject here, with the firm conviction that the matter was settled for all time, and could thus have felt assured of the ultimate and uni- versal adoption and perpetuity of the American nomen- clature of the black bass, viz: Micropterus salmoides (La- eépéde) Gill, for the small-mouth species, and Micropterus pallidus (Rafinesque) Gill & Jordan, for the large-mouth species. In that event, I say, we could have rested con- tent; for, although the generic appellation, and the specific title of the small-mouth black bass, as proposed, were mis- nomers, they were the only names that could rightly be bestowed, under the circumstances, and we could well af- ford to submit gracefully to what could not be bettered, or helped. It will be observed, however, that Dr. Vaillant proposed the title Alicropterus salmoides for the large-mouth bass; and as we called the small-mouth bass by the same name, it would have produced endless confusion were that state of things to continue. If the black bass of Europe were al- ways to be confined to a few preserved specimens and plaster casts in the museums, it would not have mattered so much; but as this desirable game-fish had been already introduced into European waters, it would seem to be a History oF THE Buack Bass. 13 matter of some interest to obtain a correct, uniform, and universal nomenclature of the species. Even as late as 1880 Dr. Giinther, the great English authority, in his “ Tntroduction to the Study of Fishes,” nailed Grystes and Huro to the mast-head as valid genera. It will be noticed that Dr. Vaillant adopted the north- ern and southern varieties of the small-mouth bass as provisional species, and likewise separated the large-mouth bass into two species, one being distinguished by teeth on the tongue, the other by their absence. I have often noticed this peculiarity of the presence or absence of lingual teeth in the large-mouth species in fish from various waters, and am not sure but I have observed it in the small- mouth species occasionally, but I have always considered it as developed, possibly, by the character of the food in certain localities, or merely a phase of individual variation. In 1878, Dr. Jordan, while in Europe, gave great at- tention to the investigation of the black bass from the Paris standpoint. He examined, with the greatest care, Lacé- péde’s original type specimen, and the specimens of Cuvier and Valenciennes. He was determined to get to the bottom of the matter, if possible, and to this end consulted freely, and compared notes, with the French ichthyologists, who aided him in every possible way. He afterward published the result of his researches, which forms one of the most interesting papers pertaining to the literature of the black bass.* Dr. Jordan submitted the evidence resulting from his investigation to Dr. Gill, who, owing to his faith in Cuvier, * Notes on Certain Typical Specimens of American Fishes in the British Museum and in the Museum D’Histoire Naturelle at Paris. By David 8. Jordan, M.D. < Proceedings of United States National Museum, 11, 1879, pp. 218-226. 14 Book oF THE BLack Bass. and to a misleading reprint of Lacépéde’s Natural History of Fishes, concluded that we could still retain our nomen- clature of the black bass species, viz: Micropterus salmoides for the small-mouth, and Micropterus pallidus for the large- mouth, for reasons that it is not necessary to repeat here. This view was acquiesced in by Dr. Jordan, though he admitted in the paper referred to that “the specific name dolomieu was the first ever distinctly applied to our small- mouth black bass,” and that in the figure of Bose’s Labrus salmoides “the mouth is drawn large, and if we must choose, the large-mouth is best represented ;” also that in the museum at Paris the name salmoides was fully adopted for that species. ‘I was convinced that the estimate of the black bass species as entertained by Dr. Vaillant was correct, and that dolomieu for the small-mouth, and salmoides for the large- mouth black bass, were more in accordance with the evi- dence set forth in Dr. Jordan’s paper, than our accepted nomenclature, based as it was upon the conflicting testi- mony of Cuvier and Valenciennes, who embraced every thing known of the black bass, in their day, in their Grystes salmoides, except Huro nigricans, and had it not been for the gap in its dorsal fin, the inference is, they would have ineluded that also. I do not make this statement unguard- edly, or disrespectfully, for while I venerate the name of Cuvier, I am convinced that he failed to discriminate be- tween the two species of black bass. But let us begin at the beginning. Now, if we discard both the description and figure of Cuvier and Valenciennes’ Grystes salmoides, we have left (ignoring for the time both Rafinesque and Le Sueur) only Lacépéde’s Labrus salmoides and Micropterus dolomieu. History oF THE Buack Bass. 15 Let us take Lacépéde’s figure and description of Labrus salmoides, just as they are, on their own merits, without any reference to Cuvier’s valuation of them; and to render the matter plain, I have reproduced, at the close of this chapter, fac-simile representations of Lacépéde’s plates of both Labrus salmoides and Micropterus dolomieu, with his descriptions, from the original edition of his “ Histoire Naturelle des Poissons.” In the first place, as Dr. Jordan truly says of the figure of Labrus salmoides: “if we must choose, the large-mouth is best represented.” This is certainly correct, for no one could mistake this figure for a small-mouth black bass. Then, Lacépéde’s description says the opening of the mouth is very large (“ Youverture de la bouche fort large”). The radial formula of the dorsal fin is given as nine spinous rays and thirteen soft rays (“neuf rayons aiguillonés et treize rayons articulés 4 la nageoire du dos”). This num- _ber of dorsal spines will hold good in seventy-five per cent. of cases, in the large-mouth bass of the south; sometimes there will be found but eight. The rest of the description will apply to.either species. Then, again, Lacépéde, on the authority of M. Bosc, says the species is very abundant in the rivers of Carolina, where they are called “trout,” and are caught with the hook baited with a minnow (“On trouve un trés-grande nombre d’indivdus de cette espéce dans toutes les riviéres de la Caroline; on leur donne le nom de traut ou truite. On les prend 4 Vhamecon; on les attire par le moyen de morceaux de cyprin”’). Now, if we had not been trying to reconcile Labrus salmoides with the small-mouth bass, contrary to the evi- dence of our own senses, so as to accord with Cuvier’s creation of the complex Grystes salmoides — becoming blind to the points of difference and enlarging upon the 16 Boox oF THE BuLack Bass. vagueness and inaccuracy of the drawing and its descrip- tion — we might have discovered that this figure had, as Lacépéde says, a “very large mouth ;” and that while the large-mouth black bass, or “trout” is “very abundant” in Carolina waters, the small-mouth black bass is appa- rently unknown, at least in the vicinity of Charleston, where Bosc collected. As an angler, I have fished for the black bass in all the South Atlantic States, from Maryland to Florida; and while I have found the large-mouth bass “ very abundant ”’ in all parts of North Carolina, South Carolina, and Georgia, I never took a single small-mouth bass in either of these latter states within a hundred miles of the coast. I have taken it in the hill-country of each of these states, about the head-waters of the rivers flowing into the At- lantic, but I doubt very much if it is found anywhere in the lowland region of that section of country. Dr. Edward D. Cope, who fished the streams of North Carolina, in the autumn of 1869, from the Cumberland Mountains to the sea, found the large-mouth bass, “ abund- ant in all the rivers of the state,’ but failed to find the small-mouth bass, except in the Alleghany region of the extreme western part of the state; and says that it is “apparently not found east of the great water-shed.”* If the small-mouth black bass inhabits the Atlantic slopes of North Carolina, South Carolina, or Georgia, Dr. Holbrook would have known it; for there has been no ichthyologist, before or since his time, who understood the structure and habits of the “ Carolina trout” so well. The best description, and the best figure of the large-mouth bass * A Partial Synopsis of the Fresh Water Fishes of North Caro- lina. By E. D. Cope, A.M. < Pro. Am, Phil. Soc., p. 450, 1870. History oF THE Biack Bass. 17 (“trout”) ever published, until recent years, is found in his work, “Ichthyology of South Carolina.” In order to show that he clearly understood the relations of the black bass species, I will quote as follows: “The trout has, however, its representatives both in the North and West, with which it is closely allied: as Grystes nigricans (Huro nigricans) of Cuvier and Valenciennes, and Grystes fascia- tus (Cychla fasciata) of Le Sueur, both of which have been re- ferred by Agassiz to the genus Grystes.” * Dr. Holbrook knew that the southern trout (large-mouth black bass) was neither Huro nigricans (with its two dis- tinct dorsal fins), nor Cichla fasciata (the small-mouth bass). He called the “trout” Grystes salmoides Lact- PEDE, (not G. salmoides Cuv. & Val.), for he knew that Lacépéde’s Labrus salmoides, or Bose’s Perca trutta could be nothing else but the “ Carolina trout” (large-mouth black bass) ; and, moreover, he distinctly repudiated Cuvier and Valenciennes’ complex Grystes salmoides. Professor Agassiz clearly recognized the complex char- _ acter of Cuvier’s Grystes salmoides, saying he “ probably mistook specimens of our Grystes fasciatus for the south- ern species.”{ Professor Agassiz regarded Grystes sal- motdes as the proper name for the southern large-mouth black bass (trout), and in comparing with it Grystes fas- ciatus, says: “ The mouth is less opened and the shorter labials do not reach a vertical line drawn across the hinder margin of the orbits, whilst they exceed such a line in G. salmoides.” { *Ichthyology of South Carolina. By John Edwards Holbrook, M.D. 25, 1855. + Agassiz, Lake Superior, p. 295, 1850. 2 18 Book oF THE Buack Bass. And yet we deceived ourselves, with all this evidence staring us in the face, with the flimsy delusion that Bosc’s drawing of the “ Carolina trout” was a small-mouth bass, simply because Cuvier pronounced it synonymous with Cichla variabilis Le Sueur and Micropterus dolomieu Lacépéde. Now, if we conclude from this that Labrus salmoides is the large-mouth black bass, then the small-mouth black bass claims its birthright of Micropterus dolomieu, which unquestionably belongs to it. This, in short, seemed to be the view of Dr. Vaillant, and it seemed to me to be the correct one, though he took the figure of Grystes salmoides as additional evidence, the said figure being made from a large-mouth black bass, as is very evident from a glance at the reproduction of the original, which is given in this connection. Being thoroughly convinced that Labrus salmoides was a large-mouth black bass, from my own knowledge of the Carolina “trout,” and from the views of Agassiz, Holbrook and Vaillant, I had fully determined to restore Lacépéde’s names, viz: ficropterus salmoides for the large-mouth bass and Micropterus dolomieu for the small-mouth bass, in the first edition of this book. There was but one contingency that could have proved the right of the small-mouth bass to the name Micropterus dolomieu in a stronger, or absolute manner, and it would be stronger, because incontrovertible, namely: the priority of Lacépéde’s description of Micropterus dolomieu to his description of Labrus salmoides, and it was my belief that such a contingency really existed, for the following reasons: In collating the bibliography of the black bass for the first edition of this book, I discovered an apparent dis- crepancy, which, if it really existed, had an important and History oF THE BLack Bass. 19 significant bearing on the proper nomenclature of the species. I noticed that most American authors, in referring to Lacépéde’s description of Labrus salmoides, gave the reference as “ Lacépéde, Hist. Nat. des Poiss. Vol. 111, p. 716, 1800? ”, and that of Micropterus dolomieu as “Lacépéde, Hist. Nat. des Poiss. Vol. Iv, p. 325, 1800?” thus, of course, giving the priority of description to Labrus salmoides, as we then understood and accepted it. On the other hand, I noticed that Cuvier and Valen- ciennes* gave the reference to Micropterus dolomieu in Lacépéde’s work as “Vol. 1v, p. 325.” and that of Labrus salmoides in the same work, as “Vol. Iv, pp. 716, 717.” I noticed further that all references to the figure of Lacépéde’s Micropterus dolomieu were given as “Vol. Iv, pl. 3, fig. 3,” and that of Labrus salmoides as “Vol. v, pl. 5, fig. 2.” I was at once struck with this discrepancy, for if Cuvier and Valenciennes’ reference of Labrus salmoides Lacépéde (Vol. Iv, p. 716, 717) was correct, it would give the pri- ority of description to Micropterus dolomieu Lacépéde (Vol. Iv, p. 325). The numerical sequence of the plates also gave it priority. While revising this chapter of the first edition of this book for the press, I learned from Dr. Jordan that he had just received from France, a copy of Lacépéde’s original edition of his great work. I at once wrote to him to ascer- *Cuv. & Val. Hist. Nat. des Poiss. Vol. 1, p. 55, 1829, and Vol. v, p. v, 1830. 20 Book or THE BuLack Bass. tain which reference to Labrus salmoides was the correct one. His characteristic reply was: “Tn answering your questions I have struck a mare’s nest; M. dolomieu, Vol. 1v, 325, 1802; L. salmoides, Vol. 1v, 716, 1802 ; the latter being in a supplement, which, in some of the reprints, is restored to its proper place in the genus Labrus in Vol. 11. From this you will see that dolomieu has priority over salmoides. I still believe that salmoides was intended for the large-mouth bass, but don’t know that I can prove it.” Thus, after the lapse of four-fifths of a century, the small-mouth black bass recovered the name to which it was clearly entitled, Aficropterus dolomieu; truth and justice prevailed; Lacépéde and his illustrious friend Dolomieu were vindicated. American ichthyologists, it will be seen, had been mis- led by using a reprint, instead of the original edition, of Lacépéde’s work, which fact, together with an ill-placed faith in Cuvier, led to the confusion of the nomenclature of the black bass species as related in the preceding pages. Perhaps it will now be well to refer to some objections heretofore raised to the generic title Alicropterus, and the specific appellations salmoides and dolomteu, on the score of irrelevancy. I might say, however, that priority, like charity, covers a multitude of sins.* * To those anglers who are better posted in the technical terms of the great American “ game ” introduced to the nobility of Eng- land by General Schenck, than in the technical terms introduced here in reference to the nomenclature of the great American “game-fish,” I need only say that Micropterus, and the specific names dolomieu and satmoides, “hold the age” over all other synonyms that have taken a hand, from time to time, in the “ little game.” This comparison may be more striking than analogical, but as Jack Bunsby would say, its force “lies in the application of it.” History or tHe Buacx Bass. 21 Micropterus (little-fin) is really less objectionable than any of the names proposed for the genus, for it has, com- paratively, smaller fins than any of the related genera, though not in the sense intended by Lacépéde. Calliurus (beautiful tail) is not at all characteristic of the genus, though the young of the small-mouth species, in certain localities, has the tail marked as described by Rafinesque: “base yellow, middle blackish, tip white.” Grystes (growler) is certainly not applicable in this sense. I never met an angler who had heard a black bass “ growl,” yet it was on the supposition that it did so, that Cuvier gave it this name. We had better stop here, for if we go farther we shall fare worse. We will now refer to the objectionable features of the specific names dolomieu and salmotdes. Salmoides (trout-like ; literally, salmon-like). Lacépéde conferred this name simply (and appropriately, so far as he was concerned) because the figure was sent to him as the “trout,” or “trout-perch” of Carolina. If we take its game qualities into consideration, there is no fish that is so “ salmon-like” as the black bass; none that exhibits so nearly the characteristic leap, the pluck, and the endur- ance of the “ king of the waters.” The name is, therefore, not altogether inappropriate. Dolomieu being a French proper noun, without a Latin or genitive form, might be considered objectionable. Lacépéde used the name, however, in this form, advisedly ; not through ignorance, nor by accident, but for the sake of euphony, and to perpetuate the name of his friend in its integrity. In order to recognize and respect Lacépéde’s motive, it is best to let the name stand just as he wrote it, dolomieu. As Dr. Vaillant adopts this form, and doubt- less for the same reason, it is important for the sake of 22 Book oF THE BLACK Bass. uniformity to allow it to stand. There is no lack of prece- dents for this form of specific title. I will merely mention as an example: Icterus baltimore — the former name of the Baltimore oriole. The title baltimore, as here used, is a proper noun, and was bestowed in honor of Lord Baltimore, whose livery was black and orange, the colors of the oriole or hanging-bird. Let the name of the small-mouth bass, then, stand as dolmiew — the name of a brave man for a brave fish. (This engraving is a fac-simile of that in Lacépéde’s Hist. Nat. des Poissons, Vol. Iv, pl. 3, fig. 3.) Le Microprirre DOLOMIEU.* Je desire que le nom de ce poisson, qu’aucun naturaliste n’a encore décrit, rappelle ma tendre amitié et ma profonde estime pour Villustre Dolomieu, dont la victoire vient de briser les fers. En écrivant mon Discours sur la durée des especes, j’ai exprimé la vive douleur que m/inspiroit son affreuse captivité, et Vadmiration pour sa _ constanee * Micropterus dolomieu. History or THE BLack Bass. 23 héroique, que Europe méloit 4 ses veux pour lui. Qu’il m’est doux de ne pas terminer l’immense tableau que je tache d’esquisser, sans avoir sente le bonheur de le serrer de nouveau dans mes bras! Les microptéres ressemblent beaucoup aux sciénes: mais la petitesse trés-remarquable de leur seconde nageoire dor- sale les en sépare; et c’est cette petitesse que désigne le nom générique que je leur ai donné.* La collection du Muséum national d’histoire naturelle renferme un bel individu de l’espéce que nous décrivons dans cette article. Cette espéce, qui est encore la seule inscrite dans le nouveau genre des microptéres, que nows avons cru devoir établir, a les deux machoires, le palais et la langue, garnis d’un, trés-grand nombre de rangées de dents petite, crochues et serrées; la langue est d’ailleurs trés-libre dans ses mouvemens; et la machoire inférieure plus avancée que celle d’en-haut. La membrane branchiale disparoit entiérement sous l’opercule, qui présente deux piéces, dont la premiére est arrondie dans son contour, et la seconde anguleuse. Cet opercule est couvert de plusieurs écailles ; celles de dos sont assez grandes et arrondies. La hauteur du corps proprement dit excéde de beaucoup celle de Vorigine de la queue. La ligne latérale se plie d’abord vers le bas, et se reléve ensuite pour suivre la courbure du dos. Les nageoires pectorales et celle de l’anus sont trés- arrondies ; la premiére du dos ne commence qu’a une assez grande distance de la queue. Elle cesse d’étre attachée au dos de Vanimal, 4 V’endroit ot elle parvient au-dessus de Vanale; mais elle ce prolonge en bande pointue et flottante jusqu’au-dessus de la seconde nageoire dorsale, qui est trés- basse et trés-petite, ainsi que nous venons dele dire, et que * Mixpos, en grec, signifie petit. 24 Book or TuE Biack Bass. l'on croiroit au premier coup d’ceil entiérement adipeuse.* —(Lactpepe, Hist. Nat. des Poiss. Vol. iv, 329, 1802.) Le LaBRe SALMOIDE. f On deyra au citoyen Bose la connoissance du labre sal- moide et du labre iris, qui tous les deux habitent dans les eaux de la Caroline. LABRE SALMOIDE. (This engraving is a fac-simile from Lacépéde’s Hist. Nat. des Poissons, Vol. Iv, pl. 5, fig. 2.) Le salmoide a une petite élévation sur le nez; ouverture de la bouche fort large; la machoire inférieure un peu plus longue que la supérieure; une et Vautre garnies d’une grande quantité de dents trés-menues; la langue charnue ; *5 rayons 4 la membrane branchiale. 16 rayons 4 chaque pectorale. 1 rayon aiguillonné et 5 rayons articulés a chaque thoracine. 17 rayons 4 la nageoire de la queue. — [D. X, 7-4; A. II, 11.] + Labrus salmoides. Perca trutta. Manuscrits communiqués par le citoyen Bose. History oF THE BLACK Bass. 25 le palais hérissé de petites dents que l’on voit disposées sur deux rangées et sur une plaque triangulaire; le gosier situé au-dessus et au-dessous de deux autres plaque également hérissées ; l’ceil grand ; les cétés de la téte, revétus de petite écailles; la ligne latérale paralléle au dos; une fossette propre a recevoir la partie antérieure de la dorsale; les deux thoracines réunies par une membrane; J’iris jaune, et le ventre blanc. On trouve un trés-grand nombre d’individus de cette espéce dans toutes les riviéres de la Caroline; on leur donne le nom de traut ou truite. On les prend & ’hamecon; on les attire par le moyen de morceaux de cyprin. Ils parvien- nent 4 la longueur de six ou sept décimétres; leur chair est ferme, et d’un gofit trés-agréable-— [Br. 6; D. IX, 13; A. 18; P. 13; V. 6; C. 18.] — (Lackripr, Hist. Nat. des Poiss. Vol. 1v, 716, 1802.) 26 Book or THE Biack Bass. CHAPTER II. NOMENCLATURE AND MORPHOLOGY. Crass PISCHS. Suzctass THLEOSTEL. Orver ACANTHOPTERI. Susorper RHEGNOPTERI. Famity CENTRARCHIDA. SupramMiLty MICROPTERIN A. Genus MICROPTERUS Lacfpipn. SYNONYMY AND REFERENCES. Micropterus Lactr&pr, Hist. Nat. des Poiss. iv, 325, 1802. (Type M. dolomieu Lac.) Labrus species, Laczrzpr, Hist. Nat. des Poiss. Iv, 716, 1802. (L. salnioides Lac.) (Not of Linnezus, the type Labrus migtus L. belonging to the family of Labridew, the com- mon wrasse-fish of the coasts of Europe.) Bodianus species, RAFINESQUE, Am. Mo. Mag. and Crit. Rev. u, 120, 1817. (B. achigan Raf.) (Not of Bloch, the type of Bodianus, being a marine fish of the family of Ser- ranid@.) Calliurus RArINESQUE, Jour. de Phys. v, 88, 420, June, 1819, and Ich. Ohi. 26, 1820. (Not of Agassiz, Girard, et al.) (Type C. punctulatus Raf.) Lepomis RaFINESQugE, Ich. Ohi. 30, 1820. (Not Lepomis Raf. Jour. de Phys. H, 50, 1819, the original type Labrus auritus L. being a fresh water sunfish.) NoMENCLATURE AND MorPHo.oey. 2% Aplites RAFINESQUE, Ich. Ohi. 30, 1820. (As subgenus of Le- pomis. Type L. pallidus Raf.) Nemocampsis RAFINESQUE, Ich. Ohi. 31, 1820. (As subgenus of Lepomis. Type L. flexuolaris Raf.) Dioplites RAFINESQUE, Ich. Ohi. 32, 1820. (As subgenus of Le- pomis. Type L. salmonea Raf.) Aplesion RAFINESQUE, Ich. Ohi. 36, 1820. (As subgenus of Etheos- toma. Type E. calliura Raf.) Cichla species, Lz SuEuR, Jour. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. 11, 216, 1822. (C. fasciata Le S.) (Not of Cuvier, the type Cichla ocellaris Bloch, being a South American fresh water fish of the family of Cichlide.) Huro Cuvier & VALENCIENNES, Hist. Nat. des Poiss. 11, 124, 1828. (Type H. nigricans C. & V.) Grystes Cuvier & VALENCIENNES, Hist. Nat. des Poiss. 111, 54, 1829. (Type Labrus salmoides Lac.) Huro Swainson, Nat. Hist. and Class. Fishes, etc., 11, 200, 1839. Grystes Swainson, Nat. Hist. and Class. Fishes, etc., 11, 202, 1839. Centrarchus species, KirTLAND, Bost. Jour. Nat. Hist. v, 28, 1842. (C. fasciatus K.) (Not of Cuvier, the type Labrus wideus Lac., being a fresh water sunfish.) Centrarchus species, DeKay, Fishes N. Y. 28, 1842. (C. fasciatus DeK.) Grystes Agassiz, Am. Jour. Sci. and Arts. (2), Xv, 297, 1854. Dioplites Grrarp, U. S. Pac. R. R. Surv. x, Fishes, 4, 1858. Grystes GUNTHER, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus., 1, 252, 1859. Huro GUNTHER, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus., 1, 255, 1859. Micropterus Corn, Pro. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. 83, 1865. (Name only.) Micropterus Gitt, Ann. Rep. Dept. Agric. 407, 1866. Micropterus Gitu, Pro. Am. Asso. Adv. Sci. xxu, B. 55, 1873. Dioplites Vatttant & BocourT Miss. Sci. au Mexique, 1874. Huro Bierxker, Syst. Pere. Revis. < Ext. des Arc. Neer. x1, 15, 1875. Micropterus BLEEKER, Syst. Pere. Revis. < Ext. des Arc, Neer. x1, 15, 1875. Micropterus JorDAN, Man. Vert. E. U. 8. 229, 1876. Micropterus JorpAN, Am. N. Y. Lye. Nat. Hist. x1, 313, 1877. Micropterus Jorpan, Pro. U. 8. Nat. Mus, 1, 218, 1880. 28 Book oF THE Buack Bass. Grystes GUNTHER, Intro. Study of Fishes, 392, 1880. Huro GUNTHER, Intro, Study of Fishes, 393, 1880. Micropterus Corr, Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus., xvi1, 32, 1880. Micropterus HENSHALL, Book of the Black Bass, 65, 1881. Micropterus Corr, Rep. Pa. Fish Com., 130, 1881. Micropterus Jorpan & GILBERT, Syn. Fishes N. A., 484, 1882. Micropterus Jornan, Geol. Surv. Ohio, Iv, 942, 1882. Micropterus VaILLant & Bocourt, Miss. Sci. au Mexique, 1883. Micropterus GILL, Standard Nat. Hist., 111, 230, 1885. Micropterus JonpAN, Manuel Vertebrates, 120, 1888. Micropterus Jornpan & EverMANN, Fishes of N. A., 1010, 1896. Micropterus JornpaANn & EveERMANN, Amer. Food and Game Fishes, 355, 1902. Micropterus HENSHALL, Bass, Pike, Perch, and Others, 1, 1903. EtyMoLocy: Mizpds (mikros), small; zrepdv (pteron), fin Type: Micropterus dolomiew Lacépéde, GENERIC CHARACTERIZATIONS. Head well developed, its length varying from 3 to 3§ times in length of body; compressed; rather full between the eyes; snout rounded; profile straight; lower jaw prominent and projecting. Scales on cheek, opercle, subopercle, and _ inter- opercle, but none, or few, on the preopercle. Eye moderately large, nearly median, but rather nearer the snout than the preopercle. Nostrils round and normal. Mouth large, with the cleft oblique; the posterior extremity of the upper jaw extends nearly to, or beyond, the posterior border of the eye. Lips but slightly developed. Preopercle smooth and rounding at its angle. Opercle nearly triangular, emarginate be- hind, ending in two flat points. Subopercle extends beyond the opercle, ending in a membranous point. Interopercle rounded be- low. Gill openings large. Branchiostegals six on each side. Both jaws are armed with villiform teeth, curving backward. Patches of villiform teeth on vomer, palatine and pharyngeal bones. Gill-rakers long and slender, and armed with teeth. NOMENCLATURE AND MorpHo.oey. 29 Tongue moderate and free; thick behind,,,narrow in front; its surface usually smooth. Body elongate, ovate-fusiform, somewhat compressed; deepest just behind the ventrals, Scales moderate; smaller on breast and nape. Lateral line following curve of the back. Dorsal fin with nine or ten spines; a deep notch between the spinous and soft portions. Anal fin with three spines. Caudal fin emarginate. Pyloric ceca fourteen or more. Air-bladder simple, slightly notched behind. CONTRASTED DIFFERENTIAL CHARACTERISTICS.* SMALL-MoutTH. Larce-Mouru. Scales of trunk Small (e. g. lat. line, 72-74; Moderate (e. g. lat. line, 65— between lateral line, and back, 70; between lateral line and 11 rows). back, 7% or 8 rows). Scales on nape and breast Much smaller than those of Seareely (on nape), or not sides, much (on breast) smaller than those of sides, Scales of cheeks Minute (e. g., between orbit Moderately small (e. g., be- and preoperculum, about 17 tween orbit and preoperculum, rows in an oblique line and about 10 rows in an oblique line about 9 in a horizontal one). and about 5-6 in a horizontal one). Scales of interoperculum uniserial Covering only about half the Covering the entire width of width of the bone. the bone. *On the species of the genus Micropterus (Lac.) or Grystes (Auct.). By Theodore Gill. Pro. Amer. Assn. Adv. Science, xxu, 1873. 30 SmMaLL-Movutu. Book oF THE Buack Bass. LarcEe-MoutsB. Scales of preopercular limb None. Developed in an imperfect row (e. g., 3-5 in number). Scales on dorsal a Developed as a deep sheath (involving last spine) of small scales differentiated from those on the back, and with series ad- vancing high up the membrane behind each ray (except last two or three). Developed as a low (obsolete) shallow sheath, and with series ascending comparatively little on membrane behind the rays (none behind the last five or six). Scales on anal Ascending high behind each ray. None (or very few). Mouth Moderate. Large. Supramazillary Ending considerably in front of hinder margin of orbit (about under hinder border of pupil). Extending considerably _ be- hind the posterior margin of orbit. Rays Dorsal articulated, 13. Anal ITI, 10-11. Pectoral, 1-16—1-17. Dorsal, articulated, 12 (I. 11). Anal ITI, 10. Pectoral, 1-14 (1-13). Dorsal fin in front of soft portion Little depressed, the ninth spine being only about a half shorter than the longest (3, 4, 5) and a fourth shorter than the tenth. Much depressed, the ninth spine being only about a fourth as long as the longest and half as long as the tenth. NOMENCLATURE AND MorpPuo.oey. 31 SYNOPSIS OF SPECIES OF MICROPTERUS. Common characters.— Body elongated, ovate-fusiform; slightly compressed; arched and thick along the back, thinner and straight along the belly; lower jaw longest; both jaws armed with broad bands of villiform teeth of uni- form size; villiform teeth also on vomer, palatine and pharyngeal bones; teeth on gill-rakers; spinous and soft portions of dorsal fin partly divided by a notch; anal fin with three spines; caudal fin emarginate; opercule emarginate behind, ending in two flat points; supple- mental maxillary bone well developed. * Mouth large; angle of mouth anterior to the posterior border of the eye. { Third dorsal spine only one-half higher than the first. a. Notch between spinous and soft rays of dorsal comparatively shallow. 6. Seales small on body, much smaller on breast and back of neck, and quite small on cheeks, in 17 rows; 11 rows of scales between lateral line and dorsal fin; 70 to 80 scales along the lateral line (exclusive of small pre-caudal scales). e. No scales on preopercular limb. d. Anal fin almost without scales. (7?) e. Head moderate in size; slightly convex between the orbits. f. Color, slaty or dusky green on back and sides, shading to white on belly and lower jaw; young brighter green, and more or less spotted and marked with vertical bars; tail in young (in some localities), yellow at base, middle black, tip white; opercle with three oblique olivaceous streaks ; DX; 13e Al, This ees sesigeencs que sse tee DOLOMIEU. ** Mouth very large; angle of mouth extends beyond the posterior border of the eye. ++ Third dorsal spine twice (at least) as high as the first. aa. Dorsal notch deep, almost dividing the fin into two. bb. Scales moderate; not much smaller on cheeks, nape or breast ; scales on cheeks in 10 rows; 8 rows of scales between lateral line and dorsal fin; 65 to 70 scales along lateral line (exclusive of small pre-caudal scales). cc. A single row of scales on preopercular limb, dd. Anal fin somewhat scaly. (?) ee. Head large; flat between the orbits. 32 Book oF THE Brack Bass. ff. Color, olive green, darker on back and shading to white on belly and under side of lower jaw; more or less spotted when young; not barred, though usually an irregular dark lateral band; three oblique streaks on cheeks; these markings grow obscure with age; D. X, 12; A. III, 10... ...... SALMOIDES. CHRONOLOGICAL CATALOGUE Of the Nominal Species of Micropterus as noticed by various Authors, with Identifications. NOMINAL SPECIES. Date. Identifications. Micropterus dolomieu Lacépéde ..............+. 1802 | Micropterus dolomieu. Labrus salmoides Lacépéde ..............555 1802 | Micropterus salmoides. Bodianus achigan Rafinesque .............-+ 1817 | Micropterus dolomieu. Calliurus punctulatus eSqUue..........- 1819 | Micropterus dolomieu. Lepomis pallida Rafinesque ...............-. 1820 | Micropterus salmoides. Lepomis trifasciata Rafinesque ............. 1820 | Micropterus dolomieu. Lepomis flexuolaris Rafinesque.............. 1820 | Micropterus dolomieu. Lepomis salmonea Rafinesque..... Sincere : Lepomis notata Rafinesque ...........- siateeeteo acai Etheostoma calliura Rafinesque. Cichla variabilis Le Sueur, MSS.. Cichla fasciata Le Sueur ........ Cichla ohiensis Le Sueur ..............eee eee eee Cichla minima Le Sueur ...........cce cece eee ee Cichla floridana Le Sueur ............... Huro nigricans Cuvier & Valenciennes... Grystes salmoides Cuvier & Valenciennes. Centrarchus obscurus DeKay............+.. a Centrarchus fasciatus Kirtland................. Grystes nigricans Agassiz Grystes fasciatus Agassiz Grystes nobilis Agassiz ....... 0.0... cece scene eens Grystes nuecensis Baird & Girard....... be Grystes salmoides Holbrook Grystes megastoma Garlick. . Grystes nigricans Garlick.. Dioplites nuecensis Girard. Grystes salmonoides Gtinther Grystes nigricans Herbert Lepomis achigan Gill...... Micropterus nigricans Cope. Micropterus fasciatus Cope Micropterus achigan Gill.............. 2. eee eeeee Micropterus salmoides Gill........... cee cess Dioplites treculii Vaillant & Bocourt ........... Dioplites nuecensis Vaillant & Bocourt ......... Dioplites variabilis Vaillant & Bocourt ... e% Dioplites salmoides Vaillant & Bocourt......... Micropterus floridanus Goode Micropterus pallidus Gill & Jordan.............. Micropterus salmoides var. salmoides Jordan .. Micropterus salmoides var. achigan Jordan..... Micropterus salmoides Vaillant & Bocourt...... Micropterus nuecensis Vaillant & Bocourt...... Micropterus variabilis Vaillant & Bocourt... Micropterus dolomieu Vaillant & Bocourt Micropterus dolomieu. Micropterus dolomieu. Micropterus dolomieu. Micropterus dolomieu. Micropterus dolomieu. Micropterus dolomieu. Micropterus dolomieu. Micropterus salmoides. Micropterus salmoides, Micropterus dolomieu? Micropterus dolomieu. Micropterus dolomieu. Micropterus salmoides. Micropterus dolomieu. Micropterus salmoides. Micropterus salmoides. Micropterus salmoides. Micropterus salmoides. Micropterus dolomieu. Micropterus salmoides. Micropterus dolomieu. Micropterus salmoides. Micropterus dolomieu. Micropterus salmoides. Micropterus dolomieu. Micropterus dolomieu. Micropterus dolomieu. Micropterus salmoides. Micropterus salmoides. M. dolo. var. achigan. Micropterus salmoides. Micropterus salmoides. Micropterus salmoides. M. dolomieu var. dolo. M. dolo. var. achigan. Micropterus salmoides. Micropterus salmoides, M. dolo. var. achigan. M. dolomieu var. dolo. puryadop “ya “iq Aq YAom sty} toy ATssordxe ompeu woiy UMVIG ‘apadgovy naruojop sn.tazdoworyy ‘SSVd MOVId HLNON-TIVINS AHL NOMENCLATURE AND MORPHOLOGY. 35 MICROPTERUS DOLOMIEU Lacfréope. THE SMALL-MOUTH BLACK BASS. SYNONYMY AND REFERENCES. 1802. Micropterus dolomieu Lactpkpr, Hist. Nat. des Poiss., 1v, 325, 1802. Micropterus dolomieu HENSHALL, Book of the Black Bass, 84, 1881. Micropterus dolomieu McKay, Pro. U. 8. Nat. Mus., tv, 93, 1881. Micropterus dolomiew JorDAN & GILBERT, Syn.: Fishes N. A., 485, 1882. Micropterus dolomieu JorDAN, Geol. Surv. Ohio, 1v, 948, 1882. Micropterus dolomieu Varttant & Bocourt, Miss. Sci. au Mex., Zool., 1883. f Micropterus dolomiei Bran, Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus., xxv, 464, 502, 1883. Micropterus dolomiei JorpAN & Swain, Pro. U. 8S. Nat. Mus., vI, 249, 1883. Micropterus dolomiei BEAN, Pro. U. S. Nat. Mus., vi, 365, 1883. Micropterus dolomiet Goovr, Fish. Industries U. S., sec. 1, 401, 1884. Micropterus dolomiei Forses, Rept. Ills. Fish Com., 67, 1884. Micropterus dolomieu Git, Standard. Nat. Hist., 111, 231, 1885. Micropterus dolomiei Jorpan, Cat. Fishes N. A., 17, 1885. Micropterus dolomiet Von pemM Borne, Die Fischzucht, 148, 1885. Micropterus dolomiei JonDAN & MEEK, Pro. U. 8. Nat. Mus., viii, 7, 1885. Micropterus dolomieit EIGENMANN & Forpicr, Pro. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil., 411, 1885. Micropterus dolomiet JonpAN & GILBERT, Pro. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ix, 5, 12, 1886. Micropterus dolomieu Maturr, Colvin Adirond, Surv., Fishes, 5, 1886. Micropterus dolomiet EVERMANN, Bull. Brook. Soc. Nat. Hist. 11, / 7, 1886. Micropterus dolomiei EVeRMANN & Bottman, Ann. N. Y, Lye. Nat. Hist., 339, 1886. Micropterus dolomieu Jorpan & EveRMANN, Ind. Agric. Rept., 13, 1886. 36 Book or THE Buack Bass. Micropterus dolomieuw Von pEM Borne, Schwarzbarsch, etc., 3, 1886. Micropterus dolomiei Goopr, American Fishes, 54, 1888. Micropterus dolomieu JorpAN, Manual Vertebrates, 120, 1888. Micropterus dolomieu JorpAN & EvERMANN, Fishes of N. A., 1011, 1896. Micropterus dolomieu JorpAN & EVERMANN, Am. Food and Game Fishes, 355, 1902. Micropterus dolomieuw HENSHALL, Bass, Pike, Perch and Others, 3, 1903. 1817. Bodianus achigan RaFINEsQve, Am. Mo. Mag. and Crit. Rev. 1, 120, 1817. Lepomis achigan GiLL, Pro. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. 20, 1860. Micropterus achigan GiLL, Rept. Com. Agri. 407, 1866. Micropterus achigan Goopre & Bran, Bull. Essex Inst. x1, 19, 1879.* 1820. Calliurus punctulatus RAFINESQUE, Ich. Ohiensis, 26, 1820. Lepomis trifasciata RAFINESQUE, Ich. Ohiensis, 31, 1820. Lepomis flexuolaris RAFINESQUE, Ich. Ohiensis, 31, 1820. Lepomis salmonea RAFINESQUE, Ich. Ohiensis, 32, 1820. Lepomis notata RAFINESQUE, Ich. Ohiensis, 32, 1820. Etheostoma calliura Ra¥FINESQUE, Ich. Ohiensis, 36, 1820. 1822. Cichla variabilis Le Surur, MSS., in Museum d’Hist. Nat. Paris, 1822. Dioplites variabilis VatLtant & Bocourt, MSS. Miss. Sci. au Mexique, 1874. Micropterus variabilis VAILLANT & Bocourt, Miss. Sci. au Mexi- que: ined. *Used on the wrong supposition that the name “Labre salmoide ” as used by Lacépéde was vernacular (French), unaccompanied by w classical form, and therefore not available. NCMENCLATURE AND MORPHOLOGY. 37 1822. Cichila fasciata Le Surur, Jour. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. 1, 216, 1822. Cichla fasciata KirTLAND, Zoology Ohio‘(2d An. Rep. Geol. Surv. Ohio), 191, 1838. Centrarchus fasciatus KIRTLAND, Bost. Jour. Nat. Hist. v, 28, 1842. Centrarchus fasciatus DEKay, Fishes N. Y. 28, 1842. Centrarchus fasciatus Storer, Syn. Fishes N. A. 38, 1846. Grystes fasciatus AGAssiz, Lake Superior, 295, 1850. Centrarchus fasciatus THompson, Hist. Vt. 131, 1853. Grystes fasciatus Eorr, Smithsonian Report, 289, 1854. Grystes fasciatus GILL, Smithsonian Report, 257, 1856. Centrarchus fasciatus GUNTHER, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus. 1, 258, 1859. Grystes fasciatus GUNTHER, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus. 1, 252, 1859. (Name only.) Centrarchus fasciatus ROOSEVELT, Game Fish of North, 217, 1862. Micropterus fasciatus Corr, Pro. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. 83, 1865. (Name only.) Grystes fasciatus Putnam, Storer’s Fish Mass. 278, 1867. Micropterus fasciatus Corr, Jour. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. vr, 216, 1868. Micropterus fasciatus Corr, Pro. Am. Phil. Soc. 450, 1870. 1822. Cichla ohiensis Le Sueur, Jour. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. m1, 218, 1822. Cichla ohiensis KiRTLAND, Rept. Zool. Ohio: 2d Geol. Rept. Ohio, 191, 1838. 3 1822. Cichla minima Le Sueur, Jour. Ac. Nat. Sei. Phil. 11, 220, 1822. Cichla minima KirTLanp, Rept. Zool. Ohio: 2d Geol. Rept. Ohio, 191, 1838. 1829. ? Grystes salmoides CUVIER & VALENCIENNES, Hist. Nat. des Poiss. ur, 54, 1829. Grystes salmoides JARDINE, Nat. Lib. I, Perches, 158, 1835. Grystes salmoides DrKay, Fishes N. Y. 26, 1842. Grystes salmoides Storer, Synopsis Fishes N. A. 36, 1846. Gristes salmoeides HERBERT, Fish and Fishing, 197, 1859. Grystes salmonoides GUNTHER, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus. 1, 252, 1859. Micropterus salmoides GILL, Pro. Am. Asso, Adv. Sci. B 55, 1873. 38 Book oF THE BLack Basy. Micropterus salmoides Jorpan, Ind. Geol. Surv. 214, 1874. Micropterus salmoides Jorpan, Man. Vert. E. U. S. 230, 1876. Micropterus salmoides Unter & Luccrr, Fishes of Md. 111, 1876. Micropterus salmoides NELSON, Bull. Ills. State Lab. Hist., 1, 37, 1876. Micropterus salmoides Jonpan, Ann. N. Y. Lyc. Nat. Hist. x1, 314, 1877. Micropterus salmoides Jorpan, Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus. 1x, and x, 1877. Micropterus salmoides Hattock, Sportsman’s Gazetteer, 373, 1877. (In part.) Micropterus salmoides JoRDAN, Man, Vert. E. U. S. 2d ed., 236, 1878. Micropterus salmoides JorpAN, Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus. x11, 30, 1878. Micropterus salmoides HENSHALL, Rept. Ohio Fish Com. 31, 1879. Micropterus salmoides GooprE, Bull. U. 8S. Nat. Mus., 49, 1879. Micropterus salmoides JORDAN, Pro. U. S. Nat. Mus. 11, 218, 1880. Micropterus salmoides Goopr, Bull. U. 8. Nat. Mus., x, 28, 1880. Micropterus salmoides BEAN, Pro. U. S. Nat. Mus., m1, 1880. Micropterus salmoides Core, Rept. Pa. Fish Com., 1881. 1842. Centrarchus obscurus DeKay, Fishes New York, 30, 1842. Centrarchus obscurus Storer, Syn. Fishes N. A. 40, 1846. Centrarchus obscurus GUNTHER, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus. 1, 258, 1859. 1857. Grystes nigricans GARLICK, Treat. Art. Prop. Fish, 105, 1857. Grystes nigricans Norris, Am, Anglers’ Book, 103, 1864. EryMoLogy: Dolomieu, proper name (in honor of M. Dolomieu). Hasitat: Canada to Alabama; along the Appalachian Chain and westward; introduced eastward. ‘puvjadog “yg ‘Aq Aq Y10M sty} soy ATssaidxa o1nyzeUu Wo, UMLIG, ‘apedgovy] ({[vysueH]) saprowzns snuajzdosoryy ‘SSVE2 MOVIE HLNOWAOUVT AHL NOMENCLATURE AND MorpHo.oey. 41 MICROPTERUS SALMOIDES (Lac.) HrensHat. THE LARGE-MOUTH BLACK BASS. SYNONYMY AND REFERENCES. 1802. Labrus salmoides LactrrpE, Hist. Nat. des Poiss. 1v, 716, 1802. Grystes salmoides Ho.Broox, Cat. Fauna and Flora. Statistics of Ga., 16, 1849. Grystes salmoides Acassiz, Lake Superior, 295, 1850. Grystes salmoides Hoxtgproox, Ich. So. Car. 25, 1855, and 2d ed. 28, 1860. Grystes salmoides Norris, Am. Anglers’ Book, 99, 1864. (In part.) DNoplites salmoides VaILtant & Bocourt, Miss. Sci. au Mexique, 1874. Microplerus salmoides HENSHALL, Book of the Black Bass, 110, 1881. Micropterus salmoides, McKay, Pro. U. 8. Nat. Mus., Iv, 93, 1881. Micropterus salmoides GoopE & Bean, Pro. U. 8. Nat. Mus., v, 238, 1882. Micropterus salmoides Jonpan & GILBERT, Syn. Fishes N. A., 484, 1882. Micropterus salmoides JorDAN, Geol. Surv. Ohio, Iv, 952, 1882. Micropterus salmoides Hay, Bull. U. 8. Fish Com., 1, 64, 1882. Micropterus salmoides Bean, Bull. U. 8. Nat. Mus., xxvii, 446, 502, 1883. Micropterus salmoides VaILLANt & BocourtT, Miss. Sci. au Mex- ique, 1883. Micropterus salmoides Goovr, Fish. Industries U. S. sec. 1, 401, 1884. Micropterus salmoides GILBERT, Pro. U. 8S. Nat. Mus. vir, 204, 209, 1884. Micropterus salmoides JonpAN, Pro. U. 8. Nat. Mus., vir, 320, 1884. Micropterus salmoides Forves, Rept. Ills. Fish Com., 67, 1884. Micropterus salmoides GILL, Standard Nat. Hist., mr, 231, 1885. Micropterus salmoides JoRDAN, Cat. Fishes N. A., 17, 1885. Micropterus salmoides JonpAN & Merrx, Pro. U. S. Nat. Mus., vu, 14, 16, 17, 1885. Micropterus salmoides Goop— & Bran, Pro. U. S. Nat. Mus., vit, 208, 1885. 42 Book oF THE Buack Bass. Micropterus salmonoides VON DEM Borne, Fischzucht, 148, 1885. Micropterus salmoides Jonvan & GILBERT, Pro. U. S. Nat. Mus., Ix, 21, .1886. HMicropterus salmoides BoLLMAN, Pro. U. 8S. Nat. Mus., 1x, 464, 1886. Micropterus salmoides EvERMANN, Bull. Brook. Soc. Nat. Hist., u, 7, 1886. Micropterus salmoides JonpAN & EVERMANN, Ind. Agric. Rept., 13, 1886. Micropterus salmoides JENKINS, Hoosier Naturalist, 95, 1886. Micropterus salmoides VoN DEM Borne, Schwarzbarsch, etc., 3, 1886. Micropterus salmoides GoopE, American Fishes, 54, 1888. Micropterus salmoides JoRDAN, Manual Vertebrates, 120, 1888. Micropterus salmoidcs JonpAN & EVERMANN, Fishes of N, A., 1012, 1896. Micropterus salmoides Jorpan & EVERMANN, Am. Food and Game Fishes, 357, 1902. Micropterus sabmoides HENSHALL, Bass, Pike, Perch and Others, 30, 1903. 1820. Lepomis pallida RAFINESQUE, Ich. Ohiensis, 30, 1820. Micropterus pallidus Jorpan, Ann. N. Y. Lye. Nat. Hist. x1, 314, 1877. Micropterus pallidus Jorpan, Bull U. 8S. Nat. Mus. rx, 21, and x, 43, 1877. Micropterus pallidus Jorpan, Bull. U. 8. Nat. Mus. x11, 15, 1878. Micropterus pallidus Jorpan, Hayd. Geol. Surv. Ter. Bull. iv, No. 2, 435, 1878. Micropterus pallidus Jorpan, Man. Vert. E. U. S. 2d ed., 236, 1878. Micropterus pallidus Goopr, Pro. U. S. Nat. Mus. 1, 115, 1879. Micropterus pallidus Goopt & Bran, Bull. Essex. Inst. x1, 19, 1879. Micropterus pallidus Goopr & Bran, Pro. U. 8. Nat. Mus. 11, 138, 1879. Micropterus pallidus HENSHALL, Rept. Fish Com. Ohio, 31, 1879. Micropterus pallidus Goopr, Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus., x1v, 49, 1879. NoMENCLATURE AND MorpHo.oey. 43 Micropterus pallidus JorpAN, Pro. U. S. Nat. Mus. 1, 19, 1880. Micropterus pallidus Goong, Bull. U. 8S. Nat. Mus., xv1i1, 28, 1880. Micropterus pallidus Bran, Pro. U. S. Nat. Mus., tr, 96, 1880. Micropterus pallidus Hay, Pro. U. 8. Nat. Mus. m1, 497, 1880. Micropterus pallidus Corr, Rept. Pa. Fish Com., 131, 1881. 1822. Cichla floridana Le Sueur, Jour. Act. Nat. Sci. Phil. m, 219, 1822. Micropterus floridanus Goopg, Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus. v1, 63, 1876. (Name only.) Micropterus floridanus Cops, Bull. U. 8. Nat. Mus., xvu1, 31, 1880. 1828. Huro nigricans Cuvier & VALENCIENNES, Hist. Nat. des Poiss. 11, 124, 1828. Huro nigricans JARDINE, Nat. Lib. 1, Perches, 108, 1835. Huro nigricans RicHarpson, Fau. Bor. Am. II, 4, 1836. Huro nigricans DeKay, Fishes N. Y. 15, 1842. Huro nigricans Storer, Syn. Fishes N. A. 25, 1846. Grystes nigricans Agassiz, Lake Superior, 297, 1850. Grystes nigricans HerBert, Fish and Fishing, 195, 1859. Huro nigricans GUNTHER, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus. 1, 255, 1859. Huro nigricans RoosEvEtt, Game Fish of the North, 219, 1862. Micropterus nigricans Corn, Pro. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. 83, 1865. (Name only.) Micropterus nigricans G1LL, Rept. Com. Agric. 407, 1866. Micropterus nigricans Corz, Pro. Am. Phil. Soc. 451, 1870. Micropterus nigricans GILL, Pro. Am. Asso, Ady. Sci. B. 70, 1873. Micropterus nigricans Jorpan, Ind. Geol. Surv. 214, 1874. Micropterus nigricans JoRDAN, Man. Vert. E. U. 8. 229, 1876. Micropterus nigricans NELSON, Bull. Ills. State Lab. Nat. Hist., I, 36, 1876. Micropterus nigricans Hatiocn, Sportsman’s Gazetteer, 273, 1877. (In part.) 1854. Grystes nobilis Acassiz, Am. Jour. Sci. Art, xvu, 298, 1854. Grystes nobilis Putnam, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. 1, 6, 1863. (Name only.) 44 Book or THE Biack Bass. 1854. Grystes nuecensis BAinp & Girarp, Pro. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. vu, 25, 1854. Dioplites nuecensis GiraRp, U. 8. Pac. R. R. Surv. x, Fishes, 4, 1858. Grystes nuecensis GUNTHER, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus. 1, 252, 1859. (Name only.) Dioplites nuecensis GiraRD, U. S. Mex. Bound. Surv. il, 3, 1859. Dioplites nuecensis VAILLANT & Bocourt, Miss. Sci. au Mexique, 1874. Micropterus nuecensis VAILLANT & Bocourt, Miss. Sci. au Mex- ique, 1883. 1857. Grystes megastoma GaRLIck, Treat. Art. Prop. Fish, 108, 1857. 1874. Dioplites treculii VaILLant & Bocourt, Miss. Sci. au Mex- ique, 1874. (ZoGlogie, pt. 1v, plate 1v, f. 2. No descrip- tion; the species since identified by its authors with M. nuecensis.) Etymotocy: Salmoides, trout-like; salmon-like, Hasitat: Red River of the North to Florida: Virginia to Mexico; ; introduced eastward. DISTINCTIVE FEATURES. 45 CHAPTER III. GENERAL AND SPECIFIC FEATURES. “ Like — but oh! how different! ’— WorpswortH. As has been shown in the preceding chapter, the genus Microrrervs includes but two species, viz: Micropterus dolomieu Lacépéde, the small-mouth black bass, and Mi- cropterus salmoides (Lacépéde) Henshall, the large-mouth black bass, or, as it is sometimes erroneously called, the Oswego bass. The small-mouth bass exhibits some minor points of difference between its northern and southern forms, which, however, are not of much moment, as they shade into each other, and are to be regarded as merely geographical variations. Dr. Edward D. Cope took several large-mouth bass, in Texas,* which, while agreeing in all other features with the same species of the northern states and of Florida, differed somewhat in the smaller size of the scales of the cheeks, and in the scaling of the gill-covers. They also differed slightly in coloration and markings by showing several dusky, longitudinal streaks, especially noticeable below the lateral line. I observed these several variations, though not quite so pronounced, in several large-mouth bass taken in the St. Francis River, Arkansas, in the au- tumn of 1885. Possibly no genus of fishes has been the occasion of so much confusion, scientifically and popularly, as the black * On the Zoological Position of Texas. By E. D. Cope. > Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus., xvi, 1880, 31. 46 Book oF THE Buacxk Bass. bass. This is owing, no doubt, to its extensive habitat and wide-spread distribution, the original habitat of one or other of the species being the great basin of the St. Law- rence, the whole Mississippi Valley — or nearly the entire range of country lying between the Appalachian Chain and the Rocky Mountains — and the South Atlantic States from Virginia to Florida, including also the widely-sepa- rated sections of the Red River of the North and Hast Mexico. It would naturally be expected, in view of this extraor- dinary and expansive habitat, to find differences in color, habits and conformation; indeed, it is surprising that the variations are not more marked, and the number of species, consequently, greater, when one considers the great natural differences and conditions of the numerous waters, and the varieties of climate to which this genus is native. To the careless observer, however, there is but little to determine the differences between the two species of black bass. I have known anglers who never suspected that there was any difference except in color, until I pointed out to them the specific characteristics. Even those of more attentive observation, but who have never seen the two species to- gether, find it difficult to readily comprehend the differ- ence. To the trained observer, however, it is an easy task to distinguish the variations; and when specimens of equal weight, of both species, are placed side by side, the differ- ence is at once apparent. As widely distributed as the black bass is, we find that the most striking variation, in either species, is in color, which will run from almost black ‘through all the shades of slate, green, bronze, olive and yellow to almost white; and indeed these variations in color can be found in almost any one state, and to a great extent in any one stream, or Distincrive FEATURES. 4” lake, at different seasons of the year. In most sections of the country the small-mouth species is more or less spotted or barred, while the other species may exhibit well-defined lateral bands of’ dark spots, though these peculiarities are more pronounced in young or adolescent specimens. The fins will also be found to vary somewhat in coloring, while the scales and fin-rays may differ slightly in number, as a variation of one-sixth, more or less, from established formulas is not unusual. Slight dissimilarities of contour, and some diversities of habits, also, exist. But all of these differences obtain, not only with regard to the black bass, but to most other species of fresh-water fishes, and depend on well-known natural causes. I resided for ten years in Wisconsin, where there were twenty lakes, abounding in black bass, within a radius of eight miles of my residence; and from close and constant observation of the characteristics of the bass inhabiting them, I could almost invariably tell, upon being shown a string of black bass, in what particular lake they had been caught. ; Where both species co-exist in the same waters, the small- mouth bass is generally of a darker or more somber huc than the large-mouth bass, whose color is more inclined te shades of green. The coloration of the small-mouth bass, however, in some localities, approaches shades of olive or yellow, and there will often be more or less red in the iris of the eye, in some instances shading down to orange or yel- low; this latter distinction, though, like the double curve at the base of the caudal fin, and the more forked tail — which have been regarded by some anglers as distinguish- ing characteristics of this species can not be depended on, as one or all of these distinctions may be lacking. The most distinctive feature, as between the two species, 48 Book oF THE Buack Bass. is the gape of the mouth, which in the large-mouth bass seems simply enormous to those who have previously seen but the small-mouth species. The contrast in build, and external conformation, of the two species, is at once strik- ing and characteristic. The large-mouth bass is thicker, especially through the shoulders, deeper in the body, and seems a heavier fish for its length than the other species, conveying the impression that it is the stronger and more powerful fish, as, indeed, it is; while the small-mouth bass, owing to its trim, slender and more graceful shape, truly convinces one that it is the more active and agile. The relative size of the scales is all important in the dif- ferentiation of the two species. In the large-mouth bass these are much larger, there being but from sixty-five to seventy scales along the lateral line, running from the head to the tail; while in the small-mouth species there are from seventy to eighty. Between the lateral line and the base of the dorsal fin there are but eight horizontal rows of scales in the large-mouth bass, while there are eleven similar rows in the small-mouth bass. The scales on the nape and breast in the large-mouth species are not much smaller than those of the sides; but in the other species they are much smaller ; and while the scales on the cheeks and gill-covers of the large-mouth bass are small, those of corresponding situations in the small-mouth bass are quite minute, with a small portion of the gill-covers (preopercular limb) en- tirely bare. The size and shape of the fins also differ somewhat, espe- cially the dorsal, which in the small-mouth bass has the rays of the spinous portion higher and more uniform in size, rendering this fin higher, not so arching, and with a shallower notch than in the large-mouth form. The differences, then, in the form, gape of mouth, and DISTINCTIVE FEATURES. 49 size of scales and fins of the two species of black bass, with- out reference to color, are sufficiently pronounced to enable the angler to readily distinguish, by comparison, the small- mouth from the large-mouth ; for these differences are con- stant wherever the black bass exists, from Maine to Mexico, or from Canada to Florida. To the specialist there are other points of differentiation as detailed in the preceding chapter. The late Fred Mather has humorously expressed these differences in the following characteristic lines: “The little-mouth has little scales, There’s red in his handsome eye; The scales extend on his vertical fins, And his forehead is round and high. His forehead is full and high, my boys, And he sleeps the winter through ; He likes the rocks in summer time, Micropterus dolomieu. The big-mouth has the biggest scales, And a pit scooped in his head; His mouth is cut beyond his eye, In which is nary a red. In his eye is nary a red, my boys, But keen and well he sees; He has a dark stripe on his side, Micropterus salmoides.” Both species are remarkably active, muscular and vo- racious, with large, hard and tough mouths; are very bold in biting, and when hooked exhibit gameness and endur- ance second to no other fish. Both species give off the characteristic musky odor when caught. 4 50 Book OF THE BuLackK Bass. Both species often inhabit the same waters in the north- ern states, and there is some diversity in their habits where they exist together. Naturally, the small-mouth bass pre- fers rocky streams or the gravelly shoals and bottom springs of lakes and ponds, while its large-mouth congener lurks about the submerged roots of trees or sunken logs in rivers, and delights in the beds of rushes and aquatic plants of lacustrine waters; but they readily adapt themselves to waters of various conditions, when transplanted, easily ac- commodating themselves to their surroundings, and have a happy faculty of making themselves at home wherever placed, so that in some localities their habits are as anoma- lous as their colors. There is a prevalent notion that the small-mouth bass is the “game” species par excellence. In common with most anglers I at one time shared this belief, but from a long series of observations I am of the opinion that the large-mouth bass, all things being equal, displays as much pluck, and exhibits as untiring fighting qualities as its small-mouth cousin. Ichthyologists have at various times given to the genus Micropterus numerous appellatives, and to the species more than fifty specific names, while laymen in different sections of the country have contributed their quota of vernacular names, among which may be mentioned: bass, black bass, green bass, yellow bass, river bass, bayou bass, slough bass, lake bass, moss bass, grass bass, marsh bass, Oswego bass, swago bass, perch, black perch, yellow perch, trout perch, jumping perch, Welshman, salmon, trout, black trout, white trout, chub, southern chub, Roanoke chub, achigan, etc. In addition to this formidable and perplexing array of names, there are. other evils which add very much to the confusion attending the nomenclature of the black bass. ‘DISTINCTIVE FEATURES. 51 Among them is the careless habit of many correspondents of our sportsmen’s journals, who write of bass, bass tackle, bass fishing, etc., meaning black bass in each instance, but leave it to the imagination of the readers of those journals as to what particular kind of “ bags ” is meant. Now this is all wrong, and is owing to carelessness, or perhaps in some instances to a want of proper information, and is a habit that ought to be reformed. We should learn to call things by their right names. A rose by any other name may smell as sweet, but as there are many varieties of roses they must be distinguished by correct and specific names, and not by their odors. It is just as easy to write the distinctive name “black bass” as the general name “ ass.” Bass is a very vague term at best, meaning one thing in one part of the country, and a totally different thing in an- other. Along the eastern coast it means a striped bass (Roccus lineatus), or a sea bass (Centropristes striatus) ; in Florida it means a channel bass (Scienops ocellatus) ; in the west it may be either a black bass (Micropterus), a rock bass (Ambloplites rupestris), a white bass (Roccus chrysops), or a calico bass (Pomoxys sparoides) ; while in Otsego County, New York, it means an Otsego bass (Core- gonus clupeiformis var. otsego), which is not a bass at all but a whitefish. Then, again, some of these correspondents write of the real black bass, meaning usually the small-mouth species, seeming to imply that the other species is not real, or at least is not the black bass, but something else —a kind of pseudo variety. Others in writing of the large-mouth spe- cies, owing to its former name, M. nigricans, have called i the real black bass, under the impression that as it was named nigricans — 1. e., black — the other species must be 52 Boox OF THE Buack Bass. some other color, and could not be the simon-pure article. Now, one species is not more real than the other; the small- mouth bass is regarded as the type species because it was the first to be described by a naturalist, and given a specific and generic name. The term “black bass,” then, is distinctive, and should always be used when alluding to the genus generally. The different species should be mentioned as the small-mouth black bass or the large-mouth black bass, as the case may be, no matter whether the color be black, green or yellow. One will then know exactly what is meant, and the confu- sion and uncertaintv alluded to will be cleared away: “Not chaos-like, together crush’d and bruis’d, But, as the world, harmoniously confus’d, Where order in variety we see, And where, though all things differ, all agree.”— Pops. CoLORATION, 53 CHAPTER IV. COLORATION OF THE BLACK BASS. “And it is so with many kinds of fish, and of trouts especially; which differ in their bigness and shape, and spots and color.”— Izaak WALTON. THE external appearance of the black bass, as exhibited in the colors and markings, differs so greatly and con- stantly in different sections of our country, that it would be useless to describe them minutely in a specimen from any given locality; for as the vernacular names of fishes are usually bestowed with reference to the outward pecu- liarities of coloring, this has already given rise to much confusion in naming the species. Thus they are called black, green, or yellow bass, respectively, in different sec- tions of the United States, and not without reason, for black, green or yellow are the predominating colors of the two species, though these colors are always toned down to intermediate shades, with plumbeous, olivaceous or ochre- ous tints. The color, however, is always darkest on the back, with a gradual shading or paling toward the belly or abdomen, which is always white or whitish. Where the two species of black bass are common to the same stream or lake, the small-mouth bass is generally the darkest in color, though this is by no means an invariable rule; for in other waters the small-mouth bass may be of a lighter or paler hue than the other species — usually yellowish-olive or tawny-gray, but often pale green — while the large-mouth bass will be of a dark green or bronze green coloration, and sometimes quite dusky. 54 Book oF THE Buack Bass. Then, again, in some waters, no distinct coloring is ap- parent, the fish presenting merely a pale or faded appear- ance ; especially is this likely to be the case in large streams much subject to overflow, and whose waters are often muddy or discolored. Hence, as may be surmised, color is not an important factor in the differentiation of the black bass species. While some have no distinct markings, others are marked by dark, maculated, transverse or vertical bars ; some, again, by longitudinal or lateral bands; and still others by mottled lines, dusky spots, or finger marks. Usually, when bass are so marked, the mottled bands run lengthwise in the large-mouth species, while the small-mouth bass is marked. by transverse bars or finger marks; but these distinctions are not infallible. The small-mouth bass of the extreme southwest exhibits, sometimes, several mottled lines run- ning lengthwise along the series of scales. After being taken out of the water, the colors and mark- ings of the fish change materially; usually, the brighter colors fade rapidly, while the dusky spots, bars, or bands become more distinct; this change of color is more fre- quently observed in the small-mouth species. Sometimes, however, the markings will disappear, and the sides of the fish will assume a uniform coloration. Then, again, the colors of the black bass frequently change with each season of the year; and there is, more- over, always a marked difference in the colors and’ mark- ings of the fish at different stages of its growth. In the young, the colors are brighter and the markings more dis- tinct than in the adult fish, for it is not unusual for the latter to become almost obsolete with age. The fins are likewise subject to variation in coloring and markings; they may be either dusky or greenish, reddish CoLORATION. 55 or yellowish, and are, usually, more or less punctulated or spotted. The tail is often lighter in color at the base and outer edge, and dark or dusky between; thus one of the names proposed by Rafinesque for the small-mouth species. — Calliurus punctulatus, 1. e., “dotted painted-tail ” — was founded upon the peculiar coloration of the tail of a young bass, his description of the caudal fin being: “ base yellow, middle blackish, tip white.” Sometimes, however, especially in mature specimens, the tail has a dark border, while the middle is of a lighter tinge; and often the entire caudal fin will have a uniform coloration. ‘There are, commonly, several — usually three — dusky or olivaceous streaks along the cheeks and gill-covers. Inconstancy of coloration is not exceptional with the black bass, for all other genera of fresh water and ana- dromous fishes exhibit this peculiarity in a greater or less degree. Among the causes assigned for the changes in coloration, and which have been either proven true or made tenable by actual experiment and careful observa- tion, are: (1) character of food; (2) condition, depth and temperature of water; (3) color and character of beds of streams, lakes or ponds; (4) atmospheric conditions; (5) age; (6) season of the year; and (7) the changes in- cident to the breeding season; while some assume that (8) the power of changing color is voluntary with some, if not all, fishes. Richard Owen, in “Anatomy of the Vertebrates,” says: “The varied, and often brilliant colors of fishes, are due to pigment cells at different depths of the skin, but chiefly in the active or differentiating area. Those of silvery or golden luster are mostly on the surface of the scales. The silvery pigment called ‘argentine’ is an article of commerce used for the color- ing of fictitious pearls, and offers a crystalline character under 56 Book oF THE BLAcK Bass. the microscope. The blue, red, green, or other bright-colored pig- ment is usually associated with fine oil, and occupies areole favoring accumulation at, or retreat from, the superficies, and thus effecting changes in the color of the fish, harmonizing their exterior with the hue of the bottom of their haunts.” From the nature of the pigment cells, as portrayed in this description, it is easy to imagine how susceptible they are to the influences of such causes as those above enume- rated. The Salmonide have been more studied, perhaps, than any other family of fishes, and yet in none has there been more confusion in classification, owing in a great measure to the differences of external appearance, as caused by these various influences. The German naturalist, Seibold, says: “In none of our native [German] fish is there such variety of color, according to the different influences of food, water, light and temperature, as in the toothed salmons.” Another German scientist, Carl Peyrer, says of the com- mon brook trout of Germany (Trutia fario): “The color, and partly also the size which it reaches, vary ac- cording to its location, the influences of light, the season, water, and food, and therefore several varieties are dis- tinguished, such as the forest or stone trout, the alpine or mountain trout, the gold or pond trout, the lake trout, and, according to the lighter or darker coloring, the white trout, the black trout, ete.” Truly almost as polyonomous as our black bass. That difference in food produces difference in coloration is pretty generally admitted. Those of the salmon family which feed upon crustacea and larve exhibit the most bril- liant colors, while those which live upon insects, minnows, worms, etc., are much duller in hue. CoLoRATION. 57 Sir Humphrey Davy, in his familiar work, “ Salmonia,” says: “I think it possible when trout feed much on hard substances, such as larve and their cases, and the ova of other fish, they have more red spots and redder fins. This is the case with the gillaroo and the char, who feed on analogous substances; and the trout that have similar habits might be expected to resemble them. When trout feed on small fish, as minnows, and on flies, they have more tendency to become spotted with small black spots, and are generally more silvery.” Charles Lanman, an angling artist and author, says: “ Various causes have been assigned for the great variety in the eolor of the brook trout. One great cause is the difference of food; such as live upon fresh-water shrimps and other crustacea, are the brightest; those which feed upon May-flies and other aquatic insects are the next; and those which feed upon worms are the dullest and darkest of all.” Dr. A. T. Thompson, the author of “ Treasury of Na- tural History,” observes: “That each species of trout has its peculiarities of color, but the common trout is the most beautiful of its class; the variations of its tints and spots, from golden-yellow to crimson and greenish- black, are almost infinite, and depend in a great measure on the nature of its food, for the colors are always the most brilliant in those fish that feed on the water shrimp.” Near Waterville, Waukesha County, Wisconsin, thirty years ago, was an extensive trout hatching establishment, where a number of fine springs formed a considerable stream after leaving the ponds and flumes, and into which a number of brook trout had escaped at various times, so that finally it became well stocked with trout, which propa- 58 Book oF THE Biack Bass. gated naturally in the stream. The trout which were reared artificially were kept in covered plank flumes, and in open ponds, and were fed principally on chopped liver; those in the ponds got some addition to this fare, however, in aquatic flies, insects, ete. The stream contained a great many crawfish, which did much damage to the dams and ditches of adjacent cranberry marshes. Frequently visit- ing this establishment, I was struck with the remarkable difference in the colors of the trout in the flumes, in the ponds, and in the stream. Those in the flumes were quite dull in appearance ; those in the ponds were brighter ; while those in the stream were very highly colored, caused, per- haps, by their feeding upon the crawfish with which the stream abounded. The dull color of the trout in the flumes was partly owing to their shaded condition. Not only does the character of the food seem to influ- ence the external coloring of the salmon family, but the tint of the flesh, if I may so call it, may also be affected by the same cause; thus, Louis Agassiz states that the most beautiful salmon-trout are found in waters which abound in crustacea, direct experiments having shown to his satis- faction that the intensity of the red color of their flesh depends upon the quantity of Gammaride (shrimp) which they have devoured. The red-throat trout (Salmo clarkii lewisi) of Henrys Lake, at the head of Snake River, in Idaho, and likewise those of Soda Butte Lake in the Yellowstone National Park, are noted for the deep red tint of their flesh —as red as that of the Chinook salmon — and on this account are erroneously called “salmon-trout.” The probable cause of their red flesh may be found in the extraordinary abundance of fresh-water shrimp that inhabit both lakes, which are of similar character, being shallow, with muddy CoLORATION. 59 bottom and a luxurious growth of water weeds, conditions exceedingly favorable for the growth and increase of the shrimp. A striking instance of the difference in coloring of the flesh from the influence of age or season, is related by the European ichthyologist, Dr. Fric, in regard to the salmon of Bohemia. He says that there are three different ascents of the salmon during the year: The first ascent begins in February or March under the ice, and lasts till May. These salmon weigh from twenty-five to fifty pounds, and are famous under the name of “ violet-salmon.” The second ascent begins in June and lasts till August. These fish have a reddish flesh, and weigh from twelve to twenty-two pounds, and are known as “rose-salmon.” The third as- cent is from September until December. These fish are mostly weak, weighing from three to fifteen pounds. Their flesh is pale, and they are usually called “ silver- salmon.” The trout of the mountain lakes of the Alps, according to the season and the nature of the water they inhabit, have their flesh whitish or reddish. The color and condition of the water has likewise a very marked effect upon the external appearance of the Salmon- ide. Agassiz found that the color of book trout of neighboring streams was influenced by the color and quan- tity of the water, and that even trout of the same stream differed in color as they frequented the shady or sunny side. He also found that fish in clear, sunny waters, with gravelly bottoms, were highly and brightly colored; while those in shady streams, or where the bottom was dark or muddy, and the water not so clear, were correspondingly dusky in hue; and that bright fish taken from waters of the former character and placed in those of the latter, 60 Book OF THE Biack Bass. would begin to fade in a few hours, and in a few days or weeks would become entirely changed in hue. The great lake trout (Cristivomer namaycush) exists in three different states of color, according to situations in which it is found, and were thought by the French hab:- tans of the great lakes to be three distinct fishes, known as truite de gréve, or trout of the muddy bottom; truite des battures, or trout of the rocky shores; and truite du large, or trout of the deep, open waters; the first being dull-colored, the second bright and handsomely mottled, and the last bluish and silvery. Charles Lanman truly observes, that the fish of streams rushing rapidly over pebbly beds, are superior both in ap- pearance and quality to those of ponds or semi-stagnant brooks. But this may arise, not so much from any par- ticular components of the waters themselves, as from the fact that rapidly running and falling water is more highly aerated, the atmosphere being more freely intermingled with it, and therefore more conducive to the health and condition of all that inhabit it. The influence of light in producing color in fishes is very evident when we reflect that fishes are always colored upon the back, which is exposed to the direct rays of light, and pale ‘underneath, usually being quite white on the abdo- men. This fact is especially pronounced in the flat fishes, which swim upon the side; thus the flounder, the sole, the turbot, the halibut, ete., are dark and variously colored upon the side presented to the light, while they are quite pale or white on the under side. Fishes which inhabit dark caves, owing to the absence of light, are entirely color- less. That the age of fish has much to do with their color is well known; a familiar example being the common gold- CoLORATION. 61 fish, which in early youth is black or dark colored, and only assumes its beautiful golden hue at maturity. During the breeding season of fishes their colors become much heightened, but they lose their brightness and bril- liancy in many cases when the season is over. A salmon fresh-run from the sea is justly considered the most beauti- ful of fishes, but after the spawning season there is none more sorry and ill-looking. Darwin mentions some very interesting particulars, among which, that the pike, espe- cially the male, during the breeding season, exhibits colors exceedingly intense, brilliant and iridescent. Another striking instance out of many is afforded by the male stickleback, which is described by Mr. Warrington (England) as being then beautiful beyond description : “The back and eyes of the female, on the other hand, are the most splended green, having a metallic luster like the green feather of humming-birds. The throat and belly are of a bright crimson, the back of an ashy green, and the whole fish appears as though it was somewhat translucent, and glowed with an internal in- candescence. After the breeding season, these colors all change; the throat and belly become of a paler red, the back more green, and the glowing tints subside.” The well-known and beautiful spring, or breeding dresses, of many of our darters and minnows, are common illustrations of the influence of the breeding season upon the change of color in fishes. The coloration of the young of the small-mouth bass is light green, with golden reflections, and with numerous small dots or punctulations, which aggregate in small clus- ters, approaching somewhat the appearance of vertical bars. The iris is golden. The base of the caudal fin is yellowish, the tip whitish, and dark olivaceous or blackish in the middle. ( 62 Boox oF THE Buack Bass. In the young of the large-mouth bass the color is also greenish but darker, with a blackish band along the lateral line, and clusters of dark spots above and below. The iris is golden. The base and tip of the caudal fin is some- what paler than in the middle. Those who keep their fish alive in fish-cars or live-boxes, or by the more reprehensible practice of stringing the fish, will observe that however different in coloration fishes of the same species may appear when first caught, that after being subjected to the same conditions for a few hours they will all exhibit the same coloration. A familiar instance of the change of coloration due to environment, or change in the condition, character, depth or temperature of the water, or in the food, is seen in the Canadian sea-trout. This is merely the brook-trout that has become anadromous and runs to the sea. When it re- turns, in the spring or early summer, to the mouths of the streams, it is, like most marine fishes, of a bright, silvery appearance ; but after being in fresh water a short time it again takes on the characteristic colors and spots of the brook-trout. I have taken them in both their salt-water and fresh-water colors, and in a transition stage, in the Restigouche River, between Matapedia and Campbellton, New Brunswick. The external coloration of fishes depends on the pres- ence of variously-colored pigment-cells in one or both lay- ers of the skin. These pigment-cells are said to be under the influence or control of the nervous system, and are thus able to cause changes of color which may be rapid or temporary, or more or less permanent. In some fishes, as the black bass, the change in colora- tion is involuntary. and is, without much doubt, occasioned by an increase or decrease in the number of the different CoLORATION. 63 pigment-cells, owing to the influences of light, depth of water, temperature, surroundings, etc. In some other fishes the change of coloration is much more rapid, and seems to depend on a contraction or ex- pansion of the pigment-cells already developed, and which are very sensitive to surrounding conditions, especially to light. Owing to this rapid change in the colors of certain fishes, when exposed to the light, they are thought by some to be endowed with the power of changing their colors at will, or voluntarily. This, however, is not very likely. 64 Book or THE Buiack Bass. CHAPTER V. GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION. “ You may remember that I told you, Gesner says there are no pikes in Spain; and doubtless, there was a time, about a hundred or a few more years ago, when there were no carps in England.”— Izaak WALTON. Tue black bass is wholly unknown in the Old World, except where recently introduced, and exists, naturally, only in North America. The original habitat of the genus is remarkable for its extent, for, with the exception of the New England states and the Atlantic seaboard of the middle states, it comprised the whole of the United States east of the Rocky Mountains, Ontario (Canada), and East Mexico. Of late years the range of the black bass has been ex- tended through the efforts of public-spirited individuals, and by the Fish Commissioners of various states, so that at the present time this noble fish may be said to have a “local habitation and a name ” in every state of the Union. It has also been successfully introduced into England, Scotland and the Continent of Europe. Of the two species, the large-mouth bass had the widest distribution, occurring all through the vast scope of terri- tory as mentioned. The small-mouth bass had a somewhat limited range in comparison, not extending east or south beyond the Alleghany mountains, though occurring nearly everywhere elsc, except in the Gulf states, with the large- mouth species. The fact that the original habitat of the black bass did not embrace New England and the Pacific slope is not re- DISTRIBUTION. 65 markable, for the characteristically American forms of fishes are, generally speaking, rare or absent in the waters of those sections. This fact was noticed by Louis Agassiz, who called New England “ a zoological island,” on account of its faunal peculiarities as compared with the rest of the United States. Thus, of more than a hundred genera of fresh-water fishes now known to occur in the waters east of the Mississippi River, only about one-fourth occur in New England, and of these, all except a half-dozen genera are represented by but a single species each; and not more than thirty-five genera occur in the waters of the Pacific slope. Almost any stream of any extent of the Ohio or Mississippi basins will furnish double the number of genera and species as the entire waters of either of the above- named sections. Thus, as Dr. Jordan states, “In the little White River, at Indianapolis, seventy species, repre- senting forty-eight genera, are known to occur — twice as many as inhabit all the rivers of New England.” The distribution of the black bass does not seem to be much affected by geological formations, climatic influences, or the character of waters ; for although one or both species may have been absent originally in certain localities, they readily adapt themselves to the waters of these sections when transplanted, and rapidly increase. Originally, both species were at home among the primor- dial rocks of the eozoic period of Lake Champlain, north- ern Wisconsin, and along the Appalachian chain in the Carolinas and northern Georgia. They flourished amid the paleozoic rocks of the Great Lake region and the Mis- sissippi Valley, and in the coal measures of the Ohio, Tli- nois, and Missouri River basins; while in the marine tertiary formations of the cenozoic period, along the At- 5 66 Boox oF THE Buack Bass. lantic and Gulf slopes of the southern states, the large- mouth bass alone occurs. Thus, while the small-mouth bass seems to be restricted naturally to the older formations, the large-mouth bass roams at his own sweet will through the regions of metamorphic and stratified rocks and glacial drift, down to the recently formed coral rocks of the pe- ninsula of Florida. Climatic influences do not seem to affect the distribution of the large-mouth bass in any degree, in the United States, and of the small-mouth bass only to a small ex- tent. The original habitat of the species extended through twenty-five degrees of latitude and thirty degrees of longi- tude, the small-mouth bass alone not occurring in the ex- treme ten degrees of southern latitude, and the ten degrees of extreme western longitude of this range. Thus, while the small-mouth bass is naturally restricted to cold and temperate waters, the large-mouth bass bids defiance alike to the ice-bound streams of Canada, the tropical lagoons of east Mexico, and the sunny streams of southern Florida. He flashes his bright armor under the firs and birches of the St. Lawrence basin, and erects his spiny crest in the grateful shade of the palms and live oaks of the southern peinsula. To him it is given “To bathe in fiery floods, or to reside In thrilling regions of thick-ribbed ice.” The character of waters has but little influence upon the distribution of the species, less upon the large-mouth bass than upon his small-mouth congener. If the water is rea- sonably pure, both species will thrive in it; but, as has just been intimated, the small-mouth bass naturally seeks cooler and clearer waters. Thus, while he is found in the head- waters of certain rivers flowing into the Atlantic (notably DISTRIBUTION, 67 those of the Alleghany region of the Carolinas, Georgia, and Alabama), the large-mouth bass only occurs in the lower portions of the streams. There are several rivers in Hernando County, on the Gulf coast of Florida, that burst out from the base of a sandy ridge running parallel with the coast, and some twelve miles from it, whose sources are large springs, fifty or sixty feet deep, and of half an acre in extent. Their waters are remarkably clear and cool, with a strong current until tide-water is reached; and I have no doubt but the small-mouth bass would thrive won- derfully well in the upper portions of the streams if intro- duced into them, as the conditions all seem favorable, and the large-mouth bass is abundant in them. As we approach tide-water, the small-mouth bass dis- appears. The large-mouth bass, however, true to his cos- mopolitan nature, descends the streams to their mouths, where he seems to be as much at home in the brackish waters of the estuaries as in the pure and crystal rapids of the highlands. The black bass being in a manner omnivorous, is prob- ably not restricted in its range to any great extent by the supply of any one article of his food, though it would be affected, of course, by an abundance or scarcity of its food, as a whole. Crawfish and minnows are the principal food of adult black bass, and these are more or less plentiful throughout the waters of the United States. In addition to these, they feed upon insects, larve, frogs, etc. The greater prevalence of crawfish in clear, rocky streams, may throw some light upon the preference of small-mouth bass for such waters. ; The following account, by the late James W. Milner, of the U. 8. Fish Commission, of the introduction of the black bass into new waters, will be found very interesting 68 Book or tHe Buack Bass. and instructive, and is taken from the Report of the U. 8. Fish Commissioner for the years 1872-73: “Among numerous records of their introduction, in very few instances discriminating properly between the two species, we give the following: In 1850, twenty-seven live bass were brought by Mr. Samuel Tisdale, of East Wareham, Mass., from Saratoga Lake and put into Flax Lake, near his home. In the years 1851 and 1852, others were brought to the number of two hundred and reared in ponds in the vicinity. The matter was kept quiet and fishing discouraged for five years, when the fish were found to have increased very rapidly. Some twenty-five ponds were stocked in the same county after Mr. Tisdale had initiated the experiment. Afterward, black bass from Mr. Tisdale’s ponds were supplied to a lake in New Hampshire in 1867, and to waters in Connecticut and Massachusetts. In 1866 the Cuttyhunk Club, of Massachu- setts, introduced black bass into a pond in their grounds. In the year 1869 the Commissioners of the State, together with private parties, stocked several ponds and the Concord River with black bass, and in the following year other waters were stocked. “Tn Connecticut, in the winter of 1852-53, the black bass was introduced into Waramang Lake, in Litchfield county. They were brought from a small lake in Dutchess County, New York. A few years later they were said to have increased greatly. Another lake in the same county was stocked not long afterward. “ Salstonstall Lake, near New Haven; East Hampton Pond, in Chatham; Winsted Pond, in Winchester, and many ponds and lakes of the state, particularly in the northwest portion, were stocked with the black bass previous to the year 1867. “In the years 1869, 1870, 1871, and 1872, thirty-seven lakes and ponds in different parts of the state were supplied with black bass. “As early as 1864 or 1865 black bass had been put into Rust’s Pond, near Wolfborough, New Hampshire; in 1868 a few were brought to Charlestown and Lakes Massabesic, Sunapee, Penna- cook, and Echo, and Enfield, Wilson’s and Cocheco Ponds were well stocked; in 1870 and 1871 the New Hampshire Commission- ers introduced the black bass from Lake Champlain into the waters of the state at Meredith, Canaan, Webster, Canterbury, DISTRIBUTION. 69 Harrisville, Munsonville, Hillsborough, Warner, Sutton, New London, Andover, Loudon, Concord, and in Croydon. In Massa- besic and Sunapee Lakes, where they had been introduced, in 1868 and 1869, they were found to have increased, and, on the authority of Dr.’W. W. Fletcher, they have become exceedingly numerous in Sunapee Lake. “The Commissioners of the state of Rhode Island, since 1870, have stocked thirty ponds or small lakes in different parts of the state with the black bass. “In Maine, in the fall of 1869, the State Commissioners and the Oquossoe Angling Association introduced from Newburgh, New York, a quantity of black bass. The waters of Duck Pond, at Falmouth; Fitz Pond, in Dedham; Newport and Philips Ponds, Cochnewagan Pond, in Monmouth; Cobbosseecontee Lake, in Win- throp and adjoining towns, were stocked, and a few years after- ward were reported to have increased largely in numbers. “Since the year 1871, black bass [small-mouth] and Oswego bass [large-mouth] have been put into seventy lakes, ponds, or streams of the state of New York by the Commissioners. They had made their way of their own accord through the canals con- necting Lake Erie with the Hudson, into that stream. “Private citizens of Pennsylvania introduced the black bass {small-mouth] into the Susquehanna about 1869, at Harrisburg. In 1873 the tributaries of the Susquehanna, the Potomac, and Delaware Rivers were supplied with black bass by the Commis- sioners at thirty-five different points. “In the year 1854, Mr. William Shriver, of Wheeling, Virginia, planted in the canal basin at Cumberland, Maryland, his former home, a number of the black bass [small-mouth]; from the basin they escaped into the Potomac River, where they have increased immensely at the present day. They were moved from the waters of the Ohio River to their new locality in the tank of a loco- motive. Numerous cases have also occurred of transfer from one locality in the southern states to another. “There have been very many transfers of these valuable species that have not been recorded, as they are easily kept alive while being moved from one place to another, and propagate. surely and yapidly in ponds, lakes, and rivers. “These details are given because they show the facility with 70 Book oF THE Buack Bass. which comparatively barren waters may be stocked to a con- siderable extent with good food-fishes, and they exhibit the general interest and attention that have been given to this mode of propagation.” In the account above given, reference is made to the stocking of the Potomac River with black bass by Gen- eral W. W. Shriver, of Wheeling, West Virginia. As this matter is often alluded to on account of the marvelous in- crease of the fish from so small a beginning — less than thirty bass having been originally transplanted — and as other parties have been accredited with the praiseworthy act who had nothing whatever to do with it, and whom I will not even mention here, it may not seem out of place to give the subject a little more space in this connection. The earliest reference to the matter, of which I have any knowledge, is contained in a letter describing the hab- its of the black bass, written by Mr. John Eoff, of Wheel- ing, West Virginia, and published in the Report of the Smithsonian Institution for 1854, and is as follows: “Mr. William Shriver, a gentleman of this place, and son of the late David Shriver, Esq., of Cumberland, Maryland, thinking the Potomac River admirably suited to the cultivation of the bass, has commenced the laudable undertaking of stocking that river with them; he has already taken, this last season, some twenty or more in a live-box, in the water-tank on the locomotive, and placed them in the canal basin at Cumberland, where we are in hopes they will expand and do well, and be a nucleus from which the stock will soon spread.” General Shriver, himself, in a letter to Philip T. Tyson, of Baltimore, Agricultural Chemist of Maryland, in Sep- tember, 1860, says: «* * * The enterprise or experiment was contemplated by me long before the completion of the Baltimore and Ohio Railroad to the Ohio River at Wheeling, but no satisfactory mode of trans- DIstTRIBUTION. 71 portation presented itself to my mind until after the completion of the great work (in, I believe, the year 1853), and in the fol- lowing year I made my first trip (although I made several after- wards in the same year), carrying with me my first lot of fish in a large tin bucket, perforated, and which I made to fit the opening in the water-tank attached to the locomotive, which was supplied with fresh water at the regular water stations along the line of the road, and thereby succeeded well in keeping the fish (which were young and small, having been selected for the purpose) alive, fresh, and sound. “This lot of fish, as well as every subsequent one, on my arrival at Cumberland, were put into the basin of the Chesapeake & Ohio Canal, from which they had free egress and ingress to the Potomac River and its tributaries, both above and below the dam. * * #0? General Shriver also states in a subsequent letter to Dr. Asa Wall, of Winchester, Virginia, dated September 17, 1867: “The number of these black bass taken to the Potomac River by me, as well as I can now recollect, was about thirty. * * *” Mr. Edward Stabler, a well-known and reliable gentle- man of Maryland, in a letter to G. T. Hopkins, of the Board of Water Commissioners of Baltimore City, dated, “ Baltimore, 10th Mo., 28, ’65,” and published in the “ Baltimore Sun ” during the same month, says: “After much delay and frequent disappointments and loss, from the lack of suitable transportation, I have succeeded in taking in the upper Potomac, and safely transporting to Baltimore, a fine lot of ‘black bass’ [small-mouth], with which to stock ‘Swan Lake,’ and also those in Druid Hill Park. “As a brief history of the introduction of this superior fish into the tributaries of the Chesapeake, and east of the Alleghanies — for they are, in my opinion, before the trout, both for sport and the table — may not be without interest to some, it may be stated that some thirteen years since, my son, A, G. Stabler, then a con- 2 Book oF THE BuAck Bass. ductor on the Baltimore & Ohio Railroad, in connection with two public-spirited gentlemen of Wheeling (Forsythe and Shriver), brought from Wheeling Creek, West Virginia, a small lot of bass in the water-tank of his tender. They were placed in the Potomac, near Cumberland, and from this stock, the Potomac, for more than two hundred miles, and all its large tributaries — the Seneca, Shenandoah, Cherry Creek, Sleepy Creek, Great and Little Caca- pon, Patterson’s Creek, South and North Branch, ete.— afford fine fishing. “They are, I know, from the Great Falls to a considerable distance west of Cumberland, for I have recently so taken them, and often weighing from five to seven pounds — from four to five pounds is not unusual. * * *” The “ Baltimore American” in June, 1874, in an article on Fish Culture, remarked incidentally : “Tt was twenty years ago, that Alban G. Stabler and J. P. Dukehart, together with Forsythe and Shriver, brought a small lot of black bass in the tender of a locomotive from Wheeling Creek, West Virginia, and put them in the Potomac. From this small beginning, sprang the noble race of fish which now swarm in the river.” It is certain from the above evidence, that General Shriver was the leading spirit in the enterprise, assisted, no doubt, by Mr. Forsythe, of Wheeling, and Mr. A. G. Stabler, of Baltimore. The latter gentleman, being the conductor of the train which carried the bass — and there is no evidence showing that more than one lot was taken — certainly had some share in the transaction; and if he was a “chip off the old block ”— for his father, above-men- tioned, was an enthusiastic angler — it would naturally be expected that he would have taken a lively interest in the affair. The circumstance is one in which I have always felt the greatest interest, for it occurred at the time when I first DISTRIBUTION. "3 left my native city of Baltimore for a home in the west; and I have a distinct impression of the matter, made at the time of its occurrence, either from having heard it fre- quently spoken of, or from reading accounts of it in the public prints of the day; and my early impressions have always connected the name of Mr. Stabler, then a con- ductor of the Baltimore & Ohio Railroad Company, with the praiseworthy act. At all events, it excited my curiosity as to the black bass, which I had then never seen, and prompted me to seek the acquaintance of that grand game-fish, which I very soon afterward proceeded to do, in the Miami River, near Cincinnati. It is scarcely necessary to say that I have ever since been on terms of the closest intimacy with him, he having almost supplanted, in my affections, the love I once bore my former piscatorial friends, the striped bass, the blue-fish, and the white perch of the Chesapeake and the Patapsco; but I must confess to an occasional retro- spective weakness, and a kindly yearning for the old-time friends of my boyish days, not excepting the diminutive, but delicious “ gudgeon ” of the upper Patapsco and Her- ring Run. 74 Book oF THE Buiack Bass. CHAPTER VI. HABITS OF THE BLACK BASS. “«* * * they mutually labor, both the spawner and the melter, — to cover their spawn with sand,— or, watch it,— or hide it in some secret place, unfrequented by vermin or by any fish but themselves.”— Izaak WALTON. SPAWNING AND HatcHING. BLACK BASS are very prolific, the females yielding fully one-fourth of their weight in spawn, or from two thou- sand to twenty thousand eggs, according to age and weight. The eggs are of the adhesive or glutinous class, and can not be manipulated in the same way as those of the salmon, trout, or shad (which latter are non-adhesive and sepa- rate) by the fish culturist. The eggs are inclosed or en- veloped in a glutinous matter of an adhesive character, which sinks at once to the bottom of the nest and become glued to the pebbles, rocks, sticks, ete. The period of spawing extends from early spring to mid- summer, according to the section of country, and tempera- ture of the water, and without regard to species; in the southern states occurring as early as March, and in the northern states and Canada, from the middle of May until the middle of July, always earlier in very shallow waters, and somewhat later in those of greater depth. ‘ In Waukesha County, Wisconsin, I observed a difference of from one to four weeks in the time of spawning, in the numerous lakes of that locality, owing to the difference in temperature of said lakes, caused by their varying depths. The bass leave their winter quarters in deep water about SPAWNING. 5 a month or six weeks previous to the spawning season, at which times they can be seen running up streams and in the shallow portions of lakes, in great numbers. Soon afterward, the males and females pair off and prepare for breeding. Owing, seemingly, to a semi-migratory habit, and where the conditions are not favorable for them to ascend the inlets of lakes, they will descend outlet streams if the lake does not furnish suitable spawning grounds. They select favorable spots for their nests, usually upon a gravelly or sandy bottom, or on rocky ledges, in water from eighteen inches to three feet deep in rivers, and from two to six feet deep in lakes and ponds, and, if possible, ad- jacent to deep water, or patches of aquatic plants, to which the parent fish retire if disturbed. The nests are circular, saucer-like depressions, varying from one to three feet (usually about twice the length of the fish) in diameter, which are formed by the male fish, usually, by fanning and scouring from the pebbles all sand, silt, and vegetable debris, by means of their tails and fins, and by removing larger obstacles with their mouths. This gives to the beds a bright, clean, and white appearance, which in clear’ water can be seen at a distance of several score yards. I have seen hundreds of such nests, in groups, almost touching each other, in the clear-water lakes of Wisconsin, Michigan, and Minnesota. Sometimes the nests are formed upon a muddy bottom, with a pavement or foundation of small sticks and leaves, from which the mud and slime have been washed and scoured; and especially is this the case with the large- mouth bass, which will also make its nest upon the roots of water plants. The females deposit their iio on the bottom of the nests, usually in rows, which are fecundated by the male 76 Book oF THE BLACK Bass. and become glued to the pebbles or sticks contained therein. The eggs are hatched in from one to two weeks depend- ing on the temperature of the water, but usually in from eight to ten days. When hatched, the young bass are almost perfectly formed, from one-fourth to one-half of an inch in length, and cover the entire bed, where they can be easily detected by their constant motion. After hatching, the young fry remain over the bed from two to seven days, usually ‘three or four, when they retire into deep water, or take refuge in the weeds, or under stones, logs, and other hiding- places. During the period of incubation the nests are carefully guarded by the parent fish, usually by the males, who re- main over them, and by a constant motion of the fins, -ereate a current which aerates the eggs and keeps them ‘ free from all sediment and debris. After the eggs are hatched, and while the young remain on the nests, the vigilance of the parent fish becomes increased and un- ceasing, and all suspicious and predatory intruders are driven away. Their anxiety and solicitude for their eggs and young, and their apparent disregard of their own safety at this time, is well-known to poachers and pot-fishers, who take advantage of this trait and spear or gig them on their nests. They also take them with the minnow or crawfish. Of course the bass do not “bite” at this season, volun- tarily, but when the bait is persistently held under their noses, they at first endeavor to drive it away or remove it from the nests, and finally, I think, swallow it in sheer desperation. Major Isaac Arnold, Jr., while in command of the Arsenal, at Indianapolis, Indiana, prepared a small pond in SPAWNING. vad the grounds and stocked it with small-mouth bass from White River and Fall Creek. or several years he had the opportunity of closely observing the fish during the breed- ing season, and records the following interesting data :* “T placed the bass in the pond for the sole purpose of noticing them during the breeding season, but the water in the pond was so crowded with a growth of alge that my observations have not been satisfactory. I think the female prepares the spawning ground or bed, after which the male joins her. Whilst the female is preparing the bed the males fight with each other for posses- sion. * * * The male presses the roe from the female by u series of bites or pressures along her belly with his mouth, the female lying upon her side during the operation. The male ejects the milt upon or over the roe from time to time, and the spawn- ing process lasts for two or three days. When the spawning is over, the male disappears from the scene, and the female remains upon the nest extremely pugnacious, allowing nothing to approach until the eggs have hatched and the young fry are a week or ten days old. The young fish commence at once to prey upon each other and continue until they are two or three weeks old, when cannibalism ceases and there is no more danger from that source.” This accords, in the main, with my own observations, though I have never observed the male biting or pressing the abdomen of the female with his mouth; this feature, however, has been confirmed by Mr. Geo. C. Rixford, of Rixford, Florida, who observed the occurrence in that state. It would seem, then, that this proceeding is not uncommon to both species, as Major Arnold’s observations were con- fined to the small-mouth, and those of Mr. Rixford to the large-mouth bass. I have often seen the female alone, and sometimes the male, and sometimes both together, spinning rapidly * Successful Propagation of Black Bass. By Major Isaac Ar- nold, Jr., U.S. A. < Bulletin U. S. Fish Commission, 11, 1882. "8 Book oF THE Biack Bass. around the nest, upon their sides, ejecting the eggs or milt, which sank at once to the bottom. When the fish were in pairs, the edges of their bellies would be toward each other, sometimes in contact, as they circled around quite close to the bottom, with jerky, tremulous motions; but I never saw the male pressing the spawn from the female with his mouth. I record the following interesting item for the benefit of future observers. My own opinion is that such nests are constructed in lakes of considerable depth, with steep shores, where suitable bottom in shallow water can not be found, and the bass resort to this expedient for the pur- pose of bringing the eggs within the proper distance of the surface in order to obtain light and air. ‘“ Homo,” of Philadelphia, thus writes to “ Forest and Stream :” “While in Grand Rapids, Mich., during my late vacation, I was informed by Dr. Parker, of the State Fish Commission, and a Mr. Hill, of that city, of a new feature in the habits of the black bass during spawning time, which had come under the notice of those gentlemen. It was that of the nest building of these fish within two or three feet of the surface in ten and fifteen feet of water. Mr. Hill told me he had frequently observed, at the head of some lakes and ponds in Michigan, a collection of ring moss and other vegetable matter, placed with apparent design on the top of brush heaps which rested on the bottom of the lake and extended nearly to the surface of the water. Not knowing what they were, he made a critical examination and found them always guarded by the bass which had constructed the nest in the same manner in which they protect their ordinary nests made in the bed of the stream or pond. In many cases the nests would be three or four feet in diameter and larger than the top of the brush pile on which they rested. This habit of the bass I have never heard of before, and both Mr. Hill and Dr. Parker confessed they had never seen an account of it published. It may be some of your cor- respondents know of it and can give further light on the subject. May it not be that some peculiar character of the bed of these SPAWNING. ve!) bodies of water, where the nests are found, renders it impossible for the spawn of the fish which inhabit them to properly develop if deposited there, and the nest building is resorted to to aid in a better or more speedy hatching of the eggs?) Perhaps more sun- light is wanted. I am at w loss to give a better explanation of the matter.” The U. S. Bureau of Fisheries and the Fish Commis- sions of several states have been experimenting for some years in the pond culture of black bass; in most instances by furnishing artificial nests of various kinds, in which the bass spawn. When the fry rise from the nests they are in- closed by screens or netting and subsequently removed to nursery ponds. This plan has not yet been attended by extraordinary success. The most practical way, so far, is to stock new waters with the parent fish and allow them to breed naturally. It is to be hoped, in view of the great demand for small black bass for stocking purposes, that the artificial plan mentioned, or some other, may be crowned with complete success. About 1868 to 1870, while residing in Wisconsin, I ex- perimented with the natural propagation of the black bass, by placing a number of adult fish of both species in a pond on my home grounds, which I connected with a lake by a roomy ditch. From blinds of bushes on the banks I watched, faithfully, the nesting and spawning of the fish for several seasons. A few days after the fry left the nests the parent fish were driven out of the pond and through the ditch into the lake. Suitable screens were then placed in the ditch and the young bass were kept until late in the autumn, when they too were turned into the lake. I reared many thousands each season in this way, which was but a slight modification of nature’s plan. 80 Book oF THE Buack Bass. Foop aND GROWTH. After the young bass leave the spawning beds their food at first consists of minute crustaceans; and later of insect larve ; as they grow older and larger they devour worms, tadpoles, small fish, ete.; and, in later life, they vary their diet with crawfish, frogs, mussels, and minnows, until, at- taining a weight of two pounds, they will bolt any thing from an angle-worm to a young musk-rat. Dr. 8. A. Forbes, of the Illinois State Laboratory of Natural History, was engaged, for a number of years, in the study of the food of fishes and birds. His examinations have been of the most careful and painstaking character. The following results have been attained in reference to the food of the black bass species.* Of the large-mouth black bass he examined the food of fourteen adults and seventeen young of different ages. The first group, consisting of five specimens under one inch in length, taken in June, July, and August of different years, showed that the entire food consisted of minute crustacea, all Entomostraca, except in the case of a single fish, which . showed seven per cent. of a very young amphipod. Six specimens, from one and a fourth inches to one and a half inches long had eaten minute fishes (twenty-nine per cent.) and insects (forty-six per cent.), the crustacea drop- ping to twenty-five per cent. The fishes eaten were not large enough to determine the species. ‘Two specimens be- tween two and three inches long had eaten only insects. Four specimens varying from three to three and one-half inches in length had eaten nothing but insects and their larve. In the fourteen adults the food consisted of seven * The Food of Fishes. By S. A. Forbes. < Bulletin 111, Ills. State Lab. Nat. Hist., 18, 1880. Foop aND GROWTH. 81 per cent. of crawfishes, a few insects, and eighty-six per cent. of small fishes. In regard to the small-mouth bass, Dr. Forbes says: “T have made full notes of the food of twenty-seven specimens ~— three adult and the others young. I had none of these species under an inch in length, but, judging from the general resem- blance of the food of this and the preceding bass at later ages, I do not doubt that this will also be found to feed at first on Entomostraca, although insect food is possibly more important to it from the beginning.” Seven small-mouth bass, from one to two inches in length, had eaten only five per cent. of Hntomostraca, the remainder of the food consisting of insects and their larve. Ten specimens, between two and three inches long, showed, in addition to the insect food, five per cent. of fishes, and jn those ranging from three to four inches in length the amount of fish food increased to fourteen per cent., the in- sect food dropped to seven per cent., with seventy-nine per cent. of crustacea. The three adults had eaten thirty-eight per cent. of fishes and sixty-two per cent. of crawfishes. Some allowance should be made for the character of the different waters in which the specimens were collected, as Entomostraca and other minute crustacea are more abund- ant in still water, while the larve of certain insects are more plentiful under the stones of rapid streams. Where food is plentiful the young grow rapidly, reach- “ing a length of two inches in a few months after hatching, and at a year old, will measure, at least, four inches. At two years of age, they will be found from eight to twelve inches in length, weighing about a pound, and will grow nearly or quite a pound a year thereafter, until they attain their maximum weight. They arrive at maturity in from two to three years, ac- 6 82 Book OF THE Buiack Bass. cording as to whether the conditions for their growth were favorable or otherwise. The maximum weight of the small- mouth form of the north and west may be said to be four or five pounds, and of the large-mouth form, from six to eight pounds, though there are rare exceptions to this rule. In the warm waters of the southern states, which pre- serve a more equable temperature than those of the north- ern states, the large-mouth black bass grow to an immense size, their maximum weight, in Florida, being from twelve to fifteen pounds. In northern waters they do not grow nearly so large, six to eight pounds being the limit. Under conditions and circumstances favorable to their growth they will in- crease in weight, as before stated, about a pound a year; but under adverse circumstances or unfavorable conditions their growth is much slower; therefore, no rule of general application can be established from any single instance, or as the result of any exclusively local test or experiment. The growth of black bass is affected not only by the supply of food and temperature of water, but also by the extent of range. Bass in small ponds do not thrive so well, nor grow so fast; the smaller the extent of their range, the slower will be their growth, and, indeed, this is true of any other fish; for it is well known that fish con- fined in aquaria, in springs or wells, grow so very slowly, that their increase in size is hardly appreciable from year to year, even though their supply of food be abundant. An equally well-attested fact is, that the largest bass are found in the largest bodies of water, or where the range is extensive; extreme depth of water seeming to be more favorable to their growth than mere extent of sur- face. For example, I know of several shallow lakes in Wisconsin, where the bass seldom grow to exceed two Foop anp GRowTH. 83 pounds, while in deeper lakes in the same vicinity they attain the usual maximum weight of four or five pounds; and in Green Lake, a large and deep lake near Ripon, in the same state, I once caught a string of thirty black bass, mostly of the large-mouth species, weighing from four to eight pounds each, and fully averaging six pounds. An instance, showing the rapid growth of black bass, is related by Mr. Charles J. Pearson, at that time Fish Warden for Morris County, New Jersey: He states that in the fall of 1876, fifty black bass, measuring from two and a half to four inches in length, were placed in D. L. Miller’s pond at Madison, Morris County, New Jersey. On October 17th, 1877, about one year from the time of put- ting them in, Mr. Miller had occasion to draw the water down, for some repairs. He had the flume so arranged as to take any fish that might run out. Eleven bass were caught. They measured from ten to thirteen inches in length, and were undoubtedly the same fish which were put in the year before, as none of this species of fish were ever known in the pond before. | There is not an absolute uniformity of growth in fishes, any more than in other creatures; thus, some fish will out- grow others of the same hatching until double their size, a fact made very apparent in the artificial culture of brook trout, salmon, etc.; but black bass will grow with wonder- ful rapidity where an equable temperature of water and an abundance of food obtain. As an instance of the influence of an abundant supply of food upon the growth of black bass, A. N. Cheney, of Glens Falls, New York, related to me the following circumstance, and presented me with a fine photograph of the two fish alluded to: “TI send you a photograph of two large-mouth bass*caught by myself, They are, or, rather, one of them is, the largest bass 84 Book OF THE BLAcK Bass. ever caught in any waters about here, weighing seven pounds and fourteen ounces, and the other six and a quarter pounds. The most remarkable fact is, perhaps, the effect of food upon the growth of fish. The two fish in question were caught in Long Pond, near here, August 1, 1877. Long Pond was stocked with six small bass from Lake George, New York, in 1866, they having been put into a stream emptying into the pond by some gentlemen, who, on their way from camping a week at Lake George, had to cross this stream to reach home; and the putting the fish into the stream was suggested by their catching a number of small bass during the last day in camp. “The fact of their deposit was almost forgotten, when, in 1874-75, quantities of bass were discovered in the pond, which had hitherto been inhabited by pickerel, perch, and quantities of bait fish, minnows, silver and gold shiners, etc. While Lake George has never been known to yield a bass over six and a half pounds, Long Pond has turned out at least a dozen over that weight.” Upon a careful examination of the photograph, the fish mentioned were found to be, not large-mouth, but small- mouth bass without any doubt, and were extraordinary examples of that species, the usual maximum weight of which is about five pounds. Afterward Mr. Cheney re- corded the capture of several more of these small-mouth giants from the same waters (Long Pond, or Glen Lake). One of them, taken by a Mr. Reed, was seen and weighed by Mr. Cheney, who gave its proportions as follows: weight, eight and one-quarter pounds; length, from end of snout, to fork of tail-fin, twenty-two and one-half inches; girth, eighteen and one-half inches. Mr. Fred Mather saw this fish and pronounced it a small-mouth bass. The other and larger fish was captured in the same waters by a Mr. Boynton. Mr. Cheney weighed and measured it and gave its weight as eight pounds and ten ounces, its extreme length as twenty-five inches, and its girth eighteen and three-fourth inches. Foop AND GROWTH. 85 Following this several more immense small-mouth bass were taken from the same waters and recorded by Mr. Cheney, who tabulated them as follows: Captor. Weight. Length. . Girth. Cheney........... 8% lbs. 22 in. 1814 in. ROOG essed 2c axle w 8 8% lbs. 22% in. 1814 in. Boynton.......... 8 lbs. 100z, 25 = in. 18% in. Paradiso ice 600 de 8 Ibs. 1202. 23% in. 19 in. Parker.....5.:5..: 10 Ibs. 25%in. ' 19 in. Seelye ........... 11% lbs. 25 in. 21 in, Mr. Cheney commenting on the above said: “T weighed and measured Reed’s, Boynton’s, Parker’s and my own fish; the other figures were given to me by the people who caught the fish and confirmed by witnesses.” In preparing tables of exact measurements of the two species, as also tables showing the relative weight as to length, I found so much discrepancy in these respects in the same species from different localities, and even in fish from the same section, owing to slight variations of shape and conformation, that I concluded they would not sub- serve the purposes of a general guide, and so omitted them. This reason is very apparent as exemplified in the follow- ing list of fish from contiguous waters. The “ Toronto Star” offered a prize of a fifteen-dollar ‘rod to the angler taking the largest small-mouth bass in the province of Ontario, Canada, during the summer of 1903, the competition to close on September 15th. The fish entered for the prize, and which were all from lakes, except the last, a stream fish, were as follows: Length. Girth. Weight. 23 in. 17s in. 7 Ibs. 21 in. 17_—sin. 6 Ibs. 4 oz. 22% in. 15% in. 6 lbs. % oz 86 Book oF THE BuackK Bass. Length. Girth. Weight. 20 in. 14. in. 6 Ibs. 22 in. 17° sin. 5 lbs. 14 oz. 19% in. 16 in. 5 Ibs. 9 oz. 221 in. 14% in. 5 Ibs. 8 oz. 21 in. 14% in. 5 Ibs. 8 oz, 20 in. 17 in. 5 Ibs. 8 oz. 21 in. 18 in. 5 Ibs. 714 02. 215 in. 15% in. 5 lbs. 7 oz. 22 in. 16% in. 5 lbs. 6 02, 20% in. ; 5 lbs. 3 oz. 195% in. 14% in. 5 lbs. 3 oz, 20 in. 15 in. 5 Ibs. 2014 in. 13% in. 4 lbs. 14 oz, 19% in. 14 in. 4 Ibs. 13 oz, 21) in. 1414 in. 4 lbs. 12 oz. 1814 in. 12% in. A Ibs. 12 oz, 21% in. 14% in. 4 Ibs. 9 oz, 21% in. 16 in. 4 Ibs. 8 oz. 20 in. 15 in. 4 lbs. 4 oz. 2014 in. 14% in. 4 lbs. 2 oz. 1814 in. 3 Ibs. 9 oz. Mr. H. W. Ross, when in Florida, caught, in a “ clear, deep, lily-bound lake,” near Altoona, in that state, a large- mouth black bass which, he stated, weighed twenty-three and one-eighth pounds, and measured, from tip of nose to tip of tail, thirty-seven and one-half inches, and in girth, twenty-nine and one-half inches. The head of this fish was sent to the office of “ Forest and Stream,” in New York, and its dimensions were given by the editor as follows : “Its maxillary bone measures four and three-fourths inches; the head is seven and one-half inches from the tip of the upper jaw to the end of the opercle, and the lower jaw projects one inch. The greatest girth of the head is sixteen and one-half inches.” HIBERNATION. 87 I have taken the large-mouth bass in Florida up to fourteen pounds on the artificial fly, and as heavy as twenty pounds with bait. It is obvious that where the large- mouth black bass does not hibernate, as in Florida, and is active all the year and constantly feeding, its size and weight will be much greater than in northern waters. HIBERNATION. Black bass undoubtedly hibernate, except in the extreme southern and south-western states; but in the colder climate of the north and west it has been. proven in numerous instances that they bury themselves in the mud, in the erevices of rocks under masses of weeds or sunken logs, in the deepest water, and remain dormant until spring. This habit has been doubted by some, inasmuch as an occasional bass has been caught through the ice, though such instances are rare indeed, and all those of which I have any knowledge occurred late in the winter, or early in the spring. As one swallow does not make a summer, these unusual cases must be considered as merely excep- tions to the general rule. During a residence of ten years in Wisconsin, where fishing through the ice was constantly practiced during the winter, and where tons of pickerel, pike-perch and yel- low-perch were so taken in a single season, J never knew of a single black bass being taken in that manner except very late in the winter, or in edrly spring, say in March, just before the breaking up of the ice; and even those in- stances were of rare occurrence, and happened only during ‘ unusually mild weather; and these same waters, be it remembered, afforded the finest black bass fishing during the summer and fall. 88 Book oF THE BuLack Bass. Dr. D. C. Estes, of Lake City, Minnesota, an accom- plished angler and naturalist, records a similar experience in regard to Lake Pepin; he says: “The pike and pickerel are the only fish taken here in the winter. It is strange to many what becomes of the countless numbers of other game fish that throng these waters in the sum- mer season. Bass, which are so numerous then, are never seen in winter. I am quite sure that not a single bass was ever caught here through the ice. I have for years tried all depths of water to raise one, or to discover one, but have thus far failed. T must believe, then, that they hibernate.” Genio C. Scott, in “ Fishing in American Waters,” quotes an intelligent and veteran black bass angler of central New York, in regard to this habit, and who fur- nishes the following conclusive evidence: “T have never known them [black bass] to be taken in winter, and I think they seek a particular location and remain torpid during winter. My attention was directed to this fact about thirty years since. At that time I was in the haibt of spearing fish in a mill-dam on the outlet of Seneca Lake, at Waterloo, Seneca County, New York. From April to November I found numbers of bass; from December to March I found all other varieties, but no bass. “Tn the winter of 1837,.the water was shut off at the lake for the purpose of deepening the channel to improve the navigation. This was considered a favorable time to quarry the limestone in the bed of the river; and upon moving the loose rock in the above- named mill-dam, where the ledges cropped out, there were found hundreds of bass imbedded in their slime, and positively packed together in the crevices and fissures of the rocks. My subse- quent experience has done much to convince me that my theory is correct.” On this point, A. N. Cheney related to me the follow- ing incidents: “A few years ago a man, Seth Whipple, living on the Hudson River, near Glens Falls, in drawing some sunken logs from the HIBERNATION. 89 river, during the winter, for firewood, found in the hollow of one of the logs, six black bass (small-mouth), weighing from a half to two pounds; they were nearly dormant. “The father of Pension Commissioner Bentley. who lives at Glens Falls, and has some trout ponds on his place, to gratify a boy bought of him a black bass, and placed the fish in a spring. When autumn came the fish was missing, and was supposed to be stolen. During the succeeding winter the spring partly ‘dried up, and to restore the water supply the spring was dug deeper. Dur- ing the operation it was found necessary to remove an old stump in the side of the spring, when to his surprise the bass was found underneath the stump, in a hole, evidently prepared for winter burrow.” Mr. John Eoff, of Wheeling, West Virginia, a remark- ably close observer, says, in the “ Report of the Smith- sonian Institution,” for 1854: “In the winter season they retire to deep and still water, and apparently hide under rocks, logs, etc., and remain there until the first of April.” I could multiply evidence on this point, if necessary, but these several opinions, founded upon observations made in the widely separated states of Wisconsin and Minnesota in the west, New York in the north, and West Virginia in the middle section of our country must suffice. That black bass do not hibernate in the extreme south, is well known; and to this circumstance, may be attributed, in a measure, their larger growth. Still, it is not unreason- able to suppose, that the black bass of that section have a period of repose and seclusion, analogous to hibernation, at some other season of the year, possibly during the fervid heat of the summer solstice; for it is usual for the bass of the north and west to cease biting and retire to the deepest water during an unusually heated term in summer. The fact that the best season for black bass fishing varies 90 Book oF THE Buack Bass. in different sections —in the north being from July till October; in the west and most northerly of the southern states in the spring and fall; and in the extreme south during the winter season — would naturally lead one to suppose that the period of dormancy in the black bass oc- curs at different seasons in different localities, and is in- fluenced by climatic conditions, or the supply of food. But, notwithstanding the evidence heretofore adduced in support of this fact, the occasional catching of a black bass during the winter season, in the north and west, is sometimes heralded as a proof that former observers have been mistaken, and that these fishes, or at least the large- mouth bass, do not hibernate. Perhaps the term hibernation is not well understood, which may account for this hasty and erroneous conclu- sion. Hibernation does not necessarily imply, as supposed by some, a state of complete torpidity or profound sleep during the entire winter. To hibernate, according to Webster, is “ to pass the season of winter in close quarters, or io seclusion ;” and that is just what the black bass of both species do, in northern and western waters, as every one who has given the subject any intelligent investiga- tion is prepared to admit. When the temperature falls as low as 50°, the bass of running streams retire to the deepest holes, in the neigh- borhood of shelving rocks, if possible, under which they seclude themselves and remain in a listless condition. So also, in lakes or ponds, they leave their accustomed haunts, and retire to the deepest places, near bottom springs, masses of weeds, moss, ete. After a few days of warm or mild weather, especially if the temperature goes above 50°, they will venture out into water of somewhat less depth, when they may be induced to take a bait in a half-hearted HIBERNATION. 91 manner, while the mild weather lasts; but, on the approach of a cold snap they again retire to the deepest water. When the temperature rises above 50°— say to 55°— and does not fall below again, they leave their winter quarters for that season. From personal observation I am pretty familiar with the habits of both species of black bass, at all seasons of the year, in all sections, except in the New England states, and I am convinced that, with the exception of those in the Gulf states, both spécies of black bass hibernate in a greater or less degree, according to the temperature of the waters. The small-mouth bass of western Lake Erie hibernate under the ledges and cavernous reefs about the Bass Islands. In the spring, after the first fine weather in April or May, when emerging from their winter quarters, they linger on the reefs and bite ravenously for a week or two, or may be two or three weeks, until the weather be- comes still warmer, when they cease biting suddenly and depart toward their spawning grounds, wherever that may be, for they certainly do not spawn in the deep water on the reefs. After the cold northeast storms in September they again congregate on the reefs, preparatory to going into winter quarters, and bite until cold weather sets in, when they disappear under the ledges and reefs. A few stragglers, however, remain during the summer and spawn in the coves about the islands, but the main army seek other grounds more suitable for procreation, and where the food for the voung bass is more plentiful. 92 Book oF THE Buack Bass. CHAPTER VII. INTELLIGENCE AND SPECIAL SENSES. Venator. But, master! do not trouts see us, in the night? Piscator. Yes; and hear, and smell, too, both then and in the day-time.— Izaak WALTON. Tuer brain of fishes differs so materially in size, con- formation, substance and analogy from that of other ani- mals, that it has been the rule of specialists to attribute to this class of vertebrates a very low order of intelligence. Tn opposition to this theory, however, Dr. Francis Day, in a paper read before the Linnean Society of London, Eng- land, endeavored to show that fishes possessed a far higher order of intelligence than is usually accorded them. He claimed that the experience of himself and others indicated that they possessed emotions and affections, and in support of that view he showed that they constructed nests, transported and defended their eggs, protected their young, manifested their affections for each other, recog- nized human beings, could be tamed, exhibited the emo- tions of fear, anger, and revenge, uttered sounds, hid from danger, sought protection by attaching themselves to the bodies of other animals, and had peculiar modes of de- fense; that they left the water in search of food, and that they sometimes combined for attack and defense. Every observant angler and naturalist has, in his own experience, proved the truth of many of the above asser- tions, and, no doubt, some have observed traits of intelli- gence still more convincing. The wonderful faculty of anadromous fishes, seeking out and ascending their native streams during the breeding SENSE oF SIGHT. 93 season, even after being purposely carried hundreds of miles away, has commanded the admiration of biologists, yet they can see nothing in the small and jelly-like brain of the fish to account for the marvelous habit, but instinct; on the same principle, perhaps, that Coleridge accounts for the blindness of Love: “His eyes are in his mind.” SENSE OF SIGHT. As the optic nerves of fishes show an extraordinary de- velopment, we must naturally conclude that they are as sharp-sighted in their element as we in ours. This, I think, no experienced fly-fisher will deny; yet it is the fashion for biologists to accord to fishes only a moderate visual capacity, as compared with land animals. But good, simple old Izaak Walton was much nearer the truth when he said: “A trout that is more sharp-sighted than any hawk you have named, and more watchful and timorous than your high-mettled merlin is bold.” “Jn the range of their vision and acuteness of sight,” says Dr. Giinther, “fishes are very inferior to the higher classes of vertebrates; yet, at the same time, it is evident that they perceive their prey or approaching danger from a considerable distance.” We are led to believe, from the investigations of anato- mists, that the organs of special sense in fishes are very imperfectly developed; I am constrained to believe, how- ever, from the observations of myself and many others, that fishes have the senses of sight, hearing, and smell developed in a much greater degree than is generally supposed. The diversities in form and position of the eyes of 94 Book oF THE Buack Bass. different fishes, prove that they are of the greatest use to them, in procuring food, and in escaping from their enemies; and are placed “where they will do the most good.” In the majority of fishes, which are constantly moving about, and frequent alike the surface and bottom of streams, the eyes are placed in the usual position of most other animals, one on each side of the head. In those which stay more constantly in the lower depth of waters, the eyes are placed on top of the head, as in the star-gazers ; while in the flat fishes, which recline or swim on one side near the bottom, both eyes are placed on the same side of the head, enabling them to obtain the benefit of both eyes while in that position. In the pike-perch, which is noctur- nal in its habits, the eyes are unusually large, as is the case with other animals who seek their food mostly at night. It is a popular idea that fish are necessarily near-sighted on account of the conformation of the eye, which is large, round and prominent; and the main argument adduced to support this theory, is the readiness with which they will take an artificial fly, trolling spoon or other artificial bait, which resemble in but slight degree the natural objects of food that they are intended to represent, if, indeed, they are intended to represent any thing. It is often the case that those anglers who are most strenuous in their theory that fish are-near-sighted, stultify themselves by carrying a large and most varied assortment of artificial flies, of all shapes and colors, in order to meet the “ fastidious taste” of the fish, that often refuse one pattern or color, and rise eagerly to another, which could not be the fact were they so near-sighted as they believe. The consistency of these anglers would be more apparent, if. they would adopt Mr. Cholmondely Pennell’s theory of SENSE oF SIGHT. 95 artificial fiies, and confine themselves exclusively to his three typical flies-— brown, yellow, and green hackles. Now, I am not of those who believe that our brave game-fishes possess such extreme gullibility, as to mistake an artificial lure for the genuine article, upon the hypothe- sis of near-sightedness. My opinion, founded upon nu- merous experiments, is, that fishes see and hear as well, in and through the medium of the water, for all practical purposes, as the angler does through the medium of the atmosphere; the clearer and more rarified the medium, the clearer and greater the range of vision in both in- stances. In muddy or turbid waters the sight of fishes is neces- sarily limited, as ours would be in hazy or foggy weather. Tt is neither fair nor logical to presume that fishes, in water, ought to discern objects in the atmosphere above, any clearer or plainer than we can perceive objects in the water, while standing on the brink. We are altogether too prone to judge evenything from our own standpoint, and to attribute to our own clever- ness results that in all probability depend upon other and extraneous circumstances. Who, of us, could tell a skillfully tied artificial fly from a real one, beneath the water, when its surface was ruffled by a brisk breeze, shadowed by drift- ing clouds, covered with the froth and suds of an eddy, or surmounted by the foam and bubbles of a rapid? Yet, there are those who contend, because fish fail to detect this difference through the same obstacles to clear vision, that they are of a verity near-sighted, and easily fooled by the very poorest semblance of a fly or feathery nondescript; but let one of these persons try a cast of the best flies upon a bright, still day, when the water is per- fectly clear and the surface like a mirror, and if he expects 96 Book oF THE Buiack Bass. to get a rise under such conditions, he himself must be very near-sighted indeed. On the other hand, any one who has seen a black bass dart like an arrow and seize a minnow swimming quietly thirty feet away, or a brook trout flash like a meteor for a dragon fly hovering near the water at the same distance, must admit that their visual powers are sufficient for all practical purposes. It is quite amusing to hear an angler expatiate learnedly on the dimness of sight and dullness of hearing in fishes, and in the next breath caution the tyro to have his cloth- ing conform as nearly as possible with the hues of the foliage skirting the stream; to keep out of sight, tread lightly, and make as little noise as possible; and to assure him, that, even then, the chances are that the fish will see the novice: before he sees the fish. It is a curious contradiction of theory and practice, a fishy illustration of the abstract and concrete. The expla- nation I conceive to be this: our Piscator would be con- sidered a scientific angler, which, in his case, becomes a contradiction of terms; for while blindly holding to the opinions of some closet naturalist, he is practically follow- ing the dictates of his own experience and common sense. Now, it is possible to be scientific and an angler, too, but our science, like our angling, must be practical, and must of necessity be learned by close observation and study of the habits of the fishes as they exist in nature, and not alone from the study of the physical construction of a preserved specimen. I am well aware that many scientists consider fish myopic, or near-sighted; not, however, on account of ex- cessive convexity of the cornea, as is popularly supposed, for it is an exploded theory in medical science that myopia SznsE or Sieur. 97 depends necessarily upon this condition; indeed, in fishes the cornea is almost flat, while in birds of prey, which have a very extended range of vision, the cornea is quite convex. From the lack of analogy, from the great difference in construction of the ocular and auditory apparatuses of fishes and terrestrial animals, and from the wide difference in the properties of the media of air and water, I am con- vinced that the organs of the special senses of sight and hearing in fishes are not well understood at the present day; and I am confident that future investigations will prove them to be possessed of much greater acuteness of vision and hearing, than is now accorded them. Most fresh-water fishes, during the breeding season, take on a more pronounced coloration, the males especially be- coming sometimes quite gorgeous in their nuptial dress. If fishes are so defective in sight as not to distinguish color, why this well-known periodical change in their appearance ? It is a well-known fact that fishes are attracted by any gay, bright, or glittering substance, as a finger-ring, a sleeve-button, or a coin, and have deliberately swallowed them when dropped in the water. I have caught brook trout with wintergreen and partridge berries, the bright scarlet color seeming to allure them, and I have even caught them with a naked bright fish-hook; but all this does not prove that they were the victims of a myopic mistake, or that in their near-sightedness they mistook these various articles for something else; neither does it prove that a black bass will grab at a trolling spoon, a bluefish snap at a bone squid, or a spanish mackerel seize a metal or pearl troll under the delusion that they are really choice shiners, or delicate piscatorial tidbits. A camel, it is said, will bolt all sorts of substances, as v4 98 Boox. oF THE Biack Bass. metal, glass, stones, leather, etc., but when were his short- comings attributed to short-sightedness? Our dogs will often refuse good, clean food and hunt up an old dry bone, a stone, an old shoe, or a stick, and will gnaw them with delight, and even swallow them with evident gratification. Birds will peck at and swallow bright beads, colored threads, etc., and kittens will seize, claw and bite almost any moving small object; but these vagaries are attributed to the idiosyncracies of the animals mentioned, while in fishes they are ascribed to defective sight. But what are a fish’s eyes for? According to our pres- ent knowledge they are to enable him to become “a snap- per-up of unconsidered trifles” with hooks attached to them ! Now, so far as the artificial fly is concerned, when it is cast lightly upon a fretted surface, I think it is generally taken by a fish under the impression that it is a natural insect ; but with regard to trolls of all kinds, as spoons, squids, spinners, propellers, etc., and very often with re- gard to the artificial fly, I am of the opinion that they are taken through a spirit of mere bravado, curiosity or wan- tonness, and not with the idea that they are living objects of prey. They are seized by the fish because they are bright, attractive and in motion; not because they are hungry, but because they are in a biting mood, for we often find, nay, most always find, that fish so taken are already gorged with food. At a meeting of the Manchester Anglers’ Association, in England, Dr. A. Hodgkinson gave an address on the “ Optics of Angling,” which is thus noticed by the “ Lon- don Fishing Gazette :” “In considering the subject of angling optics, we are met, as Dr. Hodgkinson pointed out, by the difficulty that we do not SENSE oF SIGHT. 99 know exactly what the sight of fishes is, but we must assume it to be not much unlike our own, and we are not without grounds for the assumption. By drawings on a blackboard, Dr. Hodg- kinson showed how the eyes of both men and fishes were alike in their main parts, the greatest divergence being that, whereas the optic nerve in man occupies only a small portion of the brain, in fishes it occupies pretty nearly the whole brain; and we may pre- sume, therefore, that the sight of fishes is more sensitive. “Dr. Hodgkinson then dwelt with the phenomena of the pas- sage of rays of light from the rare medium air to the dense me- dium water, and the change in direction that the incident ray undergoes; he pointed out the fact that under certain conditions an angler on the bank might be invisible to a fish in the stream, but the exultation of the gentlemen assembled was probably damped when they heard that, in order practically to discover the distance they must stand from the water in order to be invis- ible, they must take their height and multiply it.by fourteen, which, as an unfortunate angler who was present pointed out, would require him, seeing that he is six feet high, to stand eighty- four feet from the water’s edge before he could take advantage of the invisible mantle Dr. Hodgkinson had promised him. The case, however, is not quite so hopeless as this, for, as the doctor pointed out, the water in which the fly-fisher angles is not gener- ally so smooth as a mirror, and in ripple or broken water it is impossible for fish to see the object on two legs that may be on the bank. “Tn fishing for trout, wading in many streams is a necessity, and by means of an ingeniously constructed tank Dr. Hodgkinson showed not only what the angler looked like to the fish when he waded, but how his aspect was affected by the color of the bot- tom of the river, and that of such cover as there might be on the bank. The rather startling announcement was made and demonstrated, that while the wader was duplicated so far as his legs were concerned, another pair appearing upside down on the actual legs, the man’s body, if visible at all, was far away from the legs, and overhead, where, if we put ourselves in the position of the fishes, we should expect to see nothing but sky. No fish then ever saw a wader with his two halves united, and whether its feeble brain can ever connect together the two distinct objects 100 Boox or THE Buack Bass. — the body up in the air and the legs down in the water — is ex- tremely doubtful. “The tank by which Dr. Hodgkinson was enabled to demon- strate his theories was made so that from one end the observer could, by directing his vision from various depths of water, al- ways look through a slip of glass placed at right angles to the point toward which he looked. In this way, and by use of a little figure to represent a man, the point where invisibility begins (four degrees) could be clearly seen, as well as the effect which the water has of apparently lifting the object much above the position which it occupies.” SENSE oF HEARING. There is no external ear in fishes, the internal ear alone existing, and which is extremely delicate in its construc- tion. Dr. John Hunter observed that it varied much in the different genera of fishes, but that in all it consisted of three curved tubes,-which united one with another. The whole organ is composed of a kind of cartilaginous sub- stance, and in some fishes is crusted over with a thin lamella to keep it from collapsing. The canals terminate in a cavity, in which cavity there is a bone or bones. These ear-bones are familiar to most anglers, and are sometimes very beautiful, resembling porcelain, and are often called “brain-ivory;” those of the sheepshead (Aplodinotus grunniens) of our western waters are known as “ lucky stones,” and are highly prized by boys as pocket pieces. It is the rule among physiologists to say, that while fishes can hear sounds produced in the water, they are incapable of hearing those produced in the air, and even to limit their capacity for hearing accurately those produced in the water. SENSE oF HEARING. "101 Take this, for example, from Mr. Hugh Owen, in “ Land and Water :” “Tt is exceedingly doubtful if fish possess the faculty of hear- ing, in the ordinary sense of the term. Mr. Buckland has ae- curately described the nature of the sensation they do possess, as vibration. There cannot be a doubt that fish have no possible conception of either vicinity, direction, or distance of the vibra- tory disturbances they receive. A distant vibration disturbs a shoal of fishes as much as a near one; and fish feeding eagerly at the bait will be alarmed and dispersed by the beat of 4 steam vessel a mile off. All the stories of fish coming to be fed at the sound of a bell or of a whistle are, of course, fables. Such sounds made in the air will not communicate vibrations to the fish beneath the surbace of the water. They assemble only be- eause they see a figure, and are accustomed to be fed upon such occasions.” No angler or fisherman of experience and observation cah be made to believe such specious and questionable state- ments as the above. He knows better. As fishes live in a denser medium than terrestrial ani- mals, and one that more readily transmits the waves of sound, we should naturally expect to find a corresponding difference in the construction of the organ of hearing. The internal ear of fishes differs only in degree, not in kind, from that of the higher animals; they, of course, have no external ear, nor is one necessary in so dense a medium as water; but for this reason it is the fashion to say that they can only hear vibrations communicated through the medium of the water or the shore, the “ vibrations ” mean- ing considerable “ jars” or “ shocks.” “The ear of fishes lies close under the roof of the skull, and is thus easily accessible to the waves of sound, which are con- ducted partly through the operculum (when present), and partly through the gill slits or spiracle. As we pass to the higher ani- 102 Book oF THE Buiack Bass. mals, however, the auditory organ gradually sinks further and further inward from the surface. Thus a new method for con- ducting the sound waves is necessitated.”— (Wiedersheim. ) “Many Teleostei (true fishes) have fontanelles in the roof of the skull, closed by skin or very thin bone only at the place where the auditory organ approaches the surface, by which means sonorous undulations must be conducted with greater ease to the ear.” — (Giinther. ) “In many Teleostei u most remarkable relation obtains be- tween the organ of hearing and the air-bladder. In the most simple form, this connection is established in percoids and the allied families, in which the two anterior horns of the air-bladder are attached to fontanelles of the occipital region of the skull,”— (Giinther. ) The air-bladder, in such cases, may, in a manner, per- form the functions of a tympanum. I append a few sensible remarks from an article by W. N. Lockington, in “ Pacific Life :” “Tt appears to be not unlikely that fish take no notice of sounds produced in the air, but it is not so easy, unless we can argue the matter from a fish’s point of view, to prove they do not hear those sounds. Take the sense of sight as an illustration of that of hearing. I have often amused myself by making believe to strike a monkey that lived in a cage with a glass front. Accus- tomed to such demonstrations, the monkey simply took no notice. His bright eyes never even winked. Arguing, as was argued in the fish case, I might say monkeys cannot see. “All fishes have an organ of hearing; not a rudimentary organ, but one complete in its kind, and differing from ours only in its degree of development; differing, in fact, much in the same way that the brain, the heart, the intestines, the skeleton, the skin, the limbs, or any other part of a fish differs from that of a quadruped or from our own. “The microphone has gone far toward proving what philoso- phers had previously become convinced of by deductive reasoning, that there is no motion without sound, and therefore that sound is present in numberless instances not evident to our senses. For SENSE oF HEARING. 103 our perception of sound we are dependent upon our sense of hear- ing, which is adapted only to a certain range of sounds; and this range differs in human individuals, for we all know that some other persons hear sounds imperceptible to us. Still more is this true of other animals; they may hear what we can not, yet be deaf to sounds audible to us. “ Strict experiments upon the hearing of fishes have yet to be made. Most of the observations yet made are faulty, either be- cause, first, the observer has supposed that the fish ought, if it can hear, to notice a sound he makes for the purpose; or, second, he has argued, from the standpoint of his own senses, that if a fish hears, the range of its hearing must be nearly the same as his own. “To conclude: that fish have ears, is indisputable; that they hear some sounds produced in the water, scarcely admits of ques- tion; that they hear some sounds produced in the air, even though they may not take notice of them, is probable, but lacks (so far as I know) experimental proof; that they do not hear many sounds which we hear, or at least do not discriminate be- tween sounds which we, with our more highly organized organs, readily distinguish, is almost certain. All of which ends in this, that. fishes hear, but their senses differ in range and delicacy from ours.” A remarkable instance, demonstrating the acuteness of the sense of hearing in fishes, occurred some years ago in California. As it is an exceedingly interesting and well- authenticated fact, and one so totally at variance with pre- conceived notions, I feel justified in reproducing it here. The account was published in the “ San Francisco Chron- icle,” upon the authority of Mr. B. B. Redding, then one of the Fish Commissioners of California: “In Siskiyou County there is a caravansary kept by George Campbell, and known as the Upper Soda Springs Hotel, which is situated on a semicircle of land formed by « bend in the Sacra- mento River. Wishing to have a supply of fresh trout close at hand, Mr, Campbell had a supply of water conducted through a 104 Book or THE Biack Bass, board flume from the river to a natural depression in the ground, thereby creating an excellent fish pond of about half an acre in extent, which he supplied with full-grown trout caught in the river. The supply flume is, for some distance, raised about four feet above the ground. About four hundred feet from the pond, w small rivulet, which is an outlet for irrigating water, flows under the flume, crossing it at right angles and about four feet below it, and empties into the river. “The fall of water from the end of the flume to the surface of the pond is two feet, the water in the flume flowing with a velocity of three miles an hour. The pond has an outlet, which is screened to prevent the escape of the trout. Shortly after the pond was established, the discovery was made that numbers of fish were missing from it. Mr. Campbell instituted an investigation, which resulted in discovering that the fish, dissatisfied with their new quarters, had leaped through the waterfall two feet into the flume, and, swimming against the strong current until they reached where the stream crosses under the flume, they had leaped out of the latter to the stream four feet beneath. “Upon discovering the method of flight adopted by his finny acrobats, Mr. Campbell prevented further escape by placing a screen at the mouth of the flume. Up to last accounts the dis- satisfied fish had discovered no other method of getting. into their favorite Sacramento. The questions immediately suggest them- selves: How could the fish know that a stream flowed under the flume, the sides of which were considerably above the surface of the water, and if they possessed that knowledge, how were they to know that they were immediately over it? Mr. Redding ex- amined the ground carefully along the flume, and could not dis- cover a single instance of a trout having jumped out at any other place.” Mr. Redding subsequently communicated to the “ Forest and Stream” the following solution of the matter: “The attention of Prof. E. D. Cope, the eminent naturalist, hav- ing been called to the above facts, he has given me an explanation which seems entirely satisfactory. He tells me that at the base of every scale of the trout, at a point where the scale is united with : SENSE oF HEARING. 105 the skin, is a nerve; that all these nerves, from the base of every scale, lead to a large ganglion situated on the center of the fore- head of the fish below the eyes; and that nerves from this gang- lion cOmmunicate to the internal ear. These nerves, at the base of each scale, are formed to receive vibrations in water. Any vibration in water reaching the scales of the fish is thus communi- cated to the internal ear. If, as was the fact, one of the timbers that supported the flume rested in the running water on the ground, the vibrations of this running water on the ground would be carried by this timber to the flume and to the water in it, four feet above, and the ear of the fish would separate and take cognizance of the difference in the vibrations, as the human ear in the air distinguishes the difference between the voices of friends.” As many fishes utter sounds, some so loud as to be heard in the air, it is reasonable to suppose that such sounds are heard by other fishes. Most fishes are capable of receiving impressions, through three sets of sense organs, viz., the ears, the skin, and the lateral line organs. Mr. H. G. Parker, after many experiments, has determined that “the skin is affected by surface waves and by currents; the lateral line organs by slight inaudible movements of the whole mass of water ; and the ears by the still more delicate vibrations of water particles, sound.” Among the most intelligent investigations in this direc- tion in recent years have been the experiments just men- tioned, of Mr. H. G. Parker, Assistant Professor of Zoology, Harvard University, under the auspices of the U. 8. Bureau of Fisheries, at its laboratory at Woods Hole, Mass., during the past year or two. He made many experi- ments dealing with the cutaneous nerves, the lateral organs and the auditory nerves, on such fishes as were most readily procured, principally with killifishes (Fwndulus hetero- clitus). These experiments were not confined to fishes in. 106 Book or THE Buack Bass. aquaria, but to those in open water as well, and in refer- ence to the latter condition he says: “The sound, therefore, was as unrestricted as that which natu- rally reaches these fishes. On experimenting with normal fishes, fishes without ears, and those with insensitive skins, results were obtained essentially like those observed in the aquarium, and I therefore concluded that the restriction of the water in the equarium played no essential part in the results obtained from that apparatus. There is, thus, good reason to believe that Fundulus heteroclitus not only hears, but that for it hearing is a normal process.” Mr. Parker means by “ fishes without ears, and those with insensitive skins,” fishes in which the cutaneous and auditory nerves were severed. His summary of the results of his experiments is as follows: “1. Normal Fundulus heteroclitus reacts to the sound waves from a tuning fork of 128 vibrations per second by movements of the pectoral fins and by an increase in the respiratory rate. It probably also responds to sound waves by caudal-fin movements and by general locomotor movements. “2, Individuals in which the eighth (auditory) nerves have been cut do not respond to sound waves from the tuning-fork. “3. The absence of responses to sound waves in individuals with severed eighth nerves is not due to the shock of the operation or to other secondary causes, but to the loss of the ear as a sense organ. “4, Fundulus heteroclitus therefore possesses the sense of hearing. “5. The ears in this species are also organs of prime impor- tance in equilibration. “6. Normal Fundulus heteroclitus swims downward from the top of the water and remains near the bottom when the aquarium in which it is contained is given a slight noiseless motion. “7, Individuals in which the nerves to the lateral-line organs have been cut will swim upward or remain at the top while the aquarium is being gently and noiselessly moved. SENSE oF HEARING. 107 “8. The lateral-line organs in this species are probably stimu- lated by a slight mass movement of the water against them. They are not stimulated by sound waves such as stimulate the ears. “9. Individuals in which the nerves to the lateral-line organs have been cut swim downward and thus escape from regions of surface wave action. They also orient perfectly in swimming against a current. Since surface waves and current action stimu- late fishes in which the nerves to the lateral-line organs and to the ears have been cut, these motions must stimulate the general cutaneous nerves (touch). “10. The vibrations from a bass-viol string when transmitted to water stimulate the ears and the lateral-line organs of Fun- dulus. They also stimulate mackerel and menhaden, but not the smooth dogfish, which responds only when in contact with solid portions of an aquarium subjected to vibrations.” * Since Mr. Parker’s experiments were made, Dr. J. Zen- neck, of the Strassburg Physical Institute, has published in the Archiv fur Gesammte Physiologie, vol. 95, pages 346-356, 1903, an article on the reactions of fish to sounds in the water, and has shown very conclusively that several species of minnows are very sensitive to sound, though he did not determine whether this sensitiveness resided in the skin (touch), or in the ear (hearing), or in both. The sound used was a protected electric bell under the water. It is conceded that fish can hear sounds or vibrations produced on, or in, the water, but that they can hear sounds produced in the air is doubted by many; but every observant angler can recall instances where this doubt has been refuted. I remember, as a boy, that when swimming below the surface, I could hear the shouting of my com- * For the full account of Mr. Parker’s interesting experiments the reader is referred to U. 8. Fish Commission Bulletin for 1902, pages 45 to 64. Also to the American Naturalist, Vol. xxxvuz, No. 435, 1903; and Science, new series, Vol. 17, page 243, 1903. 108 Book oF THE BiLack Bass. panions, though faintly; while the striking of two stones together below the surface was heard more distinctly. ' It is well known to some, though doubted by many, that fish can be tamed and taught to come to the surface of the water to be fed, answering promptly to the sounds of the voice, a bell, or a whistle. I have observed instances of this kind, myself, and under such circumstances as rendered it impossible for the fish to see the person producing the sounds mentioned. _ In a recent work on “ British Fresh-Water Fishes,” by Sir Herbert Maxwell, F. R. S., he mentions an incident in ‘support of his belief that fishes can hear sounds produced in the air. One bright October day he was painting cn the shore of Loch Ken, in Galloway. He noticed multi- tudes of small perch near the margin. Presently a shot was fired nearly a mile away. He says: “The report came clearly, because of the stillness of the air, but at that distance it could not be called loud; yet the shoal of fry instantly darted into the deeper water. In a little while they began to creep back towards the shore. Then came another shot; off again went the fry; and so after every shot, repeating the performance for my edification eight or nine times.” T have observed fish exhibit symptoms of fright or alarm at the report of fire-arms, or other loud noises, and to be scared and dart away at the sound of the human voice, or the barking of a dog, when the fish could not see the origi- nators of the noises. Birds will remain quietly perched on a tree and seem to take no notice of the sound of the human voice, or of loud noises. It is well known to sportsmen that a covey of ruffed grouse, or mountain grouse, will remain perched one above another in a tree, while the gunner may shoot them, one after the other, by beginning with the lowest bird. SMELL, Taste anp ToucuH. 109 Horses, cattle or sheep will continue to crop the grass of a pasture, apparently oblivious to all sounds, but will look up at the approach of a man or a dog. Even wild animals remain motionless at the report of a gun, or other noises, provided the author of the sounds is not seen. And yet, if a fish does not skurry away at similar sounds, it is taken as conclusive evidence that it does not hear them. It would truly seem, on reflection, that beasts and birds would be more likely to show symptoms of alarm at sounds produced in the medium in which they live, move and have their being, than fishes which inhabit another and denser medium, and consequently feel safe and secure from causes operating in the air. SeNsEs oF SMELL, Taste anp ToucH. The olfactory organs of fishes, while being well developed, have no relation whatever with the function of respiration, as in air-breathing animals. Giinther says: “It is certain that fishes possess the faculty of perceiving odors, and that various scents attract or repel them.” ‘This fact has been patent to observant anglers since long before the time of honest Izaak Walton. It is evident that game-fishes, like the black bass, which resort to mid-water and near the surface, depend almost entirely on the sense of sight in pursuit of their food, while bottom-feeding fishes rely on the senses of smell, taste or touch. The latter group of fishes have special nervous filaments ending in what are known to neurologists as “ ter- minal buds,” located in the mouth and on the skin of the body; also in the barbels, or “ feelers,” as in the catfishes, and in the detached fin rays of other fishes. These ter- minal buds seem to have the property or function of taste, 110 Book oF THE Buack Bass. being connected with the olfactory bulbs of the brain, and are necessary to such fishes in the procuring and detection of their food. Do FIsHEs SLEEP. As fishes possess no eye-lids, the eyes, consequently, al- ways being’ open, the absurd question is often asked, “ Do fish sleep?” I say absurd, for it certainly seems so to imagine that fishes alone of all the animal creation do not sleep. That they sleep, and sleep every day is not to be doubted. They sleep very lightly, however, and are easily awakened by the slightest jar on the bank, or, as I believe, from sounds in the air of an unusual character. From my observations of fishes in the ponds of fish hatcheries, I think they sleep mostly during the middle hours of the day and night. STOCKING .WATERS. 111 CHAPTER VIII. ON STOCKING WATERS WITH BLACK BASS. “And it is observed, that in some ponds carps will not breed, especially in cold ponds; but where they will breed, they breed innumerably.”— Izaak WALTON, Tue black bass is peculiarly adapted, in every respect, for stocking inland waters. There is no fish that will give more abundant and satisfactory returns, and none in which the labor and expense attending its introduction is so slight. As a food fish, there are very few, if any, more palatable fresh-water fishes, its flesh being firm, white, and flaky, and when cooked, nutty, tender, and juicy; it has few bones and little offal, and as a pan-fish is unexcelled. Its game qualities are second to none, and it will thrive and mul- tiply in waters where the trouts can not exist. There are few fish more prolific, while there is none more hardy, healthy, and better able to take care of itself, and none that protects or cares more tenderly for its young; consequently, there is no limit to its production and in- crease in suitable waters, save from a lack of natural food. In view, then, of its many good qualities, there is no fish more worthy of cultivation; none that can be so easily transplanted, and none that is so well adapted to the vari- ‘ous waters of our country, for there is no game-fish that has such an extensive original habitat. Every attempt that has been made, intelligently, to stocks suitable waters with the black bass, has been crowned with signal success, which, unfortunately, has not been the case 112 Book oF tHe Buack Bass. with the introduction of other game- and food-fishes. The praiseworthy efforts that have hitherto been made to re- populate streams formerly inhabited by salmon or brook trout, have either totally failed, or the results, in a ma- jority of instances, have not been at all satisfactory; nor does it seem, now, as though these efforts will ever prove successful, owing to causes which I have mentioned else- where. Streams which are necessarily obstructed by dams, even when the most approved fishways are provided, or whose waters are polluted by the refuse of manufactories, can never be successfully stocked with the salmonids; but the black bass seems to thrive fairly well in spite of these and other disadvantages. From what has been said in regard to their habits, it will readily be seen that there is no necessity for hatching black bass artificially, in the manner practiced with the salmon, trout, or shad, nor would the method be as suc- cessful, for reasons well known to fish culturists. The Salmonide of the eastern United States, with the exception of the grayling, prepare their beds and deposit their spawn late in the fall, or early winter. This being accomplished, all further interest in the procreation of their species, for the time, ceases; the eggs are left to them- selves, and such as escape being devoured by their nu- merous enemies are hatched in from two to four months, according to species and temperature of water. The young are provided with a yolk-sac, which nourishes them for a period of from twenty-five to forty-five days, varying with the species, when they begin to look for other means of subsistence. During all this time, from spawning until the absorption of the yolk-sac, from three to six months as the case may Stocking WATERS. 113 be, the eggs and young are helplessly exposed to the ravages of predatory fish, reptiles, and birds. Under these circum- stances comparatively few fish arrive at maturity, and streams are soon depopulated by seining, unlawful fishing and natural vicissitudes ; hence arises the necessity for their artificial cultivation and the re-stocking of such waters. The eggs of the salmonids are of a separate and non- adhesive character, which admits of their being easily handled and managed for the purposes of artificial repro- duction, while those of the black bass are glutinous and adhesive, which renders them very difficult to manipulate for similar purposes. The black bass being hatched with but a rudimentary or very small umbilical vesicle or yolk-sac, needs the foster- ing care and attention of the parent fish, who teaches it how and where to find its food, and protects it from its enemies in the same way that a hen cares for her brood. All that is required, then, to stock a stream or pond with black bass, is to procure a small number of the fish, at least a year old, and place them in the waters. If the water is of a suitable character, and possesses a sufficient supply of natural food, the bass will propagate naturally, and rapidly increase in numbers. The only considerations to be looked after are the char- acter and conditions of the waters to be stocked — suffi- cient depth and extent of surface being more important than quality of water — and the supply of food contained in them. It is useless to attempt to stock very small and confined ponds of less than three acres in extent; for in such ponds, without communication with running water, the bass will not increase beyond a certain limited number, which will usually be the number of fish originally planted. The supply of natural food in such cases will soon become 8 114 Book oF THE Buack Bass. exhausted, and the old fish will prey upon the young, should any be hatched, until a certain average, proportionate to the supply of food, is established and maintained. In the case of newly formed ponds, they should be well stocked with minnows, crustacea, frogs, etc., at least a year before the bass are introduced. It is also necessary that there should be in all ponds, holes of not less than twelve feet in depth, to which the bass can retire in very hot weather, and where they can also hibernate. In some waters, one species of black bass may prosper better than the other; for instance, in large ponds or shal- low lakes, with a sluggish current, muddy bottom, and abounding in fresh-water alge, the large-mouth bass will thrive better than the small-mouth species. But in streams, and ponds with a good supply of running water, either, or both species may be introduced. The black bass has been successfully transported to Eng- land. Mr. Silk, fish-culturist to the Marquis of Exeter, has taken over two lots of young small-mouth bass from the Delaware River, the first in 1878, and the second in 1879. In a letter to the late Frank Buckland, Mr. Silk says: “Tn 1879 I went again, and started from America with 1,200 black bass, and on arriving home I had 812, having done better than I did on the previous occasion. All of the black bass were for the Marquis of Exeter, he having borne all the expense of the experiment. Most of the fish were placed in a lake belonging to his lordship, called Whitewater, near Stamford. Not any of them have been caught yet, but two of them were found dead in a pipe, where they had got jammed. The pipe supplied a filterer, and they had got in and could not get out again, From what I could learn they would be about half a pound each in weight, so that they had done very well. The first lot that were put in will be three years old in April, when they are expected to commence breeding.” StTocKING WATERS. 115 In transporting black bass for the purpose of stocking new waters, great foresight, care, and judgment must be used. The size and number of the fish, the distance they are to be carried, and the length of time to be consumed in the journey, must all be taken into consideration. The size and number of the fish will determine the size and number of the containers; thus, while a common wash-tub would be a safe receptacle to transport twenty-five bass, six inches in length, for a long distance, it would not be suffi- cient for half the number of double the size, for it would require a vessel that would contain at least one and a half times the quantity of water. This is a safe rule to follow, and calculations can be made accordingly. For small fish, six to eight inches long, the largest size wash-tubs are well adapted, but for larger fish the carrier must be much deeper. If barrels are used they need not be perfectly new, but they should not retain any vestige of their former contents, as vinegar, oil, whisky, etc. The best ones would be those that had been used to hold water for a long time. Wooden tanks, constructed for the pur- pose, will answer, provided they have been soaked in run- ning water a sufficient length of time to take up and re- move all the soluble matter of the wood, as tannic acid, etc. Metal tanks, constructed of galvanized iron, heavy tin, etc., though more expensive, are to be preferred, but they must be rendered perfectly clean before the fish are put into them. If the number of fish to be carried is large, it is much better to provide a sufficient number of containers than to crowd the fish. Except in railroad ears especially con- structed for the purpose, there is no good plan yet devised for aerating water, while in transit, by forcing air into it, for most of it escapes at once as the numerous bubbles that 116 Book oF THE Biack Bass. appear on the surface testify. The better way is to expose the water to the air in finely divided particles, in the form of spray or small drops, as by forcing or pouring it through a fine rose. I have seen it successfully accom- plished by dipping the water out of the container with a common sprinkling-can, or watering-pot, and pouring it back again through the rose, or sprinkler, from a con- siderable height; this is as simple and effectual a way as any yet devised. It is a bad plan to change the water frequently, as is often done, for the change in the character and temper- ature of the water thus produced, affects the fish un- favorably. The best plan, by far, is to aerate the original water. If in warm weather, the temperature of the water should be noted, occasionally, and kept at its original tem- ~ perature, or a little lower, by the addition of small pieces of ice from time to time. These instructions are only general, and must be varied to suit particular circumstances. Sometimes, for short distances, double the number of fish may be safely carried, in the space I have designated. Moreover, it is possible to be too attentive, and kill the fish with kindness. If the number of fish to be transported is large enough to justify the experiment, the best and safest plan would be to carry one vessel, with its allotted number, first, and, according to the operator’s best judgment; then, as the experiment proved successful, or not, would depend the transportation of the balance, on the same, or some other plan of pro- ceeding. A lake belonging to the South Fork Fishing and Hunt- ing Club, of Pittsburg, Pa., was successfully stocked with adult black bass in June, 1881. The transportation of six hundred and sixty bass from Sandusky, Ohio, to the StocKING WATERS. 117 lake, ninety miles east of Pittsburg, was carried out very successfully under the direction of Mr. W. A. McIntosh, vice-president of the club. The fish were placed in fifteen oak casks, three feet high, and three feet in diameter, and five galvanized iron tanks, five feet high, and three feet in diameter. The water was kept at the proper temperature by adding ice occasionally, and aerated by means of a large air-pump and fifty feet of one-inch rubber hose, at one end of which was a series of perforated tin tubes. A large tin tube also ran along above the casks, with a small dependent tube ending in a sprink- ler leading to the top of each cask, into which water was poured and entered the casks in a fine spray. The bass weighed from three-fourths of a pound to two and one-half pounds, averaging one and a half pounds each. The females were heavy with spawn, as the season was backward. They were on the road, from Sandusky to the lake, some thirty hours, with a loss of only sixty fish, or ten per cent. The bass prospered well in the lake, as myriads of young bass, six or eight inches long, were per- ceived the following year. They multiplied rapidly for several years, affording fine fishing for the members of the club and their friends. Eventually, however, the dam inclosing the lake gave way under the pressure of a great flood, and the appalling disaster at Johnstown was the result. Not only in our own country have new waters been suc- cessfully stocked with both species of black bass, but they have been transplanted to England, as mentioned, also to Scotland, Germany and the Netherlands. A later notice of those taken to England is as follows: “ Of twelve hundred black bass brought from the United States by Mr. W. T. Silk, one hundred and forty were placed in the' 118 Book OF THE BLAcK Bass. river Nene. They were from four to seven inches in length. The river has a number of small backwaters, with swift currents and gravelly bottoms, and also deep, quiet holes. Fishing will be prohibited for some years, until the fish are well established. I think the Nene and the Welland are the only rivers in England where the bass have been put; but they are in several lakes.”— (London Fishing Gazette, December 1, 1883.) I assisted Herr Von dem Borne with such information as subsequently enabled him to successfully cultivate the black bass in Germany. The following is the account of his first installment. “Of the seven large-mouth, and forty-five small-mouth bass which Mr. Eckardt, Jr., brought from America in February, 1883, the greater number died, probably in consequence of the long journey, so that this spring there remained only three of the former and ten of the latter, which I placed in two ponds, sup- plied with gravel beds for spawning.”—(Max Von dem Borne, Circular No. 4, 1884, German Fishery Association, Berlin, June, 1884.) The ponds of Von dem Borne, alluded to above, are located at Berneuchen, Germany. On June 15, 1884, he wrote: “To-day I had the satisfaction of finding that the three large fish had spawned, and the pond actually swarms with fry. I have caught with a small net more than two thousand, and have put them into another pond which is free from other fish. I have no doubt that next spring the small-mouth bass will spawn, and that the experiment will be successful.”— (Bull. U. 8. Fish. Com., Iv, 1884, 219.) In June, 1885, he said: “My thirteen black bass have spawned. I have caught 11,800 of the fry, and placed them in ponds that have no other fish.” STOCKING WATERS. 119 In August, 1885, he wrote: “T am pleased to say that the fish multiplied abundantly. I had 1,200 in the fall of 1884, and have caught more than 22,000 fry this season.” Count Von dem Borne raised more black bass, of both species, than he could take care of, and shipped them to other parts of Europe. In 1886, he published a small treatise: “ Der Schwartzbarsch und der Forrellenbarsch ” (The Black Bass and the Trout Bass), and a larger edition in 1888. Until he died he was very enthusiastic in regard to the black bass as a game-fish and food-fish. In March, 1885, Mr. Eugene G. Blackford, of New York, sent five young black bass to the Zoological Garden at Amsterdam, where they arrived in excellent condition. In December, 1885, the “ Journal of the Society for the Promotion of the Fresh-water [Fisheries in the Nether- lands,” says: “The Amsterdam Aquarium at present possesses four fine specimens of black bass, which grow well, and will, in all prob- ability, reach sexual maturity.” In April, 1882, Mr. Geo. Shepard Page took a small lot of black bass, comprising both species, on the steamer Spain, from New York to Liverpool. Six of the fish were supplied by Mr. Eugene G. Blackford, of New York, and twelve young and five adult fish were supplied by Professor Spencer F. Baird, U. 8. Fish Commissioner. Two of the adult bass died before reaching Liverpool. The balance were safely transported to Golspie, Sutherland, in Scot- land, and placed in a loch belonging to the Duke of Suther- land. I wish to add a word in this connection to a paper of 120 Book OF THE BuLack Bass. mine read before the American Fisheries Society, in refer- ence to objections urged against the introduction of black bass into eastern waters, upon the theory that the presence of the “voracious” bass would militate against the in- crease of shad, trout or salmon. The objections are not valid, or founded on fact, for the black bass prefers a diet of crawfish, when he can get it, varying it with minnows, insects, larva, and frogs, and in eastern waters he would not object to young eels. Pike, pickerel, pike-perch, and gar-fish, are almost entirely piscivorous in their habits, which might be expected from the character of their teeth, which are separate, sharp and conical, and their sins have no doubt been charged to the black bass. But, while the bass will take in a young shad or salmon if it comes his way when hungry, he will not make them special objects of pursuit, like the canine-teethed fishes above named. The failure to restock such streams, if any such failure exists, must be attributed to other causes than the intro- duction of the black bass, prominent among which is the unrelenting pursuit of the young fry by the predatory fishes mentioned. They are only exceeded in their destruc- tiveness by the genus Homo, with his miles of gill-nets at the mouths of the streams, to prevent the return of the shad or salmon during the breeding season; and should a few run the gauntlet and succeed in depositing their spawn in the upper reaches of the rivers, the eels, bull- heads and suckers take good care of it. In western waters where the black bass exists with the usual varieties of fishes, there is no perceptible decrease in thé numbers of either. If any species suffers it is always the black bass on account of over-fishing, spearing, etc. I know of isolated lakes in Wisconsin where the black bass has co-existed with the cisco (one of the salmon family), Stocking WATERS. 121 longer than the memory of man runneth to the contrary, without a decrease of the latter fish. If then the bass can not “get away with” the cisco in confined waters, how can he “clean out” the shad or salmon in large flowing streams? Moreover, I know of a small stream in Wiscon- sin that abounded in black bass and crawfish, into which brook-trout were introduced to the discomfiture of the former fish, for the trout increased while the numbers of the bass grew smaller by degrees and beautifully less. I also know of lakes in Canada that have always been in- habited by both brook trout and large-mouth black bass, with no detriment to the former fish. And, furthermore, the black bass’ will not eat the spawn of his mate, nor that of his fellows’ mates. His natural food is the craw- fish and the minnow; he prefers them, and they are easily procured. On them he will wax and grow fat, increase and multiply. The man who alleges that he depopulates the streams of valuable food fishes, or asserts that he “ kills for the love of it,’ has never looked into the mouth of the bass with his eyes open, for its teeth on both jaws are brush-like, incapable of wounding — forming merely a pair of broad, rough forceps for holding its prey securely. Tf, then, there are waters in which the brook-trout or the rainbow-trout will not thrive, there need be no hesitation to aid in the further distribution of the black bass by in- troducing that desirable species. It is easily done, and success is already assured. It is only necessary to look to the Potomac, the Susquehanna, the Delaware and many other streams for evidence of its rapid increase in new waters. PART II. sou ND IMPLEMENTS. om my Wow! ENUS AND CUPID FISHING. From a copy of a wall painting at Pom Vv. peii in possession ditor of the Fishing Gazette, E of R. B. Marston, Esq., London, England. FisHine Rops. 127 CHAPTER IX. FISHING RODS. “And now, scholar! I think it will be time to repair to our angle-rods.”— Izaak WALTON. THE first and most important article in the angler’s outfit is the rod; it takes precedence of every other tool or implement in his armamentarium. A thoroughly good and well-balanced rod is the angler’s especial joy and pride. A true and tried rod of graceful proportions and known excellence, which has been the faithful companion on many a jaunt by mountain stream, brawling river, or quiet lake, and has taken its part, and shared the victory in many a struggle with the game beauties of the waters, at last comes to be looked upon as a tried and trusty friend, in which the angler reposes the utmost confidence and reli- ance, and which he regards with a love and affection that he bestows upon no other inanimate object. I doubt if rifle, shot-gun, or fowling-piece ever becomes so dear and near to the sportsman as the rod to the angler, for the rod really becomes a part of himself, as it were, through which he feels every motion of the fish when hooked, and which, being in a measure under the control of his will, and responsive to the slightest motion of his wrist, seems to be imbued with an intelligence almost life- like. The essential qualities of a fishing rod, are balance, strength, elasticity, pliancy, and lightness, and in its con- struction such a wood, or combination of woods, must be used as will best subserve these conditions. The natural cane, or reed pole, when it is of good and true taper, is 128 Book OF THE Buack Bass. the primitive model for a fishing rod, but it is not adapted to all kinds of angling, being too long for one mode, too stiff for another, and not well balanced for a third. The nearest approach to a perfect rod, in theory, and composed entirely and alone of any one variety of wood is a red cedar rod, made entirely of one piece from butt to tip. It combines all of the essential qualities of a fishing rod, and can be made suitable for any method of angling — long or short, stiff or pliant, and withal, is extremely light; but in practice it is not tough or strong enough for the ordinary, angler. And so each and every kind of wood has some objections when used, alone, in the construction of a rod; most kinds of wood being too heavy, when other qualities are all right. The next best thing is to use a combination of woods, and this plan has been found by experience to be the best. Another plan is to alter the natural conditions of a wood by mechanical skill, as in the split-bamboo rod, by which the original natural good qualities are not only preserved, Lut improved upon by the skill of the workman. MATERIAL FOR Rops. In order to get proper and desired action of combined woods, and for convenience, portability, and ease of being repaired, rods are very properly made in several pieces, or joints. The fewer pieces used, however, the better will be the action of the rod, and, in fact, two, or at most, three Pieces, are sufficient for all kinds of rods except salmon rods, which are of a necessity the longest rods made. In the selection of woods for a rod, such kinds must be used as possess the principal attributes of a fishing rod, which are toughness and elasticity ; and when these quali- ties are combined with lightness, there is nothing more to Fisuine Rops 129 be desired, for proper modeling will insure perfect balance and pliancy. Many kinds of native and foreign woods have been tried and experimented with to produce a rod perfect in action, such as cane, ash, hickory, maple, basswood, ironwood, hornbeam, cedar, barberry, bamboo, memel, lancewood, mahoe, greenheart, bethabara, noib, snakewood, dagama, service-berry, etc. For black bass rods, however, both for fly and bait, it has been found that split-bamboo, ash, lancewood, bethabara, and greenheart are the most suitable woods. AsH.— For butts of rods there is no wood so suitable as good, close-grained, second-growth white ash. It is straight-grained, light, springy, and strong, and in some kinds of rods it is also available for second pieces or joints, having a springy “snap” possessed by no other wood. LancEewoop.— For second pieces and tips, lancewood, when of good quality, stands pre-eminent, being close- grained, tough, and extremely elastic, with sufficient re- siliency for small joints. It is used for tops, or tips, more universally than any other wood, on account of its superi- ority over all other varieties for this purpose. It is rather heavy for butts, though often used for this purpose, some fly-rods being constructed entirely of this fine wood, mak- ing very durable and beautiful rods, with a good action, but still rather heavy for most anglers. GREENHEART is next to lancewood for tips, and for sec- ond joints is preferred by many; it is somewhat heavy, and quite tough.and springy. Many rods are made entirely of this wood, and are excellent, too, by the way, but rather heavy for the admirers of light rods. It certainly forms a handsome rod, when nicely polished, and is capable of good and hard service. In England it is a favorite wood 9 130 Book OF THE Buack Bass. for fly-rods, where, as a rule, much heavier rods are used than in our own country. Bereabsra.—This wood was, I believe, introduced several years ago by A. B. Shipley & Son, of Philadelphia, who made a specialty of rods of this handsome material. It is very dark in color, resembling, somewhat, black- walnut. It is very hard and close-grained, almost like bone in density, though it is rather heavy, except for second pieces and tips. Few woods can equal it for strength, toughness, and resiliency. It is susceptible of a beautiful polish, and I know of no other wood that makes so hand- some a rod in its natural color. Cane, oR REEp.— Native and foreign cane poles are much used for fishing rods, especially in certain kinds of angling where no reel is required, and for such service answer a good purpose. The native canes are the lightest, . though not so strong and durable as the Chinese or Jap- anese canes. Catcutrs Bamsoo.—The East Indian, or, as it is gen- erally termed, the Calcutta bamboo, is the best of all mate- rial for the construction of a perfect rod when carefully made by a skillful and master workman. In its natural state it possesses many of the desired qualities for certain modes of angling, but for methods that require a shorter and lighter, or more pliant rod, these additional features can be secured by altering the original conditions of the cane, by sawing the outer, or cortical siliceous, laver into triangular strips and accurately fitting and gluing them together ; thus reducing the caliber, and, at the same time, preserving and enhancing all the essential and desirable qualities in a more compact form. There are two kinds of Calcutta bamboo, known to the trade as “‘male” and “female” canes. The former is FisHine Rops. 131 nearly solid, hard, and very tough, with large and pro- tuberant knots or joints, where, when growing, are attached the leaves and tendril-like branches, which are so tough as to render it necessary to burn them off; this, and the appli- cation of red-hot iron to straighten them, gives to these canes the peculiar clouded and burnt appearance which adds so much to the beauty of the split-bamboo rod. The female cane is hollow through its entire length, except just at the joints or bulges, which are not so prominent as in the male cane. The male cane is the best to use in its natural state, but for split-bamboo rods the selected female cane is to be preferred as it makes the most perfect rod. There has been very marked improvement in the manu- facture of fishing rods during the past twenty years. More attention has been paid to the demands of the angler by the manufacturers, who have, consequently, exercised greater skill and intelligence in supplying tools better adapted to his needs and requirements. This has resulted in shorter, lighter, and better-balanced rods, and of much better material and workmanship than was formerly ac- corded to this branch of the arts. It is a source of great pleasure and satisfaction to the angler of the present day to note the march of improve- ment in the manufacture of fine fishing tackle, and to observe the commendable enterprise manifested by the manufacturers in producing light, elegant, and suitable implements of the craft. Indeed, the skill, study, inge- nuity and good taste employed in this industry is scarcely excelled in any other; all of which is highly gratifying, for it would seem to imply that the love and practice of angling has taken deep root, and that fine fishing and scien- tific angling are in a healthy state of growth and devel- opment. ‘132 Book OF THE BLAckK Bass. The first radical departure in the manufacture of fishing rods was the introduction of the “ Henshall rod ” for black bass bait-fishing, more than a quarter of a. century ago. After its superiority to old style long and heavy rods was demonstrated, it became an easy matter to apply the same principles to all other rods. Perhaps it would be too egotistic to say that this short- ening and lightening of ro“s in general was induced, alto- gether, by the introduction of the Henshall black bass rod, but I am assured by some of the most candid rod manu- facturers, and by many anglers, that this result is in a great measure to be attributed directly to the superior -excellence of this short, light, and elegant rod, and to the fact that it subserves all the purposes, and promotes the pleasures of black bass angling in a much greater degree than the old-fashioned long and heavy rods. I am very ‘much gratified to think that this may be the case. One of the largest manufacturers of fishing rods in the world has this to say: “More than twenty years ago Dr. James A. Henshall, an au- thority on black bass, and at present an attaché of the United States Department of Fisheries, declared that the black bass would eventually become the leading game fish of America; also that the invention of the necessary tackle would place such fishing in the very forefront of angling effort. At that time the statement im- pressed most sportsmen as a very rash prediction; for no indica- tions of such an outcome were visible to them. Thus, as so frequently happens, the prophecy was looked upon as the mere fancy of an enthusiast. But time, that demonstrator of all propositions, evidently en- listed on the side of Dr. Henshall, so that to-day we marvel at the accuracy of the forecast. At that time, tackle designed es- pecially for black bass was scarcely known, whereas to-day it forms a large portion of the entire amount made in this country. Naturally the one who foresaw the tide of events, and who was Fisuinc Rops. 133 an authority on such fish, would be best equipped to furnish . specifications for the most desirable rods.” Spirt-Bamsoo Rops. A first-class split-bamboo rod is the ultima thule of rod making. In its construction great care and skill are exer- cised. The material is carefuily selected by an expert, as the several sections for a joint must be perfect and of the same weight and bend, in order to secure homogeneity and perfect action. This requires technical skill and intelli- gence of a high order. But the cheap and shoddy kind sold in department stores is made of refuse cane by un- skilled labor, and is sold at a small advance on the cost of production. A hard wood rod at thrice the price is in- finitely better. I consider the split-bamboo-rod to be the greatest inven- tion ever made pertaining to the art of angling, equaling the invention of the breech-loading rifle and Bibe gum for field sports. The history of the “split-bamboo,” “ section-bamboo,” or, as it is sometimes called, the “ rent and glued bamboo ” rod, although of comparatively recent origin, dating back only some sixty years, is somewhat obscure. Several per- sons have laid claim to the invention, though with what justice it has, heretofore, never been clearly determined. There is, perhaps, no important mechanical invention that has, in its inception and principle, sprung entirely and spontaneously from the brain of any single individual ; and this will apply to the split-bamboo rod as well, for though purely an American invention, as now constructed, the idea, or principle, is really of English origin. Rods formed of several pieces of hard wood, that is, from two to three longitudinal sections mitred and glued together, were 134 Book OF THE BuLAck Bass. made in England many years ago; and Aldred, of London, made rod tips, or, as they are called in England, “ tops,” of split-bamboo, before the split-bamboo rod, proper, was made in this country. Aldred’s tops, however, were neces- sarily a failure from the faulty method of their construc- tion. He made them of many short pieces sawn from between the knots, or leaf-ridges, of the male cane, and spliced, to form continuous lengths. So much for the criginal idea. It is not my province, nor desire, to detract one iota from the credit or just due of any one in this matter, but rather to render unto Cesar those things that belong to Cesar. In the following pages I will present only such evidence as is entirely trustworthy, having been obtained from authentic sources, and put it on record here as relia- ble data in regard to the early history of the American split-bamboo rod; and in so doing I hope to do justice to an obscure, but worthy brother of the angle. The following amplified account of the invention of the split-bamboo rod I contributed to the “ Outing ” magazine for May, 1902. As a matter of record I reproduce it here: ORIGIN OF THE SPLIT-BamBoo Rop. In an admirable and comprehensive article on “ Salmon Fishing” in “ Scribner’s: Magazine” for October, 1876, Dr. A. G. Wilkinson, of the Patent Office, Washington, D. C., gives, so far as I know, the first history of the split- bamboo rod and its method of construction. Incidentally he says: “ Twenty-five years ago (1851) a London firm made split- bamboo rods, putting the enamel inside. * * * Mr. Phillippe. living at Easton, Pa., conceived the idea, in 1866, of putting the enamel upon the outside, where it would do the most good. Next, Fisuine Rops. 135 Mr. Green and Mr. Murphy put their heads together, and made rods of this sort of four strands, and finally the old and well- known firm of A. Clerk & Co., New York, introduced into the market the Leonard rod of six and twelve strands, and have since been supplying Europeans with all they get of this article.” In 1881, in my “ Book of the Black Bass,” I gave a brief history of the origin of the split-bamboo rod as made in the United States, giving credit for the invention to Samuel Mr. SAMUEL PHILLIPPE. Phillippe, of Easton, Pa., and the date of his first rods as early as 1848. The proofs that I produced were com- plete and authentic enough to establish the claim for Phil- lippe as the inventor of the split-bamboo rod in America, and certainly as the first in the world to make a four- section rod. Those made in England about that time, and exhibited at the first World’s Fair at the Crystal Pal- ace in London, in 1851, were all three-section rods; that is, 136 Book OF THE Buack Bass. three triangular strips, or sections, either with the enamel inside or outside. These were known as “rent and glued- up.” bamboo rods, and were shown by several makers.* Mr. William Mitchell, of New York, an excellent and well-known rod maker, in an article on the split-bamboo rod in the “American Angler,” says: “Mr. Wilkinson gives the year 1866 as the one in which Mr. Phillippe, a gunmaker of Easton, Pa., made a glued-up split- bamboo rod in three sections, or parts of one. He was followed by Mr. Green and Mr. Murphy. “Dr. Henshall, in his ‘ Book of the Black Bass,’ gives the date of the first split-bamboo rod made in this country, by Samuel Phillippe, as about 1848; but all dates are from memory, and I believe the date given by Mr. Wilkinson is the nearer approach to the correct one. Mr. Phillippe never made a complete rod of split- bamboo, only a tip and joint to a three-piece rod, the butt of ash, and the joint and tip made in three sections. “Mr. Murphy, of Newark, N. J., in an article by Mr, B. Phil- lips, on the origin of the split-bamboo, published in the New York “Times,” gives the date as 1848, when Mr. Phillippe used the natural bamboo, and subsequently made a joint of bamboo.” Satisfied that there was some error or mistake concern- ing the date, 1866, as given by Dr. Wilkinson, I afterward wrote to him on this point, when he replied as follows: “You are certainly all right on the split-bamboo question. Mitchell gives the date of Murphy’s rods as 1863, and Murphy concedes priority to Phillippe, and the latter’s date is 1846. At the time of writing I could not fix Murphy’s exact date. I am now *[As late as 1870, in Bohn’s edition of Walton’s Complete Angler, edited by Jesse, Mr. Bohn says in a footnote: “ The split- cane or glued-up rod is difficult to make well, and very expensive ; it.is made of three pieces of split cane (which some say. should have the bark inside, some outside), and is said to have the advantage of not warping through wet.”] Fisuine Rops. 137 clearly of the opinion that Phillippe’s son carelessly wrote 1866 in place of 1846, and in fact I remember perfectly well that his figures were pretty difficult to ‘decipher.” In order to confirm and substantiate the claim I. made for Phillippe, I subsequently corresponded with several of his old fishing companions and friends, citizens of Easton, Pa., with the result that I am now able to fix the date of his first rods as early as 1845. At the World’s Columbian Exposition, at Chicago, in 1893, I exhibited in my department an oil portrait of Sam- uel Phillippe, together with several of his rods, one of which is now in my possession. It is one of his first rods, -and is still in as good practical condition as when first made. It is a trout fly rod, 11 feet 4 inches in length, and weighs exactly 8 ounces. It is a perfectly propor- tioned rod, as the following diameters show: Greatest swell of butt, 1 inch; inside diameter of first ferrule, 5-16ths of an inch; of second ferrule, 3-16ths of an inch; of extreme tip, 3-32ds of an inch. Length of reel seat. 34 inches; diameter, 11-16ths of an inch. Length of butt handle, from reel seat to end, 10 inches, including the iron thimble at end. If the end of butt was shortened, as in modern rods, the weight would be reduced at least 14 ounces. It is made of four sections of bamboo, except the butt, which is of stained ash, and is neatly wrapped with black silk on the bamboo joints. The ferrules and reel bands are brass. The other rods exhibited were of four and six sections or strips throughout, including butt. One of the latter was a very finely finished and handsome rod with solid silver - mountings, neatly engraved ; it was accompanied by a reel of mother of pearl, the only one I have ever seen. This last was doubtless one of his later rods. 138 Book oF THE Buiack Bass. My opinion now is that Phillippe was really the first maker, and consequently the inventor of the split-bamboo rod, and made his first rod before they were made in England. I do not believe that the three-section rent dnd glued-up bamboo rod was made in London previous to 1845, though rods of three sections of hickory and other hard woods were, perhaps, made as early or earlier. I do not think it possible that Phillippe, in a small in- terior town in Pennsylvania, ever heard of an English split-bamboo rod before his invention; for even Mr. Mit- chell, an old and experienced rod maker of New York, says in the article referred to: “The first split-bamboo rod I ever saw or heard of was made by Wm. Blacker, 54 Dean street, Soho, London, and to order, for James Stevens, an old and well-known angler, of Hoboken, N. J. This was in 1852, and it was given to me for repairs and altera- tions in that year.” The late Professor Alfred M. Mayer, editor of the Cen- tury Company’s “Sport With Rod and Gun,”* in a foot- note to Dr. Wilkinson’s article, says in reference to this rod: “‘T have seen a split-bamboo rod made according to the sugges- tions of that distinguished angler, the late James Stevens, of Hoboken, by Blacker, of London. This rod is of three sections, with the enamel on the outside, and was made in 1852, while Mr. Stevens was in London. This date has been accurately determined for me by his son, Mr. Frank Stevens.” Notwithstanding the great number of British books on angling published during a century, there is no mention of * Dr. A. G. Wilkinson was the first to suggest to the editor of “ Scribner’s Magazine,” Dr. Holland, to publish a series of articles on sports with gun and rod, of which his was the first. Fisuine Rops. 139 the rent and glued-up cane rod previous to 1847. In this year “Ephemera” (Edward Fitzgibbon) published his “ Hand-book of Angling,” in which he gives a description of the method of Mr. Little, a London red maker, in the construction of a salmon rod composed of an ash butt, with the other joints of three-section split and glued-up bam- boo cane. During the Chicago World’s Fair a daughter of Samuel Phillippe called on me and gave me a very interesting account of her father. Among other things she stated that after her father’s death Joseph Jefferson, the actor, called at their house and purchased one of her father’s rods. Mr. Solon ©. Phillippe, of Easton, Pa., a son of Samuel Phillippe, furnished me with the following notes concern- ing his father: “Samuel Phillippe was born August 9, 1801, in Reading, Pa., and died in Easton, Pa., May 25, 1877. He went to Easton when about sixteen years old, where he learned the trade of gunsmith with Mr. Peter Young. He was a skilled workman in wood or metal. He made violins and fishing rods in addition to his regu- lar work as a gunsmith. He received a silver medal for one of his violins from the Franklin Institute Fair, at Philadelphia. He made the. first “ Kinsey’ fishing hooks from patterns furnished by Phineus Kinsey, of Easton, Pa. He was a good trout fisher, and fished at times in company with Thad. Norris, of Philadelphia, and Judge Jas. Madison Porter, Colonel T. R. Sitgreaves, Wm. Green, Phineus Kinsey, John and Abraham DeHart, Sheriff Heck- man, and others of Easton. “He visited a number of places with Mr. Thad. Norris, when the latter was seeking a location fora trout hatchery, and which was finally located near Bloomsburg, N. J. ‘Mr. Norris often saw Phillippe at work on split-bamboo rods in his shop. Charles F. Murphy, himself a noted rod maker, of Newark, N. J., also visited Phillippe to learn something of his method of making split-bam- boo rods. 140 Book oF THE Biack Bass. “Tn his first experiments Phillippe made tips and second joints of two, and then three sections of split-bamboo, enamel outside, with butts of solid cane or ash. But these rods would not cast the fly true. He then made the joints of four sections, and found that they would cast perfectly in any direction. He then made com- plete rods of four sections, including the butt, and later of six sections or strips; the enamel was always on the outside. These rods were for his own use, but afterward he made some for his friends, one of the first being for Colonel T. R. Sitgreaves, with ash butt and joints of four-section split-bamboo. “His books show that the first split-bamboo rod sold was in 1848. This was a four-section rod in three pieces, all split-bamboo, including the butt, His first rods were made certainly as early as 1845. Solon Phillippe learned rod making, in addition to the trade of gunsmith, from his father. In 1859 Solon made a com- plete rod of six sections; the handpiece, 18 inches long, was made of twelve sections of hard wood. In 1876 he made a three- piece rod, with handpiece of red-wood, and balance of rod of eight sections or strips, four of split-bamboo, and four of snakewood, alternating.” Following are extracts from letters relating to this sub- ject from some of my correspondents, as evidence to cor- roborate my opinion that Samuel Phillippe was the first maker of the split-bamboo rod: From Mr. Geo. W. Stout, of Easton, Pa.: “T came to this town in 1851. I made my first split-bamboo rod in 1860, and got my idea from Phillippe’s rods. I was an amateur only, and never made more than a dozen in all. * * * Ex- Sheriff Thos. Heckman, now in his eighty-sixth year, was a life- long acquaintance of Phillippe, and often went fishing with him. He is well preserved, with an excellent memory, and is good authority. He says he knows that Samuel Phillippe made split- bamboo rods in 1846. Edward Innes, a man of repute, aged about sixty-seven, remembers seeing him making one of these rods in 1847. You may rely implicitly on the evidence of Heckman and Innes, who both fished with Sam before, and many years after, 1846. Innes was much at Sam’s shop before 1847, and fixes the Fisnine Rops. 141 date by its being just before he removed to Philadelphia, where he resided several years.” From Mr. Thos. Heckman, ex-Sheriff of Easton, Pa.: “T knew Sam Phillippe a great many years, some sixty or seventy. I have fished with him many times, sometimes for a week’s camping in the mountains of Monroe County. He was the first man in this part of the country to build a split-bamboo rod. He made two for me, one of which is still in good condition. To my best recollection he built his first rod about 1846; he made his own ferrules, rings, and keepers.” From Abbey & Imbrie, of New York City: “Your account of the origin of the split-bamboo rod is perfectly correct. Our Mr. Abbey, the writer, was the active member of Andrew Clerk & Co. at the time of the origination, by Mr. Phil- lippe, of the split-bamboo rod, and is, therefore, well acquainted with its history down to the present time.” From Mr. Chas. F. Murphy, of Newark, N. J.: “Mr. Chas. Luke, of this city, formerly of Easton, Pa., used to fish and hunt with Mr. Phillippe, and frequented his workshop, where he saw him use split-bamboo for fly rods certainly as far back as 1848. Luke moved from Easton to Newark in 1850. I am very certain you can give Phillippe credit for the discovery of split-bamboo for fly rods without fear of being contradicted. While making rods for Andrew Clerk & Co., Mr. Abbey, of that firm, showed Mr. Green and myself a rod made by Mr. Phillippe, the top and second joint made of split-bamboo, with butt joint made from white ash. I made the first split-bamboo salmon rod, also the first black bass rod of split-bamboo.” From Dr. W. W. Bowlby, of New York City: “My earliest recollection of the split-bamboo rod dates back to about the year 1852. At that time I lived in New Jersey, near 142 Book OF THE BLack Bass. Easton, Pa., and fished in the same waters in New Jersey and Pennsylvania with an old gunsmith of Easton, known among us as ‘Old Sam Phillippe.” It was about the year above named that I saw a split-bamboo rod in his possession, and he informed me at the time that he was the originator of the idea; and to him, I earnestly believe, belongs the credit of having first conceived the idea of constructing a rod from such material.” While certain parties were compelled to concede the pri- ority of Phillippe in this matter, they sought to detract somewhat from his laurels by pronouncing his rods crude affairs, with the added remark that they were not “com- plete,” having white ash butts. Now, judging from the rod in my possession, old Sam Phillippe knew just what a trout fly rod should be in its action, both in casting a fly Philippe split-bamboo rod in possession of the author. and in playing a trout; and it is on these qualities of a tod that its merits should be judged, rather than on the style of its construction or fine appearance. Of course, it is better, and desirable, to have beauty of form combined with excellence of action whenever this is possible; but I have seen hundreds of split-bamboo rods that, while they were all that could be desired as to style and appearance, were sadly lacking as to the purposes and uses for which they were constructed. The ash butt of my Phillippe rod gives just the right amount of backbone, and the bamboo joints just the requi- Fisuine Rops. 143 site pliancy and resiliency needed in a fly rod. Its joints are just as straight and intact as when first made. It is as honest and reliable, and, I might say, as perfect a rod, so far as its uses and action are concerned, as some of my modern rods, “complete” though they may be. But old Sam Phillippe also made rods entirely of split- bamboo, and of six sections as well, afterward, and, as I now believe, before any other maker attempted the con- struction of a split-bamboo rod. And that he improved on his earlier efforts those who saw the silver-mounted six- section rod in my exhibit at the Chicago World’s Fair can bear witness. The first split-bamboo rods for the trade were made by Mr. Charles F. Murphy, of Newark, who made the first split-bamboo salmon-rod in 1865, which Dr. Andrew Clerk took to Scotland, where it proved a success. Subsequently, Genio C. Scott took the same rod to the St. Lawrence, and, on his return, published an interesting account of his trip and the use of the rod, in Wilkes’ “ Spirit of the Times,” in the same year. The first split-bamboo black bass rod was made by Mr. Murphy, in 1866. To Andrew Clerk & Co., and their successors, Abbey & Imbrie, belong the credit and honor of bringing this rod to its present state of perfection and prominence. They were the first patrons of Phillippe, Murphy, and Leonard, and gave them every assistance and encouragement. The best form of the split-bamboo rod, in my opinion, as proved by actual service, is the round, six-section rod. Many experiments have been made to improve upon this method. The hexagonal rod is claimed to be preferable to the round rod, inasmuch as there is no cutting away of 144 Book OF THE BuacKk Bass. the surface enamel or outside siliceous coating, at the angles, as in the formation of the round rod, and is there- fore a stronger rod. While this looks plausible enough it has no foundation in fact. The hexagonal rod is not a true six-sided figure, but rather a round figure with six angles; for the face of each section is of course slightly rounded, or convex, as it originally existed in the cane, and the extremely small amount of outside surface that is taken off at the angles to make the rod round does not amount to much, or weaken the rod a particle. In my opinion a round rod will cast truer in every direction. Another plan has been advocated, to reverse the process in sawing the strips, and place the enamel or outside coating at the interior of the rod. And still another, and some- what better plan, by the way, has been proposed, more especially for tips, as follows: f= Lal The shaded sides of the sections represent the outer coat- ing. The sections are to be pressed together, and glued in the position in which they are drawn in the figure, which brings the enamel of each strip partly inside and partly out- side; the piece is then worked down to a round form, hav- ing the center of enamel, and the circumference of alter- nate strips of inside and a small portion of the siliceous or outside layer. Then these rods have been made of eight and nine strips; but there is no real merit in any of these last-mentioned FrsHine Rops. 145 plans, and the six-section, outside enamel, hexagonal or round, is the only common-sense, practical plan. A first-class split-bamboo rod is strong enough for all the emergencies of bait- or fly-fishing if properly handled, but in England a steel wire center is added by one maker, and spiral wire ribbing by another, though the latter is for whole cane rods. In this country, natural bamboo rods have been closely wound with linen thread to add stiffness and strength. The best plan to meet these requirements is that patented by Mr. J. M. Kenyon, of Toledo, Ohio, and consists in closely winding with very fine silk from butt to tip, and using several coats of transparent varnish. The rod when finished is a beautiful object, requiring the aid of a magnifying glass to see the silk wrapping. It is called the “silkien ” rod, and is also made by the T. H. Chubb Rod Co., Post Mills, Vt. The first rod made on this prin- ciple that I ever saw was alluded to in the first edition of this book. It was spirally wrapped with fine strips of rattan. In appearance it was a beauty, but in practice a complete failure. Buack Bass Bart Rops. The black bass and its mode of capture, prior to 1870, was altogether too much neglected, if not entirely ignored, by most writers of that period upon the gentle art, either from a lack of interest, or a want of proper information upon the subject. Some works that were held in the highest esteem contained the least information upon black bass angling, and even that little was unreliable and un- satisfactory. As a rule, our old angling authors damned the black bass with faint praise, and gave but the most primitive methods for its capture. 10 146 Book oF THE BuLack Bass. Most writers of that time devoted their attention ex- clusively to the salmon and brook trout among the fresh- water game-fishes. or to the striped bass, bluefish and weak- fish, among the salt-water species. While acknowledging the game qualities and fine sport afforded the angler by these different species, and which acknowledgment is founded upon ample personal experience with them all, I regard the black bass as one of our gamest fishes; and an experience of more than forty years has convinced me that the sport afforded by it is not surpassed by the pursuit of any other member of the finny tribe. Thirty years ago a person entering a tackle shop in a western town and inquiring for black bass tackle, would be presented with a rod from twelve to sixteen feet long, weighing from one to two pounds, a large brass reel, with a handle like a coffee-mill crank, a line more suitable for a chalk line, and a large ungainly hook with a side bend — and all this formidable array of clumsy apparatus to do battle with such a thoroughbred and noble foe as the black bass! Combination rods, general rods, perch rods, cheap striped-bazs tackle, et hoc genus omne, had been, as a rule, manufactured for the western market, and sold for black bass fishing. This was the more surprising as the black bass inhabited so many of the waters of the Union, from New England to Florida, and from Maryland to Missouri. He was, moreover, the acknowledged peer of the brook trout for gameness by those who knew him best, and it was “a con- summation devoutly to be wished” that as much skill should be displayed in his capture, and as elegant and as suitable tackle employed for the purpose as in the case of his speckled rival. Those enthusiastic and observant anglers who learned Fisuine Rops. 147 from experience that there was a want not supplied in black bass rods, as offered by the trade, and who possessed sufficient mechanical skill, constructed their own rods and fished in their own way; and as these worthy souls were generally regarded as authority in their respective localities on the subject of black bass fishing, and not without reason, their particular style of rod was adopted in their particular locality as the “ perfect bass rod.” This will account for the marked difference of opinion upon this subject in dif- ferent sections of the country, for each such rod was made in accordance with the style of fishing, and the character of the waters to be fished. Many years ago, while residing in Wisconsin, I con- ceived the idea of writing a book on the black bass, in order to do justice to a fish that seemed to be but little under- stood, and likewise to divest the sport of black bass angling, as it then existed, of some of its primitive and disagreeable features, and give it a higher place in the catalogue of noble sports. I was convinced that it was only necessary to present the claims of the black bass in a proper light, and to give a description of the most suitable tackle for its capture, to induce the angling fraternity to accord full justice to a noble fish, which I felt satisfied was, for several reasons, destined to become the leading game-fish of America. . Accordingly, I began making notes of my observations of the habits of the black bass, and was collecting data for the intended treatise, when, fortunately and oppor- tunely, Mr. Charles Hallock founded and established that excellent journal, “Forest and Stream,” which came just when it was most needed. Here then was my opportunity to reach the anglers of the country, and I was not slow to 148 Book or THE Buack Bass. embrace it, and at once began to champion the cause of the black bass. I prepared a series of articles on the black bass and black bass angling, and described at some length the proper rod, reel, line, hook, ete., and mode of using them, to render it not only feasible, but practicable, to convince the angler of the high order of game qualities inherent to the black bass, and that by the use of suitable tackle it would not suffer by a comparison with other game-fishes. The seed of these articles was sown in good ground, and yielded abundantly. JI received letters from hundreds of black bass anglers, in all parts of the country, thanking and complimenting me for the ideas suggested, and for espous- ing the cause of their favorite fish, the black bass. The result proved far beyond my most hopeful anticipations, and I have the satisfaction of knowing that to-day there is no game-fish more eagerly sought for, and none that is being more rapidly introduced into new waters by its ad- vocates and admirers. In February, 1875, I contributed an article, entitled “The Coming Black Bass Rod,” to “ Forest and Stream,” which gave a description of my idea of a proper rod for black bass angling, founded on many years experience, and the use of many different rods for this purpose. Mr. C. F. Orvis, of Manchester, Vermont, at once began the manu- facture of a black bass rod from those suggestions, and he was soon followed by other manufacturers, who, seeing the necessity for a new departure from the old beaten path, soon began to make short and light black bass rods more in accordance with the spirit of the age and the demands of their customers, and thus replaced the former long, heavy and clumsy affairs by the elegant, short, light and pliant rod of the present day. And not only has the length Fisuine Rops. 149 and weight of bait rods been reduced, but fly rods of all patterns have been much reduced in length, during the past fifteen years, to their great advantage. THe HENsHALL BLack Bass Minnow Rop. While a rod may vary somewhat, according to the mode of angling, there is no good reason for such a wide diver- sity of opinion as obtains on‘the question of black bass rods. For instance: Fishing from the bank of a swift and nar- row stream, wading the bars of a wide river, or fishing from a boat on a quiet lake, seem in themselves apparently very different processes; but in reality they are only slightly different means of securing the same end — the capture of the black bass with a minnow for bait, for my remarks apply only to bait fishing, and a properly con- structed rod would answer in either place and fulfill either condition, when accompanied by a light, freely-rendering reel, together with a fine line. An artistic angler, fishing for trout or black bass with the fly, would use his fly rod in either place — from a boat, from the bank, or while wading the stream; he would use the same rod under any and every circumstance, wherever he had room to make a cast. The black bass bait fisher will in time become as consistent as the fly fisher, but it will only be when he adopts the proper rod, which rod I will now endeavor to describe. I start out with the proposition that a first-class Ameri- can, single-handed trout fly rod is, per se, the very perfec- tion of rods and the chef’da@uvre of the rod-maker’s art. Such a rod for general work is about ten feet long, and is made of split-bamboo, or a combination of ash and lance- wood, weighing from six to eight ounces. With such a rod, properly handled, either line, leader or hook may part, 150 Book oF THE Buack Bass. but the rod will remain intact. It combines all the essen- tial qualities of a good rod, viz: balance, lightness, strength, elasticity, and pliancy. A salmon rod is only a trout fly rod enlarged, proportionately, in every particular, and made to be used with two hands instead of one. Now, if all fish were caught with the fly, there would be no need for other rods than trout and salmon fly rods; but as such, unfortunately, is not the case, we are com- pelled to adopt other rods in accordance with the mode of fishing, the character of the fish to be caught, and the kind of bait to be used. But whatever may be the nature of the rod that is to be made, let this general rule or principle be followed in its construction: Let the rod conform as nearly as possible to the typical rod, 7. e¢., the trout fly rod, as is consistent with the manner of service required of it. If we follow this rule we can not go very far astray. Acting upon this principle, then, I have found in my experience that the essential qualities or attributes of a good black bass rod for bait-fishing, are much the same as the typical rod for balance, weight, strength, and. elastic- ity. but stiffer, or not so supple. The slight stiffening of the rod makes it correspondingly heavier, and in order to maintain the same relative weight, we must cut down the length of the rod to eight or eight and a half feet, which is found by experience to be far superior to longer rods for black bass fishing. As a comparatively long, pliant rod is best for casting a -fly, so is a short, stiffish rod best for casting a minnow. With a rod of this character, and a free-running, multiply- ing reel, it is an easy matter to cast from thirty to forty yards. The situation of the reel upon the butt must be a compromise between the single and double-handed fly rods ; for though the rod is used almost entirely with one hand, Fisuine Roos. 151 yet there are emergencies when both hands must be used, for occasionally a six-pound bass or a fifteen-pound pick- erel, pike-perch, or catfish will be hooked, or an unusually bold or fierce fighting bass may get the advantage of one and take to the weeds or rocks. It is also essential to have enough room for the hand below the reel in casting, as the thumb must control the running off of the line, and prevent the reel from overrunning or backlashing. It must have light standing guides, instead of the rings used on the fly rod. The rod from which my original description of the “Coming Black Bass Rod” was taken was eight feet and three inches long, in three joints; the first joint or butt was composed of white ash, and the second joint and tip of lancewood; it weighed just eight ounces; it was finely balanced, with a true bend from butt piece to tip; with it I killed hundreds of black bass, weighing from two to six pounds, and pike from five to fifteen pounds. I used it many seasons, and failed to see, where it could be improved. I oftentimes cast out my entire line of fifty yards, when casting with the wind. I felt justly proud of the merits of the rod, for I made it myself. StTanDARD HrensHaLu Ron. The following are the correct specifications of the rod just described ; it should be borne in mind that the diame- ters are of the wood, or more properly of the inside diame- ter of the female ferrule, where the joints are concerned ; also that the joints are flush, or non-doweled, and with reel-bands instead of a solid metal reel-seat : Total length of rod, 8 feet, 3 inches. Length of each piece (without ferrule), 33 inches. 152 Book oF THE Buack Bass. Length of grip (from extreme butt to reel-seat), 7 inches, Length of reel-seat, 4 inches. Diameter of greatest bulge of grip, 1 inch. Diameter of butt cap, % of an inch. Diameter of reel-seat, % of an inch. Diameter of small end of butt piece, 36 of an inch. Diameter of small end of second piece, 4 of an inch. Diameter of extreme tip, 3/32 of an inch. From the reel-seat to the end of butt piece is a gradual taper. The specifications and measurements as given above are also correct for a split-bamboo rod where reel-bands are used instead of a solid metal reel-seat, and a rod thus con- structed will weigh but eight ounces; but if a metal reel- seat is preferred, with the butt-piece tapering rapidly from it (instead of a gradual taper), ferrules of gs; of an inch less diameter may be employed, making a rod of eight ounces, or with reel-bands, of seven and one-half ounces in weight. When the butt of the Henshall rod is constructed of any wood heavier than ash — that is, when the entire rod is made of split-bamboo, lancewood, bethabara, or greenheart —the best plan, in order that the weight of the rod may not exceed eight ounces, and that its balance and action be not impaired, is to use a short “ handle ” of lighter wood. I have always been partial to a butt-piece, including the “grip,” being fashioned from a single piece of wood, and with reel-bands instead of a metal reel-seat; and where this is done, with an artistically-fashioned, swelling hand- piece, and with a graceful hollow taper from the reel-seat to the rod proper, it presents, to my eye, a certain adapt- ive beauty and fitness that I fail to see in the short, stubby . handle affixed to many modern rods. However, this is best accomplished with some such light wood as ash, black wal- nut, or red cedar; and where a heavier wood, or split-bam- Fisuine Rops. 153 ‘boo, is used for butt-pieces, the short handle of lighter ma- terial, if artistically fashioned, is perhaps the better way in order to preserve the qualities of pliability and balance. The handle comprises the grip, reel-seat, and from two to four inches above the reel-seat, making a handle of from thirteen to fifteen inches long, into which the butt-piece proper is inserted, the joint being closed by a tapered metal collar or winding check. The diameter of the lower end of the butt-piece (where it joins the handle) should not exceed the diameter of the upper, or smaller end of the butt-piece, more than one- eighth of an inch; that is, the inside diameter of the wind- ing check must not be greater than one-half inch, where a three-eighths ferrule is used on the smaller end. There are various ways of finishing the “grip” of the handle, which may be formed of the same wood as the handle, and smoothed and polished, presenting a very beautiful appearance. Where it is desired to obtain a firmer hold of the hand, it may be grooved with fine trans- verse corrugations, or be fluted longitudinally. Another method is to wrap the grip with cord, or strips of rattan; or the grip may be fashioned of hard rubber, and may be smooth, or corrugated, or fluted. The best grip, however, is one of cork, which allows a firmer hold of the hand than any other material, and being lighter, can be of larger caliber. Some rod manufacturers depart from these specifications by making the grip of the butt several inches longer, but this only adds to the weight and length of the rod without being of any real benefit; on the contrary, it is a positive disadvantage to single-handed rods to have a grip, or hand- piece, extending from nine to twelve inches below the reel- seat. Book OF THE BuLack Bass. 154 ‘0D pow any ‘H ‘L— Pow TeqsueH ooquieg qIdg ‘g ‘Bld ‘oO ‘Sy UOJOH —' poy [1eysueH [007g 109s 1a ‘g ‘Ol ‘Tol a ae (et id fs! ih set TES Reece Tenet (lhe : Fisuine Rops. 155 The following measurements are of a Leonard split-bam- ‘boo Henshall rod that I have used for many years: Total length of rod, 8 feet, 1 inch. Length of grip, 6 inches. Greatest bulge of grip, 1' inch. Length of reel-seat, 4 inches. Diameter of reel-seat, % of an inch. Diameter of butt piece at handle, 13/32 of an inch. Diameter of butt piece at small end, 11/32 of an inch. Diameter of second piece at small end, 7/32 of an inch. Diameter of extreme tip, 3/32 of an inch. Weight of rod, 614 ounces. This rod from being especially well made, and of selected material, is as powerful as an eight-ounce ash and lance- wood rod. By comparing its measurements with the stand- ard rod of eight ounces, before given, a rod of intermediate weight may be constructed by slightly increasing the diame- ters of the Leonard rod, said diameters being of the male ferrules. qin... n » Fia. 4. The bethabara Henshall rod, of the standard length and proportion, is somewhat heavier than one of ash and lance- wood, but preferred by many on that account. In other qualities it is an excellent rod, more resilient than green- heart or lancewood, and is spoken of in the highest terms by those who have used it. I can heartily recommend it, 156 Book OF THE Buiack Bass. also, having had much practical experience with it. Mal- colm A. Shipley, Philadelphia, makes a specialty of betha- bara rods. The standard Henshall rod, of ash and lancewood, has a true and gradual taper from the reel-seat to the tip, which gives it a back, which, while just stiff enough for casting a minnow, is sufficiently pliable and yielding to give a cor- rect working to the rod under the play of a lively fish. And just here is where so many rods fail — they are made too weak in the butt-piece, or the upper two-thirds of it, usually by a rapid and concave taper to reduce the caliber of the rod at this point, in order to gain lightness. But this can only be done at the expense of weakening the rod, and spoiling its action. When a rod has too weak a back, or too slender a butt at this point, it causes the rod to be top-heavy, and pro- duces what is known as a “ double action” in the rod, or a “kick in the handle ;” qualities which were sought for in some salmon fly rods in the old country, as it was sup- posed that a fly could be cast farther with rods of this character. But it was necessary that the angler should become thoroughly educated in the handling of a rod with this peculiarity to be enabled to use it with any degree of satisfaction. However much this principle may have been desired by British salmon fishers, it becomes the very worst feature in a black bass minnow rod. With this defect in a bait rod, it is impossible to cast with any accuracy, or to any great distance. And, moreover, it produces in the angler a lack of confidence in his rod, for it “ feels weak ” to him at the very point where it should feel the strongest, and really the rod would give way at just this very point under a heavy strain. Fisoine Rops. 157 But, to refer to my rod again: I can easily cast a min- now from forty to fifty yards, and with great accuracy, the back being just stiff and yielding enough for this purpose. The bend from the last third of the butt-piece to the tip forms a true curve under the strain of a hard- pulling fish, which is the bend so desirable, and so hard to obtain. The strain falls equally upon the entire rod, so that it is impossible for me to tell just where it would break. The weak part of an imperfect rod can always be felt by an expert angler, and he knows perfectly well, while playing a fish, just where the rod is weakest, and just where it would fail. I have been informed by some makers that occasionally an angler will order a Henshall rod with the butt extending below the reel clamps a foot or more, so as to reach under the elbow, and thus form a point d’appui. This demand is founded on the use of the old-style rods, which were so heavy and long as to require either this support, or what was worse, the holding of the rod with both hands. The object of the modern black bass rod is to dispense entirely with this ungraceful and clumsy style, and enable the rod to be used with the hand alone, as in fly fishing. The novice will be sometimes told by theoretical anglers that he must procure a rod which accords with his size, strength, and general build; that a rod which suits one angler, will be too long, too short, too heavy, or too light for another. Now, this is all gammon; a rod must be made to suit the kind of fish, and the mode of fishing, with- out any reference whatever to the angler himself. In ordering a shot-gun that is to be used on all kinds of game, from the lordly buck to the dainty quail, it is of the highest importance that the gun should be built to fit the sportsman in every particular, and he then varies the charge 158° Book oF THE Buack Bass. according to the game. But there is no analogy between a shot-gun and a fishing rod; the latter weighs but ounces, where the former weighs pounds, and the weight of a rod for black bass angling will suit a weakly youth, or the strongest man, as well.- A half-pound in weight is of no moment as compared to the strength ofa man; and it is all stuff, and the sheerest nonsense, to talk of making a rod of this weight conform to the muscular requirements of any individual. A well-balanced rod feels the same to the weakest man or strongest, the tallest man or shortest; while a rod that lacks this quality will feel right to no one. I have no patience or sympathy with those visionary book- anglers who talk or write such ridiculous nonsense or spin such fine-drawn theories. A Home-maDE Buack Bass Rop. As the black bass anglers of Ohio, Kentucky, Tennessee, northern Alabama, and the south-west generally are ex- tremely partial to a natural cane or bamboo rod, I desire to tell them how to make a good one of this material at little cost, and which, though not a “ thing of beauty,” will prove itself a “joy forever,” in comparison with the cane rod, as generally used. After employing such a rod as I am about to describe for one season, the angler will be ready to advance another step, and adopt a good ash and lancewood rod, which contingency, I am free to admit, is the principal motive for this information. A natural bamboo cane, as it is procured at the tackle stores, is from fifteen to twenty feet in length; and it is the custom, in the localities named, to use from ten to twelve feet of the smaller or upper end of such a cane for a black bass rod, after attaching standing guides and a reel fastening. While such a rod is strong and light, with a Fisuine Rops, 159 moderate degree of pliancy and elasticity, it entirely lacks the great desideratum, balance, being decidedly top-heavy, and is too small at the butt to allow of a firm grasp of the hand, generally necessitating the use of both hands to hold it. Now, to obtain the greatest amount of good and pleas- ure from a rod of this character, proceed as follows: Select a genuine Calcutta bamboo cane, which may be known by its dark, mottled markings, caused by its having been burnt about the leaf-ridges, or knots. Select one that is hard and elastic, with a good taper, and quite small at the tip; those known as “ male” canes are the best, having larger bulges, or leaf-ridges, and being much tougher than the “female” canes. Having chosen a good one, cut off six and a half feet of the smaller end for the rod; the re- maining larger portion of the cane will make a good handle for a landing-net. Now make a wooden butt of white-ash or black-walnut, from eighteen to twenty inches long, of the following di- ameters: At the extreme butt end, seven-eighths of an inch ; now increase the diameter by a gradual taper to an inch and one-eighth at a distance of five inches from the extreme butt; then decrease the taper to an inch at a dis- tance of seven inches from extreme butt. The next four inches forms the reel seat, and is one inch in diameter throughout its length; now decrease the diameter by a rapid, concave taper for a distance of two inches, to three- fourths of an inch, and thence a gradual taper to the smaller end of the butt, which must exceed the diameter, of the large end of the cane about one-sixteenth of an inch; the diameter of the large end of the cane-joint — where cut in two—vwill be from half an inch to five- eighths of an inch. Having proceeded according to the instructions just. 160 Book oF THE Buack Bass. given, we have a cane joint six feet and six inches long, and a wooden butt say twenty inches long, with the grip of one and one-eighth of an inch in diameter, and the reel seat of one inch diameter. Now procure a set of reel bands one inch inside diameter; a pair of ferrules for the joint —- the inside diameter of the smaller or male ferrule being of the same diameter as the large end of the cane piece, which can readily be ascertained with a pair of calipers; five standing guides, graduated sizes, and a solid metal tip. These mountings should be brass or German silver. The guides should be attached at equal distances from the reel seat to the tip; and, having properly fitted the ferrules and reel bands, give the rod two coats of shel- lac or coach varnish. When dry, the rod is ready for use, and will be about eight feet in length, and weighing from six to eight ounces—a single-handed rod equal to any rod made for casting, will be well-balanced and strong, but will lack the pliancy, resiliency and perfect working of'a good ash and lancewood rod, yet it will be such a great: improvement on the cane rod, as generally used, that it has only to be tried to be appreciated. NON-DOWELED JOINT. One of the specifications of the Henshall rod is that the joints he made flush, with short, cylindrical ferrules, in- stead of the old-fashioned tapered ferrule with dowel and mortise; and as so many of these rods have been sold dur- ing the past twenty years, it has had a great tendency to introduce and popularize this form of joint, which is now also applied to most fly rods to their great advantage. It is now forty years since I made my first rod with flush joints, having, at that time never heard of or seen a Fisuine Rops. 161 7 1. Cross sections of Split-Bamboo Rod-Strips. 2. Reel Bands. 3. Winding Checks. 4. Metal Reel-Seat. 5. Capped Ferrules. 11 162 Book oF THE Buack Bass. rod joint without dowels, and ever since I have been a firm believer in this improved joint. If there were want- ing any proof of the practical superiority of the non-dowel joint over the dowel and mortise joint, it would be found in the fact that so many old anglers, as Thaddeus Norris, Reuben Wood, and Chas. F. Orvis, having the mechanical skill to construct their own rods, discarded the latter for the former style of joint many years ago. And, more- over, they all seem to have arrived at this determination and conclusicn independently of cach other. Many of the most valuable improvements and inventions have been made in like manner, each one supposing himself to be the sole inventor. T have often thrown apart the tapered and doweled joints of the old style rods in casting with both fly and bait rods, and have had them break near the lower end of the female ferrule, in consequence of too deep a mortise at that point; but with the cylindrical, non-dowel joint I have never had either accident to occur. The cause of the separation and throwing apart of the dowel-mortise joint I conceive to be this: The ferrule, dowel, and mortise being made tapering, the male ferrule with its dowel acts as a wedge, and the continual springing of the rod in casting tends to loosen this wedge, and to eventually separate the joint, in the same way that we extract a nail by working it from side to side. This fact can be easily demonstrated by separating the tapered dowel joint by working it back and forth in this manner, with the hands close to the ferrules. But it cannot be done with the flush cylindrical ferrule joint: to separate the latter it is necessary to pull or twist it apart, for no amount of springing it back and forth will loosen it. This fact ren- ders nugatory and superfluous all locking devices, screws, Fisuine Rops. 163 cleats, and strings, which have been proposed to secure the joint, and prevent its separation in casting. Ferrules should be short, and perfectly cylindrical. It is not necessary for the female butt ferrule to exceed two and a half inches in length, nor two inches for the second joint. The male ferrules should be of a corresponding length, say one inch, which will give all the “hold” re- quired. The ferrules should be perfectly fitted to each other throughout their entire extent. The lower end of the male ferrule, and the bottom of the female ferrule should be protected by metal caps or disks, soldered on, to exclude moisture. The ferrules should be fitted without cutting the wood, and a wrapping of silk put on at the ends for a finish. A good plan is to wrap on a guide or ring imme- diately below the female ferrules, so that the upper wrap- ping of the guide extends to the ferrule, which thus serves a double purpose. Swell ferrules are unnecessary, and are neither so good nor strong as cylindrical and uniform ones. The ends of the ferrules may, however, be split, or serrated, or be swaged into a hexagonal form for split-bamboo rods, to give a more perfect fit, without any disadvantage in other ways. Ferrules may be banded if the metal is very thin, which is apt to he the case with those drawn from German silver, which cannot be drawn so thick as brass. Ferrules should be affixed with shellac or cement instead of using a metal pin, which has a tendency to weaken the rod, and renders the removal of the ferrule more difficult for the purpose of repair. Tue Litre Grant Ron. On page 91 is mentioned the hibernation of black bass under the ledges and in the crevices of the reefs about the 164 Book oF THE Buiack Bass. 2 3 4 3 ° Rop Ties. 1. Solid agate. 2. Basket agate. 3. Three ring. 4. Tube. 5. One ring. StanDING GUIDES. 1, Agate. 2. Trumpet. 3. Common. 4. Anti-friction. 5. Twisted. 6. Two ring. Rinec Gumes. 1. Snake. 2. Ringsand Keepers. 3. Spiral. 4. Standing ring. Fisuine Rops. 165 islands in the west end of Lake Erie. When the bass emerge from their winter quarters in the spring, and like- wise in the fall before retiring for their seclusion during the winter, they linger about the reefs for several weeks in water from ten to twenty feet deep. They are fished for at these periods with live minnows, and in order to keep the bait near the reefs comparatively heavy sinkers are employed, which requires a rather stiff rod. To meet this method of angling I devised a modification of the Henshall rod which has been styled the “little giant.” It is made in two pieces with but one joint. Its measure- ments, when constructed of ash and lancewood, that is, with ash butt piece and lancewood, greenheart, or betha- bara upper piece, are as follows: Total length of rod, 7% feet. Length of grip, below reel-seat, 8 inches. Length of reel-seat, 4 inches. Greatest bulge of grip, 1% inches. Diameter of reel-seat, % of an inch. Diameter of male ferrule of joint, 11/32 of an inch. Diameter of extreme tip, % of an inch. Weight of rod, 8 ounces. It may be made somewhat lighter in split-bamboo with a short wooden handle, but where sinkers of two or three ounces are used, eight ounces will be found light enough. This rod may be utilized for coast fishing, where sinkers of various weights are necessary in the tideways, for fish up to ten or fifteen pounds. Some anglers prefer it for black bass fishing under all circumstances. Tut Froa-castinc Rop. Since the advantages of the short Henshall rod have been acknowledged, and the relegation of the long and e 156 Book OF THE BLACK Bass. also, having had much practical experience with it. Mal- colm A. Shipley, Philadelphia, makes a specialty of betha- bara rods. The standard Henshall rod, of ash and lancewood, has a true and gradual taper from the reel-seat to the tip, which gives it a back, which, while just stiff enough for casting a minnow, is sufficiently pliable and yielding to give a cor- rect working to the rod under the play of a lively fish. And just here is where so many rods fail — they are made too weak in the butt-piece, or the upper two-thirds of it, usually by a rapid and concave taper to reduce the caliber of the rod at this point, in order to gain lightness. But this can only be done at the expense of weakening the rod, and spoiling its action. When a rod has too weak a back, or too slender a butt at this point, it causes the rod to be top-heavy, and pro- duces what is known as a “ double action” in the rod, or a “kick in the handle;” qualities which were sought for in some salmon fly rods in the old country, as it was sup- posed that a fly could be cast farther with rods of this character. But it was necessary that the angler should become thoroughly educated in the handling of a rod with this peculiarity to be enabled to use it with any degree of satisfaction. However much this principle may have been desired by British salmon fishers, it becomes the very worst feature in a black bass minnow rod. With this defect in a bait rod, it is impossible to cast with any accuracy, or to any great distance. And, moreover, it produces in the angler a lack of confidence in his rod, for it “ feels weak ” to him at the very point where it should feel the strongest, and really the rod would give way at just this very point under a heavy strain. Fisoine Rops. 157 But, to refer to my rod again: I can easily cast a min- now from forty to fifty yards, and with great accuracy, the back being just stiff and yielding enough for this purpose. The bend from the last third of the butt-piece to the tip forms a true curve under the strain of a hard- pulling fish, which is the bend so desirable, and so hard to obtain. The strain falls equally upon the entire rod, so that it is impossible for me to tell just where it would break. The weak part of an imperfect rod can always be felt by an expert angler, and he knows perfectly well, while playing a fish, just where the rod is weakest, and just where it would fail. I have been informed by some makers that occasionally an angler will order a Henshall rod with the butt extending below the reel clamps a foot or more, so as to reach under the elbow, and thus form a point d’appui. This demand is founded on the use of the old-style rods, which were so heavy and long as to require either this support, or what was worse, the holding of the rod with both hands. The object of the modern black bass rod is to dispense entirely with this ungraceful and clumsy style, and enable the rod to be used with the hand alone, as in fly fishing. The novice will be sometimes told by theoretical anglers that he must procure a rod which accords with his size, strength, and general build; that a rod which suits one angler, will be too long, too short, too heavy, or too light for another. Now, this is all gammon; a rod must be made to suit the kind of fish, and the mode of fishing, with- out any reference whatever to the angler himself. In ordering a shot-gun that is to be used on all kinds of game, from the lordly buck to the dainty quail, it is of the highest importance that the gun should be built to fit the sportsman in every particular, and he then varies the charge 168 Book OF THE Buack Bass. manner of service required of them. Upon this principle an honest and well-made trout fly rod of good weight and length answers for black bass fly fishing; and, fortunately, a suitable rod of this character can be procured from any first-class maker; but I would caution the new hand against the many cheap rods now in the market. A good rod can only be obtained at a fair price. To propel so light an object as a cast of flies one hun- dred feet or more requires an instrument of propulsion as perfect as a rod can be made. Hence a fly rod must have stability and power, or backbone, in the lower third of the rod, with sufficient pliancy and resiliency in the upper two-thirds to respond to and augment the initial projective force applied by the arm of the angler. All fly rods should be made in accordance with this principle ; and it is only a question of proportion as between the heaviest salmon rod and the lightest trout rod. It is some- what on the principle of a long coach whip with a stiffish butt and flexible top, which enables the driver to flick a fly from the flank of a leader in a four-in-hand with ease and precision. Single-handed fly rods are from nine to eleven feet long; and weigh from three to eight ounces. The heavier rods are for black bass and large trout, and the lightest for small trout. Comparatively light rods are now made powerful enough to cast nearly a hundred feet, and of sufficient strength to kill the largest brook trout. The pleasures of angling are much enhanced by the employ- ment of a light rod, which permits the angler to cast for hours without fatigue, whereas with the old long and heavy rod it was at best a labor of love. The best material is split-bamboo, when of first quality, though lancewood, greenheart, or bethabara is more serviceable in the long Fisuine Rops. 169 run, and if made by a master hand is almost as satisfac- tory, especially for the heavier rods. A trout fly rod, then, weighing six or seven ounces, and not more than ten and a quarter feet long, is just about tight for ordinary black bass fly-fishing; but where the bass run large, averaging nearly or quite three pounds, a somewhat heavier rod, say seven and a half or eight ounces, will be found a more suitable and pleasanter rod to handle, though the six-ounce rod will do even here, for one who is an expert fly-fisher, and who does not mind a little extra straining of the brachial muscles, to say nothing of the rod. But while an ounce, more or less, hardly seems an ap- preciable quantity in the abstract, yet when added to or taken from a fly rod, like the fraction of an inch as applied to a man’s nose, it makes a very great difference in prac- tice and reality ; and in the former case, it is better to have an ounce too much, than a half ounce too little; for, like the repeating rifle when tackling a grizzly, it gives one a confidence in his resources which adds materially to the zest of his sport. It must be borne in mind, however, that it is not the largest bass that rise to the fly, and a lighter rod can, consequently, be used than in bait fishing; though where the bass run exceptionally large, and especially for the waters of Florida, six inches in length and an ounce in weight may be added. : The rod should have a stiffer back than most trout fly rods of the same weight and length, but should still retain nearly the same pliancy, though necessarily most of the flexibility will be in the upper two-thirds of the rod. This gives pliancy for casting, resiliency for striking, and plenty of “backbone” for playing and landing the fish.. Of course, a trout rod of about these dimensions will answer 170 Book or THE Buiack Bass. ROL HAR UE atom ul om see (A H! (1 5. Split-Bamboo Fly Rod.— Abbey & Imbrie. 6. Split-Bamboo Fly Rod.— Wm. Mills & Son. 7. Bethabara Fly Rod.— Malcolm A. Shipley. Fisuine Rops. 171 very well for black bass fishing, but as the flies to be used are generally larger than trout flies, and as the bass is usu- ally a much heavier fish than the brook trout, the rod will require a little more backbone than is usually found in trout rods. To obtain the necessary spring, snap, and stiffish back required in a black bass fly rod, much consideration must be given to the material of which it is to be constructed. In my opinion, there is no material that combines so many good and essential qualities as split-bamboo, if of the best quality, and if it is made up in a first-class manner. It is strong, flexible, comparatively light, and is the most re- silient material used in rod-making, approaching steel more nearly in this quality than any other wood. Ash and lancewood, greenheart, bethabara, and some other woods, when carefully selected, make excellent rods, but the best. are inferior to a good split-bamboo rod. On the other hand, a first-class bethabara, or ash and lancewood fly-rod, is better than most split-bamboo rods as now made. It must be borne in mind that the action of the modern shorter and stiffer fly rod differs from the former long and willowy rod of English pattern. With the improved form the action in casting is quicker and somewhat jerky, while with the longer and more supple rod: the action was slow, deliberate and more graceful, but required more force to get out a good length of line. The fly rod has the reel-seat at the extreme end of the butt, and the hand-piece, or grip, of course, above it; for the click-reel, which is used for fly-fishing, is a reel that is intended to “take care of itself” in the rendering of the line, and, therefore, is very properly placed where it is out ‘of the way, and where it adds very much to the balance and general working of the rod. 172 Book oF THE Buiack Bass. The reel-seat in fly rods is often made entirely of metal and which, while much admired by many, only adds to the weight of the rod, without being of material service. For myself, I prefer a plain reel-seat, simply a depression, or groove, cut in the butt of the rod, with reel-bands, as in the minnow rod. This answers every purpose, and to my mind there is nothing that can improve the beauty of a handsomely finished wooden butt; and on this account, I am also prejudiced against the hand-piece, or grip, being wound with cord or rattan. The self-wood, of which the butt is composed, seems to me to be the best and most ap- propriate finish for the grip, both as regards utility and beauty ; for the cord, or rattan, with which the grip is usu- ally wound, in fine rods, is extremely liable to become loosened and worn off. The wound hand-piece and the metal reel-seat look very attractive, but are not proof against wear and tear; and for my own use, and in accordance with my idea of the fit- ness of things, I think the less a rod is encumbered with fanciful and ornamental appendages, the better. We should ever bear in mind the original primitive cane fish- ing pole, upon which model all rods are founded, more or less, and remember that simplicity and utility usually go hand in hand. THE HENSHALL Biacx Bass Fry Rop. The specifications for this rod, in lancewood, and weigh- ing seven and one-half ounces, are as follows: Total length of rod, 10 feet, 2 inches. Length of each piece, without ferrule, 41 inches. Length of handle, from extreme butt to top of winding check, 12 inches. Length of reel-seat, 4 inches. Fisuine Rops. 173: Diameter of reel-seat, 34 of an inch. Length of grip, 7 inches. Diameter of greatest bulge of grip, 15/16 of an inch. Diameter of butt-piece at handle-joint, 15/32 of an inch. Diameter of male ferrule, butt-piece, 34 of an inch. Diameter of male ferrule, second piece, 15/64 of an inch. Diameter, extreme tip, 5/64 of an inch. It will be observed that while the ferrules used in this rod are the same as those in a short-handled Henshall min- now-casting rod of split-bamboo, the greater length of the several pieces in the fly rod gives it greater pliancy. It will be understood also that the joints are flush, or non- doweled, as in the same rod. The ferrules, reel-bands and butt-cap should be either solid brass, or German silver, without plating of any kind; let us have the real thing at all events, for I despise affecta- tion, or deception, in any matter or thing whatever. Brass is a good, honest, and bright metal, will not rust or tarnish, and if it is used at all let us use it on its merits, and for decency’s sake avoid the common practice of plating it with nickel, or, what is worse, silver, for the plating soon wears off and exposes the cheat. Rings, instead of standing guides, are used, as they are lighter, and on the fly rod answer just as well; they are lashed on with spool-silk by means of small metal strips, known as “keepers.” The rings should graduate in size from the butt to the tip, and should be of the same metal as the ferrules. The metal tip of the fly-rod is a single ting, which is preferable to a solid tip, or the three-ring style, on account of its extreme lightness, for it will be remembered that the tip, or top, of a fly-rod is of very small caliber. 174 Book OF THE Buack Bass. CHAPTER X. FISHING REELS. “And to that end, some use a wheel about the middle of the rod, or near their hand; which is to be observed better by seeing one of them, than by a large demonstration of words.”— Izaak WALTON. Next to a good rod there is nothing that contributes to the pleasure of the angler so much as a well-made reliable reel, and I am happy to be able to state that the improve- ments in fishing reels for black bass fishing have fully kept pace with the improvements in fishing rods. Manufactur- ers and inventors have taxed their ingenuity in devising the best and most suitable reels for both fly-fishing and bait-fishing, and the American reel, as the American rod, is to-day the best in the world. The earliest mention of a fishing reel that I am aware of is that recorded in the “Compleat Angler” by Izaak Walton, who states, as a matter of hearsay, that a “ wheel ” was sometimes placed about the middle of the rod for wind- ing up the line. He did not employ one himself, and probably never saw it used, or he would have been more explicit concerning it. 'The wheel mentioned was doubt- less a solid wooden one, of large diameter, with a deep groove in its peripheral border for the line. Such a winch is in common use to-day in England, and is known as the Nottingham reel. There are three kinds of reels employed in angling: the click reel, the multiplying reel, and the automatic reel. A fishing reel is made in accordance with the special service required of it, the objects of said service being twofold. The first and most important is the proper FisHinG REELs. 175 delivery of the bait in a manner and at a distance com- mensurate with the mode of fishing; and the second is to play and land the fish after he is hooked, or to reel the line for another cast. The reel which practically fulfills these conditions with the greatest ease and facility, in the method of fishing practiced, is the best reel to use. The two modes of angling in which the reel is em- ployed are bait-fishing and fly-fishing, and as the two methods differ so essentially, they require reels of widely different functions. Thus in bait-fishing the multiplying reel is used, while in fly-fishing the click reel is indis- pensable. The multiplying reel must not only be very rapid in its action, but the spool must revolve with the greatest ease and freedom, so as to deliver the bait as far as possible at a single cast, the thumb, meanwhile, controlling the rapid rendering of the line, so as to prevent back-lashing of the spool; but in fly-fishing the line is lengthened gradually, a few feet being taken from the reel by the hand before each subsequent cast, while the click offers the necessary resistance to the rendering of the line to permit this to be done without overrunning. As the multiplying reel is made wide, so as to allow for the thumbing of the spool, and as this necessity is not required in the click reel, the latter is made quite narrow, thus permitting the line to be reeled without bunching, and, at the same time, allow of its being reeled rapidly enough for all practical purposes, without a multiplying action; for the main object of a multiplying reel, is for facility in casting, and not in retrieving the line, as is often erroneously supposed. After a fish is hooked, a click reel answers the purpose of playing, and landing it, as well as the best triple or quadruple multiplier made — if not better; for often a fish 176 Boox oF THE Buack Bass. is reeled in by main strength with a multiplier, and an attempt made to land it before it has been killed on the rod, thus curtailing the real sport of angling, and at a _great risk to the angler’s tackle. I speak of this now, for I have heard anglers praising a rapid-working quadruple multiplying reel, because they could reel in a fish “so fast,” basing all of its merits upon this one quality; the desire to get possession of the fish seeming to be paramount to the real sport of hooking and playing it. THe Cuick REEL. The click reel is a single-action reel, and, consequently, is the simplest form of reel, from the fact that the service required of it is simply a slow and gradual lengthening of the line with each subsequent cast, the delivery of the fly being accomplished by pulling off from the reel a few additional feet of the line after each cast, until the desired or maximumi distance is reached, while the click offers just enough resistance to’ the rendering of the line to allow this to be done without confusion or overrunning. The handle, or crank, is connected directly with the axle, or shaft, and, consequently, “reeling in” the line would be slow work were it not obviated by the reel being made narrow, so that the coil of line upon the shaft enlarges rapidly, and the reeling is thus accomplished with greater facility. Its plan of construction is quite simple, and consists of a narrow spool set in a stationary frame, the spool revolving on a central shaft which has a handle at one end and a small spur wheel at the other. The spur wheel engages with a wedge-shaped pawl, which is held in place and con- trolled by a circular steel spring, allowing motion in either direction. This constitutes the so-called “ click,” the office of which is to retard to a certain extent the revolving of the spool. When the spool is rapidly revolving under the FisHine REeEzs. 1%7 rush of an active fish, the click fairly hums —a sound so pleasant to the angler’s ear that it is not inaptly styled the “song of the reel.” In my collection is a click reel made by J. L. Sage, of Lexington, Kentucky, in 1848, for black bass fishing, which he used for many years. It differs from the usual plan of click reels in having the spur wheel at the same end of the shaft as the handle, and the wheel is larger than customary. The circular spring is brass, which pro- duces a soft musical sound, and one more agreeable than that of most click reels. Click reels are made of metal or of metal and hard rubber. The handle is either a plain crank or a balance-han- dle attached directly to the shaft, or, as in some instances, a revolving disk is affixed to the shaft, with a short knob- like handle on its outer rim. Fra. 1. The latter form is the most Click Reel, with revolving Disk. powerful; moreover the line is not so apt to become fouled on its short, smooth handle. Should one of the screws that fastens the front disk-plate of the reel become loosened and project, as sometimes happens, it interferes with the free revolution of the crank; such a contingency is ob- viated by the revolving disk. Where a crank-handle is employed, there Fie. 2. should be a projecting rim, or safety Click Reel, with Metal safety }4nq\ within which the handle re- volves, to prevent fouling of the line. 12 178 Book OF THE BLack Bass. The balance-handle is a delusion and a snare. There is no real advantage in it. In so light a piece of machinery as a fishing reel, a balance- handle adds nothing to its ef- ficiency, while it is open to several objections, the most serious of which is the greater possibility of fouling the line as compared with the simple crank-handle. It is popularly supposed to aid in the smooth Fic. 3. ? : : ‘ Click Reel, with Balance-Handle ana 20d rapid revolution of the a aarag ton hacer spool; but if the reel is con- structed in a workmanlike manner, such aid is reduced to a minimum. It is one of those theories that is not borne out in practice. It was never designed by a practical angler. The click reel is placed at the extreme butt hs the fly rod, below the hand-grip, where it adds pS much to the balance and general work- ing of the rod. As the click regulates the rendering of the line, and as the narrowness of the reel obviates the necessity for guiding the line in reel- ing, it is placed out of the way, at ‘ the extreme butt. It should always be placed underneath the rod, and not ‘ Fie. 4. on top, as is often done. Orvis Reel. Click reels are all constructed upon the same general principle, but are of various patterns and composed of various materials, being made of hard rubber, celluloid, brass, bronze, and German silver: their weight depends on the material used. and the angler has a large assortment of styles and prices to select from. Any good trout click FisHING REELs. 179 reel is suitable for black bass fly-fishing, and can be fur- nished by any of the first-class dealers. In the choice of a click reel, the angler should select the lightest, when it is compatible with strength, and one in which there is the least probability of fouling the line on any prominent points, as projecting screws and caps, un- protected handles, etc. Metal reels are the strongest, and not so liable to injury as rubber or celluloid, in case of accidentally dropping, or striking them against rocks, etc. ; though the latter are much lighter, and with ordinary care are just as serviceable. There has been a very marked improvement in click reels during the past few years, the manufacturers seeming to vie with each other to produce the lightest, neatest, comeliest, and most serviceable reel. MvuripLyine REzLs. For bait-fishing the multiplying reel is a decided im- provement on the old single-action English reel or winch. It is made of metal or hard rubber, and of various styles or sizes. In shape and construction it differs necessarily from the click reel, having a different office to perform, or rather the same object — the delivery of the bait — to per- form in a different manner. Being intended for natural bait-fishing, it requires an easy-running and freely-render- ing action in order to deliver the bait as far as possible at a single cast. As there is no click to control the running off of the line, the thumb must be used for this purpose, by effecting a gentle and uniform pressure upon the spool, and for this reason the multiplier is made much wider than the click reel, or of the barrel or drum shape. The principle of construction of the multiplying reel consists of a small pinion on the end of the spool shaft, geared with a larger cog wheel attached to the crank. One 180 Book OF THE BLACK Bass. tevolution of the crank produces two, three, or four revo- lutions of the shaft, depending on the number of teeth in the wheels; thus, in a quadruple or four-time multiplier, there are, say, forty teeth in the wheel and ten teeth in the pinion. The multiplying reel is designed especially for casting a bait, and the better the construction of the reel, the longer the resultant, initial cast. All fine multiplying reels are now made with an adjust- able click, in order that they may be utilized for fly-fishing. Various devices are employed for the purpose. In some, the mechanism is on the back plate of the reel, as in the click recl, and is the same except that the pawl can be thrown in or out of gear by a sliding or turning but- Zemeee ton. This is by far the best plan, as it can be operated while the reel is in motion. In other reels, the pawl engages with the pinion on the front plate, Fic. 5. and is thrown in gear by Multiplying Reel. the same method as the other. In most Kentucky reels the click is used more as an alarm, though it can be utilized as well for fly-fishing if the spring is made stiff enough. It consists of a piece of watch spring, bent to a U-shape, and affixed to a block which is operated by a sliding button. The spring engages with the pinion on the front plate of the reel. Various forms of locks and drags are also applied to some multiplying reels, which, however, are only of fancied advantage. A good single-action reel, without a click, will run almost as freely as a multiplying reel within certain limits, but the resultant cast will be a short one, as the momentum is soon exhausted. In the multiplier, however, the mo- FisHING REELs. 181 mentum of the revolving spool is sustained and prolonged by the gearing of the reel, thus allowing a much longer cast to be made. As stated at the beginning of this chapter there has been marked improvement in multiplying reels for black bass fishing, notably during the past ten years, manufacturers having exercised their inventive faculties in devising reels of superior workmanship, and with various devices for the convenience of the angler. The principal manufacturers for the trade are Julius vom Hofe, Brooklyn, N. Y.; A. F. Meisselbach & Bro., Newark, N. J.; The America Company, Rockford, Il. ; and the Andrew B. Hendrix Co., New Haven, Conn. The excellent reels of these firms are kept in stock by all prominent dealers. Where there are so many good reels comparisons are indeed odious, and moreover the price of one is not always a safe criterion of its practical merits. In addition to the manufacturers for the trade there are the makers of special reels who sell directly to the angler. Of these the well-known hand-made reels of B. C. Milam & Son, Frankfort, Ky., and A. B. Meek & Sons, Louisville, Ky., are necessarily highest in price owing to the quality of material, the faultless and exquisite workmanship, and the nicety of adjustment employed in their construction. They are now so favorably known that a mere mention is only required here. , The Milam reel has recently been improved by adding jewelled bearings in which a hole is drilled for the ends of the spool-shaft or pivots; an obvious advantage in les- sening friction and favoring freedom of action. The Meek reel, as now made, also runs on fine jewels of exceeding hardness. With its bevel gearing there is abso- lutely no lost motion and runs as smoothly as though the power from wheel to pinion was transmitted by a belt. -In 182 Book oF THE Buack Bass. all other respects it is unexcelled in its class — it is a work of art. The fortunate angler who possesses either a ‘‘ Meek ” or a “ Milam ” reel is to be congratulated. In this connection, and in view of these recent improve- ments, it is worthy of note that the personal and favorite reel of George Snyder, made in 1810, and which was at one time in my keeping, had garnet jewel bearings. One of the finest hand-made reels, with the latest y~ ti improvements, is that | of the W. IL. Talbot Co., Nevada, Mo. It is made in several styles, of German sil- yer, with aluminum spool and _ handle, and jeweled _ bear- ings. The action is remarkably free; ten or twelve grains will overcome the inertia of the spool. The “ Henshall” quadruple-multiplying reel made by the T. H. Chubb Rod Company, Post Mills, Vermont, is an improvement on the Henshall-Van Antwerp reel de- scribed in the first edition of this book. .As now made it is lighter, with jeweled bearings and an adjustable click on the back plate. It is made of German silver, and with its improved features is second to no other reel for noise- less, free and sustained action. It is well-made through- out and fully justifies all that is claimed for it by its makers. It will not disappoint the most exacting angler. Several manufacturers have introduced “ take-down ” or “ take-apart ” reels which can be readily taken apart with- out the aid of a screw-driver, a feature that will be appre- ciated by the angler. Talbot Reel. Fisuing REets, 183 No. 1. Henshall Reel.— (T. H. Chubb Rod Co.) No. 2. Meek Reel.— (B. F. Meek & Sons.) No. 8, Milam Reel.— (B.C. Milam & Son.) 184 Book oF THE BuLack Bass. I believe the first reel of this kind was the “ President,” made by Julius vom Hofe, which can be taken. apart by loosen- ’ ing a thumb-screw in the center of the back plate and the working parts readily exposed for cleaning or oiling. This fine multiplying Fic. 6. reel is made of Ger- man silver and hard rubber, with adjustable click on the back plate, which can be operated when the reel is in motion. : The “ Meisselbach ” quadruple multiplying reel can be taken apart by unscrewing the metal band from the rubber cap of the front plate, whereby the spool is re- moved. As the large cog- wheel is very securely bridged in the cap, and the pinion cut on the spool-shaft, there are no Fig. 7. parts to come loose when the reel is taken apart. A thumb- screw in the center of the back plate operates a new device whereby any degree of friction can be exerted on the spool, a feature of decided merit to one who can not “thumb” the reel in casting. It has a new and novel click, operated by a slide on the rim of the back plate, directly under the thumb of the angler ; it operates only when the line is being pulled off, and is silent when it is reeled in. Fisuing REELs. 185 juadruple Multiplying Reel.— (The Andrew B. Hendrix Co. ) r Guadrupte Multiplying Reel.— mes Mills & Son.) 8. Quadruple Multiplying Reel.— (Dame, Stoddard & Co.) 186 Book oF THE Buack Bass. The take-apart reel of the America Company has several new features at once original and meritorious. The front plate has three pins fitting into three slots on the frame of the reel, so that a short turn to the left releases the front plate, with gearing and handle. When assembled it is secured by a spring button on the. rim. The cog-wheel is bridged to the plate, and the pinion firmly affixed to the spool-shaft. A remarkable feature of this reel is that it is ball-bearing throughout. A stroke on the handle will cause the spool to revolve about a minute, the friction being re- duced to a minimum. It is made of a beautiful metal — satin-nickel, and an extra spool of German silver goes with each reel, on which an extra line ean be carried to replace the one in the reel in case of a bad snarl of the line from over running. Other fine multi- plying reels in which a free-running ac- iw tion in casting is held to be the para- mount feature, in addition to being thoroughly well- made of the best material, are the “ Intrinsic ” of Wil- FisHiINnG REELs. 187 liam Mills & Son, the “Imbrie” of Abbey & Imbrie, and the “Silver King” of Thos. J. Conroy, all of New York. These fine reels are all so well-known, and have been held in such high esteem for many years by the angling fraternity, that further mention of their merits seems needless. Another new feature of late years is a device for Fig. 10. level winding of the line, when reeling it, in order to pre- vent its bunching on the spool. For those anglers who seem incapable of guiding the line on the spool with the finger or thumb, this device is, indeed, a welcome one. The first reel with this device was made by Wheeler & McGregor, Milwaukee, Wisconsin. A trav- : eler carries the line back and forth when being reeled, winding it on the spool in level layers, in much the same way as sewing cotton is wound on the spool. Since the reel was first made it has been improved by Fie. 11. having a steel screw-shaft in place of bronze, a hardened steel eyelet on the traveler, and a better protector for the traveler guide. In casting there seems to be but little more friction engendered with this reel than one without the spooling device; in other words as long a cast can be made, as less pressure with the thumb is required. x 188 Book oF THE Buiack Bass. A device to accomplish the same end is made by A. W. Bishop & Son, Racine, Milwaukee, which they term an “independent automatic spool- ing device,’ which can be easily applied to an ordinary reel that has three-sixteenths of an inch between the hub band and the oil cap on the front plate. The device is made in three sizes to fit reels of corre- sponding lengths between the reel plates. It is operated by two pulleys connected by a rubber band, one pulley being attached to the handle of the reel by an ingenious clip. It works well if it fits the reel, and the same remarks concern- ing casting, with the reel previously mentioned, will apply in a measure to a reel fitted with this device. Still another device to aid the angler, who needs such assistance, is the drag handle, which creates friction enough to prevent the fish from taking line too fast; it substitutes the thumb of the angler when placed on the spool to accomplish the same purpose. A. B. Meisselbach & Brother make “The Gov- gernor,’ a friction device placed inside a balance handle, which may be fitted to any reel, by replacing the original handle. It can be adjusted to any amount of friction de- sired by the turning of the small screws on its disk. When playing a fish the angler holds the handle between his fingers, and when the fish ceases to pull he can reel it in in the usual way. Fie. 12. FisHIne REELS. 189 Another device for the same purpose is the “Gem” drag handle furnished by Malcolm A. Shipley, which operates in the same way as just described, though constructed on a different principle. The friction device consists of a thumb-serew con- taining a strong spiral spring, by which the desired amount of friction is exerted by simply turn- ing the thumb-screw. Both of the devices mentioned operate by drawing the shaft of the spool against the handle. The following account of the history of the Kentucky Reel was contributed by me to the “ Outing” Magazine, for December, 1900; it is reproduced here as a matter of record, no one else now living being in possession of the data : EVOLUTION OF THE “ Kentucky REEt.”* The multiplying fishing reel originated in . Kentucky about the beginning of the Nineteenth Century. It has been asserted that it was first made in England, but I have been unable to find any reference to it, even in the oldest *As Assistant Chief of the Fisheries Department of the World’s Columbian Exposition, at Chicago, in 1893, I had charge of the Angling Building, and, among other exhibits, I had a collection of “ Kentucky reels,” embracing those of Snyder, the Meeks, Hard- man, Milam, Sage, and others. It showed the evolution. of the reel from the old-fashioned, home-made wooden spool, mounted by the local tinsmith, to the fine productions of the present time. This article is based on that collection. The pen-drawings of the oldest reels are by Mr. Charles Bradford Hudson, except several by myself. 190 Book oF THE Buiack Bass. British works on angling. It certainly has not been used there within my recollection. For a century the British angler has used the single-action reel for all branches of fishing. James Lane Allen has shown that the good people of the blue-grass region of Kentucky exhibit many of the dis- tinctive traits and customs of their English and Scotch- Irish ancestors; but in no feature is this heredity more pronounced than in their love for angling. With them, angling is the outward manifestation and practice of an in- herent and inherited attribute, and is in no sense a fad or hobby. Black-bass fishing, as an art, had its origin on the his- toric soil of Old Kentucky, in that particular portion known as “ God’s own country ”— the blue-grass section. It was especially the counties of Fayette, Bourbon, Wood- ford, Scott and Harrison that were renowned for their skilled anglers, who fished the then famous streams of the Kentucky River, its tributary, the Elkhorn, and the Lick- ing, Stoner and other adjacent waters. At that time the Kentucky River was a free-flowing stream, without dams between Frankfort and its mouth. It abounded in black bass, pike-perch (called “ salmon”), pike and occasionally a mascalonge. I have seen heads of the three last-named species from the Kentucky, Ohio and Tennessee rivers, preserved as trophies by old-time anglers, from fish which must have weighed almost forty pounds. Most of these anglers were among the best and brightest and most intelligent and cultivated men of that period, who adorned the several professions or were the lordly proprietors of vast domains of perennial green. Among others may be mentioned the well-known Kentucky fam- ily names of Clay, Bedford, Hume, Brown, Morris, Bibb, FisHine REELs. 191 Bacon, Holman, McCurdy, Mills, Ennis, Harvey, Blair, Crittenden, ete. The rods used by these pioneers of bass fishing con- sisted of the upper ten feet of a well-seasoned, light and straight native cane reed, weighing from four to six ounces when complete with guides and tip. The reel was lashed or seized to the butt of the rod, the reel-plate having holes in the ends for this purpose, as may be seen in some of the illustrations following. The line was that known as “ sea-grass,” though really raw silk, and the size the smallest made, or No. 1. It will be seen from this that the tools and tackle were as light, if not so suitable or elegant, as those of the present day. Mr. J. L. Sage, of Lexington, Ky., a veteran angler, who is still making “ Kentucky reels,” presented me with a click reel, and showed me his fly-rod and flies, all made and used by him as long ago as 1848; so that fly-fishing for black bass was practiced as early in Kentucky as in any other section of the country. At avery much earlier day, about 1810, there existed the Bourbon County Angling Club, of which George Sny- der, of Paris, Ky., was the president; and he it was who made the first “ Ken- tucky reel,” which has since become so famous, and in my opinion the first mul- tiplying reel in the world. Previous to this time the black-bass angler was com- 4 pelled to use the old single-action reel, Fic. 13. usually of English make, or the dis- 14 Wooden Spool carded spool from his wife’s work-basket, when of large size, and mounted on a frame by the local tinsmith. Fig. 13.— Black wooden spool mounted on iron frame. Disk, 1% inches diameter; 1% inches between disks; flat iron crank with black wooden handle; ‘holes in ends of reel-plate for seizing to rod. 192 Book OF THE Buiack Bass. To this day the octogenarian angler in Kentucky calls his reel a spool. Mr. Sage informed me that he had seen the spool used on the Cape Fear River, near Wilmington N. C., in 1839 and 1840. George Snyder was born in the same county as Daniel Boone — Bucks, Pa. He went to Paris, Ky., then called Hopewell, about 1803, and died there on February 10, 1841, aged sixty years. He was a skillful watchmaker and silversmith; being a good practical angler, and see- ing the necessity for a rapid multiplying reel for black- bass fishing with the live minnow, he proceeded to invent one. Snyder’s first reel was made for his own use, about 1810. He afterward made reels for members of his club, and others. Some twenty years ago the late David M. Snyder, of Cynthiana, Ky.— the last surviving son of George Sny- Fig. 14. Fie. 15. G. Snyder’s Own Reel. G. Snyder's Own Reel Gearing. der — showed me a reel made by his father, in which the ends of the spool-shaft were beveled to points which fitted into beveled recesses of pivots that screwed into the center caps of the outer disk-plates of the reel. By this com- pensating device any wear could be readily taken up, or the Fig. 14.— George Snyder’s own reel, made of brass, in 1810. Disk-plates, 13 inches diameter; length of spool, 136 inches. Marked in script “G. Snyder ” and stamped “G. S.” The shaft runs on garnet jewels. This reel is in the possession of his grand- son, R. J. Snyder, of Louisville, Ky. Fig. 15.— George Snyder’s own reel gearing. Brass lock spring, silver alarm spring. FisHine REELs. | 193 running of the reel regulated by a turn of these screw pivots. Tt will be noticed, perhaps, that all of the Snyder reels figured are quite narrow in diameter of the spool, and also much longer than in those of the present day. This is in accordance with the fact that a long, narrow spool runs more rapidly, all things being equal, than where the spool is short and of greater diame- ter. J have seen but one Snyder reel of large size, which was no doubt em- Large Snyder Reel, Front View. ployed for large fish, as mascalonge, pike and the so-called “salmon” (pike-perch or wall-eyed pike). This reel is shown in Fia. 17. Fie. 18. Large Snyder Reel, Back View. Large Snyder Reel Gearing. the illustrations. Its peculiarities are a curiously-shaped flat lever, for operating the alarm spring by means of a Fig. 16.— Brass reel made by Geo. Snyder about 1820. Disk- plates, 284 inches diameter; length of spool, 2% inches. Fig. 17. Showing back disk-plate with drag-spring outside. Fig. 18.— Showing gearing. Steel wheel with 32 leaves; steel pinion with 8 teeth, a quadruple multiplier. 13 194 Book oF THE Buack Bass. pin working in a curved slot, and the flat brass drag- spring, which is on the outside of the back disk-plate. I imagine it was placed there to allow of its being used while the reel was running, which would prove quite an ad- vantage while playing a large fish. This reel is in the possession of Mr. R. J. Snyder, of Louisville, Ky., who says it is one of the oldest reels made by his grandfather. A very interesting reel is one made by George Snyder, in 1821, for Hon. Brutus J. Clay, who was a member of Congress in 1864. It is now owned by his son, Mr. C. F. Clay, of Bourbon County. Ky.. and is still in good condi- tion, though it has been used by Mr. Clay and his father for nearly seventy years. It is marked in script, “@G. S., Fie. 19. Fie. 20. Clay’s Snyder Reel. Clay’s Snyder Reel iy y' ‘he Feb. 1, 1821.” This, like most of George Snyder’s reels, has the steel ends of the spool-shaft projecting through holes in the center of the disk-plate. Also. as in all of Snyder's reels, the pillars are riveted to the back plate, and project through the inner front plate, where they are se- cured by wire keys. Another reel made by George Snyder, not later than 1825, is reproduced to show a peculiar feature, one that I have never seen before ner since in a “ Kentucky reel,” Fig. 19.— Reel made by George Snyder in 1821; brass, in good condition; 14% inches in diameter; length, 14% inches. Fig. 20.— Gearing. Brass wheel with 21 leaves; steel pinion with 7 teeth; triple multiplier. FIsHING REELs. 195 and that is the absence of both drag and alarm. There is nothing but the lock-stop, whereby a pin in the flat brass spring drops into a hole in the spool-disk. I cannot con- ceive how a Kentucky angler of the olden time could be Fie. 21. Snyder Reel. Snyder Reel Gearing. content to fish without an alarm spring to his reel! I am free to say, however, that of all of Snyder’s reels which I have seen I prefer this one, for, personally, I have no use for either drag, click, alarm or lock in a multiplying reel, ae Oe ree ee ow Fig. 23. Fig. 24. J. & C. Snyder Reel. Massie’s Reel Gearing. Fig. 21— This reel was made sometime between 1818 and 1822. It is of brass, like all of Snyder’s reels. It is in excellent con- dition to-day. Diameter, 154 inches; length, 114 inches. Fig. 22.— Gearing. Brass wheel with 24 leaves; multiplies 3% times. Fig. 23.— Brass reel stamped “J. & C. Snyder.” Diameter, 1% inches; length of spool, 1% inches; multiplies four times. Fig. 24.— Gearing of brass reel made by Charles Snyder for present owner, Mr. W. W. Massie. Diameter, 2% inches; between disks, 2 5/16 inches. Alarm is operated by a bent arm of steel wire, which is moved by a small block attached to an outside oblong slide. 196 Book oF THE Buack Bass. After Snyder’s death two of his sons, John and Charles Snyder, succeeded to his business, and they made a few reels. One is now in my possession, and I have seen but one other, owned by Mr. W. W. Massie, of Paris, Ky. The latter is stamped “ G. S.,” but was made by Charles Snyder expressly for Mr. Massie, who saw him at various times at work on it. Both reels were made between 1841 and 1844. The next person to turn his attention to reel making, after the elder Snyder, was Jonathan Fleming Meek, also a skilful watchmaker. He went from Danville, Ky., to Frankfort, about 1833, where he made his first reel for Hon. Mason Brown, of Frankfort, a noted jurist of his Fie. 26. Fig. 27. Higgins’ J. F. Meek Higgins’ J.F.Meek Higgins’ J. F. Meek Reel, Front View. Reel, Back View. 1 Gearing. day, and a devoted angler. Judge Brown, having had his Snyder recl borrowed or stolen just at a time when the bass began to bite their best, prevailed on Mr. Meek to make him one. At an early day there were quite a number of Ken- tuckians who owned plantations in Mississippi, Louisiana Fig. 25.— Brass reel made by J. F. Meek about 1840. In fair condition, perfectly plain. Diameter, 15 inches; length, 1% inches. Fig. 26.— Showing back disk-plate of No. 25. Fig. 27.— Gearing. Steel wheel with 34 leaves; steel pinion with 8 teeth; multiplies a little more than four times. FisHine REELS. 197 and Arkansas, but spent their summers in Kentucky. Two of the Meek reels shown were made for such parties. One for Mr. R. Higgins, of Lexington, a Mississippi planter, the other for Mr. D. Vertner, a Louisiana planter. ‘The latter reel is now in the possession of his granddaughter, Mrs. Alexander Jeffrey, of Lexington, Ky. These reels, it will be observed, are improvements in some respects on the Snyder reels. There is a collar around the crank-shaft; the ends of the spool-shaft do not project, and the alarm and drag-springs are operated by sliding buttons, as in the modern reel. Fie. 28. Fig. 29. Vertner’s J. F. Meek Reel, Vertner’s J. F. Meek Reel, Front View. Back View. Tt seems that about the time that Jonathan F. Meek made his first reel, in 1833, or soon after, at least one reel was made by Theodore Noel, also a watchmaker of Frankfort. J. F. Meek continued to make reels until about 1840. when he formed a partnership with his brother, Benjamin F. Meek, who was likewise a fine watchmaker. After this the reels were made by B. F. Meek, and stamped “J. F. & B. F. Meek.” Fig. 28.— Solid silver reel made by J. F. Meek about 1840. In good condition. Diameter, 114 inches; length, 1 15/16 inches. Fig. 29.— Back disk-plate of No. 28. Gearing about same as No, 27. The pillars are made arching instead of straight. 198 . Book orf THE Buiack Bass. About the year 1843 a very fine workman and expert watchmaker, of Louisville, Ky., named J. W. Hardman, began making multiplying reels for black-bass fishing. fHis reels were a great improvement on those previously rade by others. He shortened the spool and increased the diameter, aftixed the pillars to the disk-plates by screws instead of riveting, added some ornamentation, and al- Fig. 30. Mr. Benjamin F. Meek. together made the first true and substantial improvements in the “ Kentucky reel,” both as to its practicability and appearance, and these were followed thereafter by all other makers. The “ Kentucky reel” to-day bears testimony to his unmistakable genius and fine handiwork. The Hard- man reel illustrated is the property of Mr. J. F. Speed, of Louisville, Ky., and is in excellent condition. It was made about 1845, and is a very handsome piece of work, of German silver. The sliding buttons are gold-plated, as FisHina REELs. 199 are the screws. The ornamentation is very fine and work- manilike. Mr. Benjamin C. Milam, whose name is almost synony- mous with the “ Kentucky reel,” went to Frankfort, Ky., Fie. 31. Hardman Reel. Hardman Reel Gearing, in 1835, and worked awhile with Beverly Noel, a watch- maker, a brother to Theodore Noel, previously mentioned. He visited Paris, Ky., in 1836, and saw George Snyder and his reels. In this ™) same year he engaged as | an apprentice to J. Ff. Meek, and it was not long before the reel making was given over to him and B. F. Meek, when the lat- ter came into the firm. The Meek brothers dis- solved partnership about 1851, Jonathan going to Louisville, but returning again to Frankfort just before his death in 1884. Fie. 33. ay = eeyt rari p Mr. Benjamin C. Milam. After the withdrawal of Fig. 31— German silver reel made by J. W. Hardman. Diam- eter, 2 1/16 inches; length, 2 inches. Fig. 32.— Gearing of No. 31, Pinion has 10 cogs; wheel, 40; quadruple multiplier. 200 Book oF THE Buack Bass. J. F. Meek, the firm became Meek & Milam, which in turn was dissolved at the end of five years, though the former partners continued to occupy the same store, Milam devoting himself to making reels, while B. F. Meek took the watchmaking and jewelry business. All reels made by Mr. Milam continued to be stamped “ Meek & Milam” until 1878, when he used his own stamp of “B. C. Milam.” In later years, having trained his son to the trade, he took him into his business under the firm name of B. C. Milam & Son, which is continued to the present time. Fic. 34. Fie. 35. Meek & Milam Reel. Meek & Milam Reel Gearing. There were a few reels with so-called “ centrifugal gear- ing ” made at an early date by B. F. Meek, a Mr. Barbour, of Georgetown, Ky., and B. C. Milam. Among the reels I exhibited at the Chicago World’s Fair was a very elab- orate and ornamental one of solid silver, made by B. F. Meek, about 1846, for an artist of New Orleans, T. S. Mayeau. A novel feature of this reel was the “ bell-click,” made upon the same principle as the repeating watch, Fig. 34.— Brass reel made by B. C. Milam and stamped “ Meck & Milam No. 1.” In excellent condition. Diameter, 1% inches; length, 1 5/16 inches. Fig. 35.— Gearing is essentially as made to-day. Pinion has 10 teeth; cog-wheel, 40; quadruple multiplier. Fisuing REELs. 201 « whereby the artist-angler could really enjoy the “music of the reel,” the two bells being tuned in thirds. The peculiar mechanism of the reel is the application of the principle of the epicycloidal wheel, whereby recip- rocating motion is converted into circular motion. While the power of this plan of gearing is greater than in the ordinary reel with two wheels, the friction is also too great for casting; consequently it was abandoned. An old reel stamped “Meek & Milam” was exhibited in my collection, made somewhere about 1844, and is shown in the accompanying illustrations. The pillars Fie. 36. Fig. 37. Diagram of epicycloidal wheel. Bell Click. are still of the Snyder plan, as also the long narrow spool. The improvements are.a collar to crank-shaft, sliding but- tons for alarm and drag, and a better shape to front disk- plate. Here we have for the first time the bent or U-shaped alarm spring formed of a piece of watch spring. Tt will be further cbserved that with the exception of the ornamental bars or pillars of the Hardman reel, this reel is a close imitation of it in its general form, in the sliding buttons and their screws, in the collar and the retaining screw of the crank. A strong resemblance is: also seen Fig. 36.— Gearing of epicycloidal wheel. Fig. 37.— Bell click, showing bells and hammers. 202 300K OF THE Buiack Bass. in the gearing, more especially in the sliding blocks and drag-spring. M. J. L. Sage, of Lexington, Ky., but previously of Frankfort, was also an early maker of the ‘* Kentucky reel,” and I am satisfied that he was the first to make a Fic. 38. Mr. J. L. Sage. click reel, in Kentucky, for black-bass fly-fishing. of which branch of angling he was one of the pioneers. I have the smallest and neatest “ Kentucky reel” I have ever scen; it was made by Mr. Sage. In 1883, Mr. B. F. Meek went to Louisville, Ky., where he entered on a new era of reel making. He formed a partnership with his two sons. He made a new departure in the gearing of the reel, which he called the “ spiral FisHing REELS. 2038 gear.” This consists in cutting the teeth of the wheel and pinion obliquely or diagonally, instead of horizontally. The space between the teeth, at their base, is also cut rounding, instead of flat or square. Other makers of the “ Kentucky reel ” are Geo. W. Gayle, of Frankfort, and James Deally, of Louisville. The reel as now made is still principally for black bass fishing, though larger sizes are furnished for striped, bass and tarpon. In connection with the foregoing account I wish to add that before Snyder’s day, the black bass anglers of Kentucky used the single action reel, and sometimes a wooden thread-spool mounted on a brass or iron frame as mentioned. Many years ago a gentleman named Lewis owned an estate called “Llangollen,” a few miles from Frankfort, Kentucky, on the banks of the classic Elk- horn, then a famous black bass stream. He was a sports- man of the old school and a frequent contributor to Skin- ner’s “American Turf Register and Sporting Magazine,” and later of Porter’s “ Spirit of the Times.” He was the owner of an old spool similar to the one figured which he left in 1842 with Mr. Sage for repairs, and said that he brought it from his old home at Wytheville, Virginia, and had used it for many years. He preferred it to the mul- tiplying reels then being made in Kentucky, and used it for bait-fishing, as well as for fly-fishing—a_ striking illustration of that prejudice, called by courtesy conser- vatism, of the British angler, for he was no doubt of Welsh extraction judging from ‘his name and the title of his es- tate. The old spool figured may be the one alluded to, as it came from the archives of Mr. J. L. Sage, an old Ken- 204 Book oF THE BLack Bass. tucky reel maker, who has recently joined the great ma- jority across the silent river. As an interesting relic the gaff-hook used by George Snyder in connection with the large reel described, is here figured. It is in possession of his grandson, and was doubt- less employed to gaff the immense pike-perch, pike and mascalonge that were found in the Kentucky River at an early day. It is about six inches in length and nearly two inches across the bend. George Snyder's Gaff-Hook. FisHing LIngs. 205 CHAPTER XI. FISHING LINES. “T will lose no time, but give you a little direction how to make and order your lines, and to color the hair of which you make your lines, for that is very needful to be known of an ang ets ed IzaaKx WALTON, Reet Lines ror Castine THE Minnow. A Bait line for casting a minnow should, in the first place, be composed of the very best material, which, in this case, is raw silk. It should be of very small caliber, the smallest that can be made consistent with strength, and Size G. raw silk fulfills this condition etter than any other mate- rial, It should be very hard, compact, and closely braided. These conditions secure a line that renders freely and easily, is quite elastic, and at the same time absorbs but littlé water, and will not kink or snarl in casting. The line should, moreover, be tinted some suitable color, to render it as nearly invisible as possible, for it must be remembered that we cannot use a gut leader in casting the minnow. The best line, then, we will say, is the braided, or plaited raw silk line, of the smallest caliber, for ordinary fishing ; but where the bass average fully three pounds, the next largest size may be used, though I would advise the smaller 206 Book oF THE BLAcK Bass. line even here to be employed in preference. Raw silk lines require the greatest care to preserve their usefulness. They should be carefully dried after use, as soon thereafter as possible, for without this caution they soon become weak and rotten. And, moreover, a reel-line, for bait-fishing, should never be waterproofed with any preparation that in- creases its caliber or decreases its pliability, for this can only be done with great detriment to the line, as regards casting. Next best to the raw silk line is the braided boiled silk line, or, as sometimes called, the dressed silk line. This is a good line when plaited hard and closely, but most of them are too loosely braided, in which case they absorb water quite freely, which develops an annoying propensity of clinging to the rod in casting, and interferes somewhat with the free rendering of the line. They are made of good stock, however, and are quite strong, and. nicely tinted. The boiled silk line should be as well cared for, and as carefully dried, after use, as the raw silk line, and for the same reasons. The braided linen line is a very good one, in one respect better than the silk, being quite hard and closely plaited, but the caliber is too large. The smallest size now made is too great for a reel-line for black bass bait-fishing. Where the bass run very large, however, as in lake fishing, or in the extreme south, the smallest size may be employed with satisfaction. It will last longer than the silk line, Fisuine Lines. 207 . and will bear rougher and more careless usage. It is much heavier, however, is not so elastic, and, therefore, not so desirable a line, in these respects, as the silk line. The only size to use is G, or 5. The above are the only lines that I can recommend for bait-fishing for black bass, where much casting is prac- ticed, for braided lines are the only lines that will not kink and curl. No twisted or cable-laid line can be profit- ably employed for this purpose, on account of this kinking propensity, which, to the angler, is a source of great trouble, vexation, and perplexity; and there is no method by which the kink can be entirely removed or eradicated from twisted lines. Some anglers niaintain that this kink- ing quality can be taken out of a line by trailing it in the water behind a boat, without sinker or hook; but this is a delusion and a snare, for after casting a line a few times in succession that: has been treated in this manner for hours, it will kink and snarl as badly as ever, and this is to be naturally expected, from the mode of manufacturing such lines. It is unreasonable, moreover, to expect a twisted line to”perform the functions of a braided one, for this it can not do. In the first edition of this book I made the statement that the perfect line for black bass bait-fishing was yet in the future, and suggested how a much better line than any in use could be made, and expressed the hope that such a line would soon be produced, as I had invited the attention of the extensive fishing line manufacturing concern of the Henry Hall, Jr., Company, of Highland Mills, N. Y., to the matter.. T am glad to state that suitable lines were shortly after- ward manufactured by the said company, in response to those suggestions, and have been in the market for many 208 Book oF THE Buack Bass. years. These lines seem to be all that can be desired as reel-lines in bait-fishing, for which the bass fisher is to be congratulated. The lines just alluded to are styled letter “ H,” or No. 6 in size; and while they are a third less in caliber than the “G,” or No. 5 line, they seem to contain the same amount of stock, and to be fully as strong, but being more closely braided they are much smaller in size, and more compact. They absorb but little water, and consequently render very freely in casting the minnow. Owing to the demand created for the “ H” line, other manufacturers soon began making them. They can now be had in several styles, and of the best selected dressed and raw silk. The dressed or e e 6 « boiled silk line is very firm and light, weighing not quite two grains to the yard — one hundred yards weighing one hundred and eighty-five grains. It is of the same caliber as the No. 1 sea-grass line, and fully as strong, sustaining a strain of eight pounds. The raw silk line is very hard and compact, and a trifle heavier than the boiled silk line, weighing about two and one-third grains to the yard, or two hundred and thirty-five grains to a hundred yards. It is mottled in color, like most raw silk lines. It sustains a dead weight of ten pounds, which is at least three times the strength actually required with a pliant rod. I have often killed bass averaging three pounds with a line that would not sustain more than a pound, dead weight. This line is also made waterproof by a new process, which does not detract in any way from its use as a bait line, as the waterproofing does not diminish its flexibility or softness in any degree —a result that had before been FisHine LIngs. 209 impossible to obtain, as all waterproof lines were too stiff and unyielding for minnow-casting. The process of waterproofing, however, makes the line perfectly black in color, which at first sight might be deemed an objection by some. But I have experimented with it in numerous practical tests, alternating with lines of lighter tints, and have never discovered that it made the slightest difference to the fish. And if we will reflect a moment, and hark back to our youthful experience in angling, when we fished for fingerling trout, shiners, gudgeons, or sunfish, with black sewing silk for lines, or in our adolescent days, when we made our own lines for black bass fishing, by twisting together two or three strands of sewing silk — we somehow always preferred black silk — and we were just as successful in luring the wily bass with those somber, home-made lines, as we were after the braided, light-tinted lines came into vogue. Mr. Malcolm A. Shipley, Philadelphia, furnishes a black line of this character, size H, which is closely-braided, waterproof, and very strong, while being soft and pliable. Messrs. Abbey & Imbrie, New York, furnish a size G line of Italian silk, closely-braided, of a mottled tint of black and red, a remarkably strong line, and quite pliable. Their No. 90 organzine sericum braided line is very strong, being tested to fourteen pounds, though about H in size; its color is black. Messrs. William Mills & Son, New York, furnish a drab, waterproof, hard-braided silk line, which they style the “Record.” It is made in three sizes for minnow casting, G, H, and a still smaller size for tournament work. The best caliber for the angler is H, though I prefer the tourna- ment line for my own use. T have thoroughly tried the lines mentioned above, and 14 210 Book OF THE BLAckK Bass. can recommend their use for strength, pliability and all the necessary features that are essential in a minnow-cast- ing line. REEL-LINES FOR FLY-FIsHING. The reel-line for fly-fishing must necessarily be heavier than the line used in bait-fishing, the greater weight of the former being required to cast objects so light and deli- cate as artificial flies; while in the case of the small and light bait-line, the minnow, swivel and sinker give the G F E D c required weight for casting. Increased weight is obtained by increase of the caliber of the line, so a fly-line is conse- quently of a larger size than a bait-line. In days long gone the twisted or plaited hair, and hair and silk, lines were employed altogether by the best anglers for fly-lines, but they have been entirely superseded by the really elegant tapered and enameled waterproof braided silk line. The latter is the line par excellence for all kinds of fly-fishing, being smooth, round, polished and perfectly ‘waterproof, and is just stiff and heavy enough to favor a perfectly straight cast, without looping or kinking, quali- ties that are peculiarly essential to this mode of: angling. FisHine LIngs. 211 Those veterans who have used the old-fashioned fly-lines, are prepared to speak feelingly and appreciatively concern- ing the great superiority and excellence of this line. They are made in several sizes for salmon, black bass and trout fishing; are very strong and serviceable, and, for black bass angling, can be purchased in lengths of from twenty-five to thirty yards. They are usually fashioned with a regular and gradual taper for several yards to the fly-end, the fly-end being only about one-half the caliber of the reel-end. Some lines, and which is the best way, taper both ways from the middle. They are usually stained of a greenish-olive hue, which harmonizes well with the tints of the water, sky and foliage. From twenty- five to thirty yards is the right length, and the size should be either F or G, which corresponds with Nos. 4 and 5, some dealers designating the sizes by letters, others by numerals. Next best to the tapered enameled silk line is the oiled, braided silk line; though this is not tapered, it is a good, strong and useful line, and is used by many anglers in preference to all others. It is tinted of a similar shade to the enameled line, and altogether is a very satisfactory fly- line, being heavy enough, and, withal, cheaper than the tapered line. Letters E and F, or Nos. 3 and 4, are suit- able sizes. Next in order is the braided linen line, either water- proof or plain. Where economy in price is the necessary object, this is the best line to select, though the angler should bear in mind that the best is the cheapest, for he knows full well that to no other class of goods does this maxim apply with more force than to fishing-tackle. .This line is strong, firm and round, and is capable of long and hard service, if proper care is taken to dry it thoroughly 212 Book oF THE Buack Bass. always after using. It is well adapted for making a nice, straight cast, and will not curl or kink. It is usually stained a light shade of slate, or a grayish drab. Letter F, or No. 4, is about the right size. Some fly-fishers use the ordinary braided raw or boiled silk lines, which, while being the best lines for bait-fish- ing, are not so well adapted for fly-lines, on account of their light weight; the medium sizes, however, answer tolerably well. Letter E, or No. 3, is the correct size, when used for black bass fly-fishing. All fishing lines that are not absolutely waterproof should be carefully dried after use; and even waterproof lines would be much benefited by an airing before putting them away. Even the best lines become weak and worthless through a want of proper and judicious treatment. It is impossible to make a line that is indestructible, or proof against mildew or rot, though many anglers seem to think to the contrary, judging from the shiftless and reprehensi- ble manner in which they use them; then, when the line fails, they blame the manufacturer. Any reputable and responsible dealer can furnish good lines for fly-fishing, but among those I have G F &: used I can conscientiously mention the following: The “ Hercules” waterproof, enameled line furnished by Mr. Thomas J. Conroy, New York, is one of much' merit, FisHING LINgs. 213 being perfectly smooth, hard, evenly braided, and void of any tendency to stickiness, a quality that will be appreci- ated by those who have used inferior lines. Abbey & Imbrie, New York, offer a tapered fly-line, No. 5%, which is simply unexcelled in every way. It em- bodies all the essential qualities of a fly-casting line, being smooth, strong, and of uniform excellence throughout. When in England, I examined the best English fly-lines, but there was nothing that could compare to those of American manufacture. London dealers showed me, with much pride, the metal-center line, which they claimed to be the best fly-line in the world. / The advantage claimed for the metal-center line is that it can be used of a smaller caliber and still retain the same weight as a larger line; and at the same time it is prob- ably a little stronger, though for that matter any of the enameled lines are strong enough. The metal center consists of an extremely small copper wire, around which the line is braided. The wire is so fine that it does not stiffen the line to an appreciable degree, as might be imagined. As the line is so thoroughly water- proof, there is not much probability of the wire becoming oxidized or rusted. Rop-Lines. The twisted line has its proper place in fishing, and sometimes answers a good purpose, as I will now mention. There are many anglers who, from choice or necessity, dis- pense with the reel in black bass fishing. Oftentimes the character of the stream is such that a reel can not be used to advantage; for instance, on streams that are narrow, and much choked with snags, roots, and other obstructions, that preclude the playing of a fish, a reel is not necessary, for the fish must be killed within a few feet of where 214 Book oF THE BLack Bass. it was hooked, and must, of a necessity, be landed as soon as possible. In this case, a long, light, and pliable — but not too limber — rod must be used, say a natural cane pole, twelve or even fifteen feet long, with the finest and smallest line that can be procured, which, in this case, is the twisted silk line. This line is made of very small caliber, nicely tinted, of a suitable color, and is quite strong. It is manu- factured in connected lengths of fifteen feet, which is about the right length of line for this kind of angling. The sizes run from No. 1, the smallest, up to No. 5, the largest. The smallest, or No. 1, is the size to use, always, when fishing on streams; but for pond or lake fishing, where pickerel abound, No. 2 or 3 may be substituted. Next to the silk line, in order of merit, comes the twisted or relaid sea-grass line, domestic or Japanese, the latter being the best. They are numbered in the same way as the silk line, No. 1 being the smallest size, and the prefer- able size to use. Many anglers, notably in the border and southern states, use the sea-grass line for a reel-line, in preference to all others, because it is strong, of small cali- ber, quite hard and elastic; and, as they do not cast very frequently, it answers pretty well, but, as stated before, will kink when much casting is practiced. The sea-grass line is both twisted and relaid, the latter being the best, as it does not kink quite so badly as the twisted line. In relaid lines, the strands are three in number, each strand being twisted from left to right, and the strands twisted together in the opposite direction, or from right to left. On the score of economy, twisted flax and cotton lines are sometimes used for rod-lines; but they are beneath the notice of the black bass angler, as the sizes are too large to be used for this purpose. Fisoing Lings. 215 Hanp-LinEs FoR TROLLING. There are many persons who can not, or will not, use a fishing-rod, but who greatly enjoy trolling with the hand- line and spoon-bait for black bass. For the benefit of these unfortunates, I will say that the only line suitable for the purpose is a braided or plaited linen or cotton line, size Cor D (lor 2). Such lines are large enough to pre- vent cutting the hands, and they will not kink or twist, qualities that are peculiarly essential for this kind of fish- ing. A twisted line, of any material, is inadmissible here, for the revolving of the spoon, if a swivel is not used, will cause even a braided line to twist on itself and kink; there- fore, one, or even two, swivels should always be attached to, and near, the spinning-bait. A trolling hand-line should be from twenty-five to fifty yards long. 216 Book oF THE BLAack Bass. CHAPTER XII. SILK-\WORM GUT. * But if you can attain to angle with one hair,— you shall have more rises, and catch more fish.”— IzAAK WALTON. THE material of which leaders and snells are composed is a mystery to many anglers. It is eminently fitted for the purposes mentioned, being as nearly invisible as any substance can well be, and at the same time is quite strong and impermeable to water. It is really the “ fluid silk” of the silk-worm (Bombyz mori), drawn out into a continuous length. This fluid silk, which in its natural state resembles colorless varnish, is contained in two long cylindrical sacs, many times the length of the worm, and which are capable of being un- folded by immersion in water, when the fluid silk can be drawn out into filaments, longer or shorter, coarse or fine, as may be desired. Most of the silk-worm gut is produced in Spain, and some in Italy. When the worm is about to spin its cocoon it is killed by being immersed in vinegar, which perhaps has also some effect on the viscid fluid in the sacs. These sacs are then stretched, the fluid being drawn out until the proper length is obtained, when the two ends are wound around pins driven into a frame. Afterward the adhering skin or membrane is stripped off, leaving the gut fibre white and glistening. It is then sorted according to thick- ness and quality and tied in bunches. The various grades are known to the trade by Spanish names. It has long been known that from the larve of several species of our native silk-worm moths, much longer strands SILK-Worm Gut. 217 of gut, for leaders, can be produced, than from the Chinese silk-worm ; but, while strands of satisfactory lengths have been frequently taken, there seems to be a want of some special knowledge, or a lack of some peculiar skill in the proper treatment or manipulation of the larve, or the silk- glands, or in the drawing out of the fluid silk, in order to produce the silken strands of the desired strength. Dr. Theodatus Garlick, one of the fathers of fish culture in the United States, stated that he had produced strands of from four to six feet in length from the cecropia moth (Platysamia cecropia), which was strong enough for salmon fishing. Among those who have been interested in the matter is Mr. Chas. F. Orvis, of Manchester, Vermont, who, having procured a number of cocoons of the two species of native silk-worms, Platysamia cecropia and Telea polyphemus, hatched and raised the larve very successfully. In an ar- ticle in “ Forest and Stream,” 1886, December 16, giving a history of his experience, Mr. Orvis says: “ We drew many strands from both varieties, each worm giving two strands, i. e., one from each sac. Before drawing, we put the worms in a dilute solution of acetic acid, or of weak vinegar, which seems to render it more tenacious. After leaving them for a few hours, they were taken out and drawn to their greatest length, as related in regard to the Chinese worm. The length was all that could be desired, for we obtained frem the cecropia strands over three yards (nine feet) long, and from the polyphemus strands nearly as long; and the color was perfection, i. e., deli- cately tinted either green or pale brown, according to the variety. But alas, our hopes were vain; for the next day, when they had dried, we found that they had but little strength compared with the product of the Chinese worm. It could hardly have been in the drawing, for we had previously drawn gut from the Chinese worm, proceeding in the same manner, and it was hard and strong. We drew many strands, but all with no better success.’ 218 Book oF THE Buack Bass. It is to be hoped that experiments in this direction will. continue to be made, until the native gut can be produced fully as strong as the best Spanish gut. If it can be done there is a fortune in it for somebody, for a leader in a single piece of from six to nine feet in length, and as strong as the Spanish gut, will bring a good price. An easy way to experiment in the matter would be to collect the fully grown larve just before they are ready to spin their cocoons, as they are quite plentiful in the central portions of the United States, especially in button-bush or water-sycamore swamps. In order to enable any one to identify the moths and their larve, the following good de- scriptions are abridged from C. H. Fernald (“Standard Natural History,” 8. E. Cassino & Co., Boston, 1884, vol. II, pp. 456-457) : The Cecropia silk-worm, Platysamia cecropia, which has a wide distribution in the United States, is one of our largest moths, expanding six inches or more. It has a most remarkable appetite, feeding on no less than fifty different species of plants, among which are the apple, plum, maple, elm, oak, beech, birch, willow, ete. The female lays from two to three hundred eggs, which are creamy white and striped with reddish, and hatch in eight or ten days. The young catterpillars are black, and change in color and size at each moult until mature, when they are three or four inches long, and of a pale green, or bluish- green color. The tubercles on the third and fourth seg- ments are coral red; the others on the back are yellow, ex- cept those on the second and last segments, which, with those along the sides, are blue; and all are more or less armed with black bristles. They construct elongated, coarse, dull brown cocoons. The wings of the moth are of a rich brown color, sprinkled with gray scales, with a large SinK-Wormu Gut. 219 kidney-shaped spot, shaded more or less with red, and mar- gined with black, near the middle of each wing. A red band, edged on the inside with white, crosses the wings near the middle. The outer edges of the wings are pale silky brown, through which runs an irregular black line on the fore wings, and a double broken band on the hind ones. The base of the fore wings is dull red, with a curved white and black line, and near their apex is a black eye-spot with a bluish crescent in it, and a shade of lilac above. The American silk-worm, Telea polyphemus, is our best native silk-producing species. Each female lays from two to three hundred eggs, which are about one-sixteenth of an inch in diameter, slightly convex on the top and bottom, the convex portions whitish, and the nearly cylindrical sides brown. These hatch in from ten to twelve days. The caterpillar feeds on the leaves of oak, elm, etc., and when full-grown is over three inches long, of a light-green color, with seven oblique yellow lines on each side, and the tuber- cles on the segments orange with a silvery spot on the middle. The last segment is bordered by a purplish brown V-shaped mark. It spins a whitish oval cocoon, which often falls to the ground, where the insect remains during the winter in the pupa state. Those especially interested are referred to the articles of Mr. Trouvelot, “American Naturalist,” 1867, for his expe- rience and methods of obtaining the silk, and in rear- ing the American silk-worms. Leavers, or Castine LINEs. . The silk-worm gut imported into the United States, and used for leaders and snells, is usually in short lengths of from twelve to fifteen inches. In forming leaders, these are knotted: together to the desired length. There are 220 Book oF THE Buack Bass. many grades of gut, and the angler will do well to remem- ber that the best is the cheapest. Black bass leaders should be six feet long, and composed of the best single Spanish silk-worm gut, sound and strong, hard and round. The gut lengths should be perfectly clear and sound, quite smooth, and without inequalities or rough places. The rod-end of the leader should be com- posed of a large-sized gut, the next length a trifle smaller, and so diminish by a gradual taper to the fly-end. The several lengths should be neatly and firmly knotted to- gether and the ends cut off closely. It should be remem- bered that it is necessary to soak and soften the ends of the gut-lengths previous to tying. Too much care can not be exercised in selecting the leader, for upon its soundness and excellence depend much of the pleasure and success of fly-fishing. It should be carefully examined in every inch of its length, and the knots closely inspected. The léader may be stained some suitable neutral tint; a slightly greenish, grayish, or smoky hue will answer. Strong green tea, diluted black ink, or a weak solution of indigo, make good stains. Anglers, now as ever, are continually theorizing and speculating as to the most suitable colors for leaders, in order to render them as little discernible to the fish as pos- sible. Many experiments to this end have been made by using aquaria, or glass tanks especially constructed, or by the experimenter putting his head beneath the surface of the water, in order to view the leader through the same medium as the fish. But the praiseworthy experiments to determine the color of leaders least visible to the fish, however commendable, are sure to end in disappointment; such, at least, has been my experience. Experiments to this end have been made S1LK-Worm Gout. 221 by practical anglers for many years with no other result than to show that the finer the gut the better, without reference to color. My own experiments in this direction have not been few, and I have demonstrated, to my own satisfaction at least, that any color of leader or snell will answer, from hyaline to black, though I confess that I was formerly partial to a slight bluish stain, or mist color, and perhaps without any well-defined reason, except that it ought to be least visible to the fish. But when we enter the province of speculation and .con- jecture, and try to see for the fish, or, in other words, to measure their visual capacity by our own, we are doomed to disappointment, though we bring to our aid all the known resources of the science of optics. The only way to experiment with profit, in this direc- tion, is to experiment with the fish themselves, otherwise our efforts will be like the play of Hamlet with the melan- choly Dane left out. The sense of sight in fishes is but little understood, as is, indeed, the anatomy of their visual organs, which fact precludes all analogous reasoning from our own standpoint, alone. I have satisfied myself, how- ever, that they see as well in their own element, perhaps better, than we in ours. That the color of the leader is not important is very evi- dent when we reflect that the boy with line of wrapping cord, red, white, or blue, or the angler with line of twisted strands of black sewing-silk, to which the hook is affixed without leader or snell, is as successful in taking trout or black bass with bait, as others with lines of the most ap- proved colors. Sharks do not hesitate to take the bait even with the huge hook and chain and swivel accompaniment, nor do codfish, and other marine fishes, refuse the bait be- cause of the large hooks, wire snells, or coarse white lines ; 229, Book oF THE Buiack Bass. yet it is to be presumed that their discernment is as acute as that of a brook trout. ‘As to leaders and snells in fly-fishing, I do not think it makes much difference, practically, as to their color. The greatest desideratum, it seems to me, is to have them as fine as possible, consistent with the strength required, and this is not much with a flexible rod, for the amount of strain exerted by a fish on the rod and tackle is very much less than is popularly supposed. Though any color may answer, I prefer lines and leaders of natural tints as being more in accordance with the eternal fitness of things. Al- though staining may not weaken the gut, it certainly can not add to its strength; it is best, therefore, I think, to use leaders and snells of unstained gut. As it is almost transparent, it is less likely to be seen than a stained leader. I have used, with success, snells and leaders of the finest silver suture wire, for trout and black bass, but, prac- tically, they are not pliable enough, and are too heavy. On the whole, then, I think we shall have to be content with our leaders and snells as we find them to-day, simply selecting those that are the finest, roundest, and most per- fect, remembering, meanwhile, that a sight of the angler himself is more fatal to successful fishing than a display of the coarsest leader, or of the most objectionable in color. Leaders are now made with loops for attaching the drop- per flies, and is by far the most preferable way. An-excel- lent mode of making the loop is as follows — and if the reader will refer to Fig. 11, on page 228, and its explana- tion on page 229, the matter will be made much clearer. In forming the usual knot for tying the gut lengths to- gether in making-a leader, the two ends are lapped about two inches in forming that knot; but to make the loop, lap about four inches, and double one strand back on itself, so SItK-Worm Gut. 223 that there will be then three strands (instead of two), pre- sented for tying, each about two inches long — two of the strands forming the loop; now tie the knot in the manner as shown in the illustration referred to, and draw tight. This will leave two short ends on one side of the knot, and a loop on the other; the former are to be clipped off short. This loop should point toward the reel end of the leader, or away from the stretcher fly, in order that the drop fly when attached may stand at a right angle to the leader, and thus prevent it becoming curled around it, when wet. A very good plan of making leaders is that used by some anglers, who tie the gut strands together in lengths of three feet, with loops at each end. Two of these lengths can be looped together for a six-foot leader. The flies can also be attached to these looped ends very easily. In this way a number of casts can be prepared, which may be used as found necessary. If the angler in using, say, a leader of six féet made in this way, with the stretcher and drop- per flies attached to the end loops of the lower three- _ feet length, it will readily be seen how easy it would be to change the cast by simply “ unlooping” the leader in the middle, and looping on another three-feet length — with flies already attached —as before. It will also be seen how easily a Jeader can be repaired in the same manner, by discarding the broken or frayed portion and replacing it with another three-feet length. In testing the strength of leaders for black bass fishing, the angler should be very careful not to apply a force or weight of more than two‘'or three pounds, which is really more than it will require in actual fishing, and is all the strain a leader can he put to without injury. Silk-worm gut.is always weakened when tested to the breaking point, or one of six or more pounds; thus, a leader that breaks: at 224 Book oF THE Buiack Bass. eight pounds at the first trial, will not be likely to sustain more than six pounds at the next, and still less at the third trial. But if a low test is applied, as suggested, a good leader will last until worn out, in actual fishing. There is really no necessity for testing a first-class leader, for black bass or trout fishing, when bought from a reputable maker. SNELLs, oR SNoops. For utility and convenience, hooks are tied on short pieces of gut, gimp, or sea-grass, called snells, or snoods. The best material for snells is silk-worm gut, as it is light, strong, and nearly invisible. It may be stained of a simi- lar color and in the same manner as the leader. The length of snells for black bass angling should be from three to fiveinches; and they should be composed of single, heavy gut, though they. may be made double if the gut is very light or fine. Unless eyed hooks are used, the tapered shank hook should be neatly and securely tied to the snell with waxed silk and varnished, and a loop formed on the other end of the snell for attaching to the reel line; the end of the gut should be softened and rendered pliable by soaking it in water before tying the loop. For fishing in waters where pike, pickerel, or pike-perch are numerous it may be advisable to substitute gimp of the smallest caliber for the gut snell, as the long and sharp teeth of those species would make short work of the deli- cate gut fibre by fraying or cutting it. If eyed hooks are used the snell has simply a loop tied at one end, leaving the other end to be affixed to the hook by a jam, or other, knot. Most black bass flies are now made with a short loop, or eye, of double gut, instead of being tied on snells of several Srtx-Worm Gut. 225 inches in length. This is much the best way. “They can be as easily looped on for stretchers, and by using separate snells looped at each end, they can be as readily attached for droppers. These separate snells should not be more than three or four inches long; and when the’ fly is tied directly to the snell, the latter should not exceed four inches in length-—three inches is really long enough. Short snells or droppers will stand out better from the leader than longer ones, and they fit the modern fly-books much better. The “eye” or loop of the fly may be formed of the smallest sized wire gimp, instead of gut, as it is stronger, and cannot become chafed or frayed. It will, however, increase the weight of the fly somewhat; but this will be no disadvantage in fly-fishing for black bass. Kwors. In angling, as in sailing, there is no accomplishment so necessary, or that proclaims the finished angler or sailor so well, as his ability to tie a good knot. The beginner should study the plate of “knots” thoroughly, and by practice learn to tie each and all of them readily and prop- erly. I have seen otherwise good anglers who could not tie a correct or graceful knot, and the knife was always brought into requisition to “untie” their clumsy efforts ; in this way their lines became shorter daily, and “ beauti- fully less.” There is always a right way and a wrong way to do every thing; and though a knot may seem an unimportant thing, it is really often a most vital one, many times caus- ing the angler to lose a good fish, and might result in the loss of his life to the sailor. The new hand will please remember that whatever is worth doing at all, is worth doing well. 15 226 Book oF THE BLACK Bass. Fig. 1 is the “ common ” knot for forming a loop at the end of a line, or snell. It has its uses. Fig. 2 is the best knot for tying such a loop; it looks a little intricate, but can be learned by practice, and once learned, will be a “ well-spring of pleasure.” Fig. 3 is a good and simple method of attaching the reel-line to the loop of the leader, or snell. It is the “ tiller-hitch,” or “ helm-knot,” so-called because it can be instantly cast off by a jerk on the end; being thus the safest hitch for the main-sheet in sailing. Fig. 4 is a more secure knot for attaching the end of the line to loop of leader, or snell; it makes a small and neat knot, and is easily untied. It is the “ becket-hitch,” with a small round knot in the end of the line to prevent its working loose. Fig. 5 is another method of fastening reel-line to loop of leader, or snell; it is a very safe and secure knot, and is a modification of the “reef-knot” (fig. 10). Fig. 6 is similar to fig. 5, with the end of line fastened on itself by a half-hitch ; it is very secure, but a little more difficult to untie than fig. 5. Tigs. 3, 4, 5, and 6 are all good knots for bending the line to loop of leader, or snell; they draw up close and snug, will not slip, and are easily loosened. The angler can take his choice, but he should never tie his line and leader together by the common knot (similar to fig. 1), or the square knot (fig. 10). The leader should always be provided with a loop in each end, neatly seized with good sewing silk, and varnished. In bait-fishing, a loop mav be formed on the end of the reel- line, by which it may be fastened to one ring of the swivel, when it is desired to pass the loop of the snell through the opposite ring. , Fig. 7 is the “single water-knot,” for tying lengths of SILK-WorM GUT. 227 gut together to form the leader; it consists of half-hitches at the ends of the gut lengths, which are formed around the opposing gut-lengths, as shown in the figure; this forms a sliding knot for securing the end of the snell of a drop-fly. Fig. 8 is the “ double water-knot ” for the same purpose as fig. 7; it is more secure, but not so neat, as double hitches are used in its construction, as plainly shown in the figure. Fig. 9 shows the method of fastening the snell of a dropper by the single or double water-knots. After the iwo parts of the water-knot are drawn tight, as shown in the figure, a round knot is made in the end of the snell of the fly, and is put through the open loop between the two halves of the water-knot, which latter are then drawn together close and snug, holding the snell tightly and securely. By using this mode of attaching droppers to the leader, they stand at right angles to it, and may be changed as often as desired, and with but little trouble, by | simply sliding the water-knots apart, taking out the snell of one fly and inserting another. The flies can not pull out, as might be supposed, for the strain and struggles of a fish only serve to make the knot draw more closely to- gether. This plan, however, is not much used now, nor are the water-knots; the more modern plan of using leaders and snells with loops, as described on page 223, having superseded them. Fig. 10 is the “ reef-knot,” or common square knot, and is a very safe and strong knot for many purposes; it never slips or jams, when properly tied, and is easily loosened ; but in tying this knot, if the second turn or hitch is not made exactly right, it forms a “ granny-knot,” than which there is no worse or more uncertain knot made,.and yet 228 Book oF THE Buack Bass. S1LK-Worm Gut. 229 nine persons out of ten tie a “ granny-knot.” The novice will do well to study this common knot, and learn to tie it correctly. It is sometimes used for tying the lengths of a leader, in which case, as also with the single water- knot, the ends should be cut off closely, and neatly whipped with fine sewing silk and varnished. Fig. 11 is the form of knot generally used by manufac- turers of leaders, or casting lines, for tying together the gut-lengths ;-it is a very simple knot to tie, though it looks somewhat difficult in the figure, and in the way that 1 have seen some attempt it, is a difficult knot. I have drawn the two lengths of different colors, one white, the other dark, so that the construction of the knot can be more easily seen. The ends of two gut-lengths are passed by one another, or in other words lapped, sufficiently to allow of their being tied by a single hitch and drawn tightly, just like tying a single knot in a double string (as in fig. 1). Usually the knot is made double by pass- ing the ends of the gut through twice, instead of but once, in tying; that is by simply tying what is known as a “ sur- geon’s knot” (for ligating arteries) with a double thread. The short ends are then trimmed off closely. If a leader is made with loops for attaching drop-flies, this is the best knot to use in making the leader itself, being, like fig. 10, secure and unyielding. _ Where knots like figs. 10 and 11 are used in construct- ing the leader, and no loops are provided for attaching droppers, the latter must be secured by a half-hitch, just above a knot in the leader, as shown in figs. 10 and 11, which is a very good plan. It must be borne in mind, that in tying lengths of gut together, or in tying loops or knots in gut-snells, the ends must first be soaked in water until quite soft and pliable; this must also be observed in bending or tying a hook on a gut-snell. 230 Book OF THE BLack Bass. CHAPTER XIII. HOOKS. “For in the Prophet Amos, mention is made of fish-hooks; and in the book of Job, which was long before the days of Amos, for that book is said to have been written by Moses, mention is made also of fish-hooks, which must imply anglers in those times.”— Izaak WALTON. : THE best fish-hooks are made in England, that country supplying the world with hooks of all sizes and styles, for all kinds of fishing. The town of Redditch has been famous for its fish-hooks for at least two centuries. There, are located the celebrated makers, Harrison, Hemming, Millward, Bartleet, Warrin, Bates, Alcock, and others, whose familiar names are almost synonymous with hooks and needles, both articles being usually made by the manu- facturers mentioned. There are fish-hooks and fish-hooks, and to the unin- itiated one hook is as good as another; all they can see in a hook, is the fact that it has a shank, a bend, and a bearded point. But to the angler this contracted view is not suffi- cient. There are many styles of shank, numerous forms of bend, and various ways of fashioning the barb and point, all of which are of the highest practical importance. Some hooks are made for general service, while others are formed exclusively for particular kinds of fish, or for special methods of angling. The fish-hook of to-day is not essentially different from that used by the ancient Greeks and Romans, to the casual observer; but to the practiced eye, the hooks now produced, for form, temper, and strength have never been equaled in the history of. the world. Hooks. 231 The form, quality, and general excellence of hooks, as now made, is the result of the competitive skill and great experience of the thanufacturers of Redditch, England, whose energies and resources have been directed in this peculiar channel for nearly two hundred years; and, as might be inferred, as between the hooks of the first-class makers, there is but little choice, so far as quality and workmanship are concerned. There is no implement of the craft that is so universally kept in stock at the small stores and shops throughout the country, as the fish-hook; and these hooks, as a rule, are of very inferior quality, as might be inferred when we take into consideration their cheapness, notwithstanding the fact that they must net the dealer at least fifty per cent. profit, or he would not sell them. While the average angler is inclined to use heavier rods, and stronger lines, than are actually necessary, he does not seem to be so much impressed with the importance of strength in a fish-hook, but accepts those of the small dealers mentioned, with the blind faith that a hook is a hook, and that one is as strong as another, if of the same sized wire; and, moreover, he recognizes but two forms of hooks, the Kirby, or side-bend, and the straight, or more or less rounding-bend. Now there are no fallacies so great as these, for the hook is of the most vital importance to the angler, and he should obtain the very best to be had, both in form and quality. Fish-hooks, in themselves, being of so comparatively small a price, it is the most insane idea of economy to purchase any but those of the very best quality. The most approved form of bend and barb, should also be taken into serious consideration. The highest grades of English hooks, like English gun- 232 Book OF THE Buack Bass. barrels, are thoroughly tested by causing them to sustain a strain, twice or thrice as great as they are usually put to in actual service, and the extra care and manipulation, and the superior stock used in the construction of such hooks, make their cost somewhat higher; but this extra amount is money well expended, for the angler can rely upon them with the utmost confidence, provided they are the product of the best makers; there is but one thing left to decide his choice among such hooks, viz., the peculiar bend or form given to the hook, of which there are several that are good enough. I might add, that all first-class hooks are japanned, or bronzed, and that a blued hook is always of an inferior quality. The most approved hooks for black bass, are the Sproat, O’Shaughnessy, Dublin Limerick, Cork-shape Limerick, round bend Carlisle, or Aberdeen, and hollow point Lim- erick; they are best in the order named. As regards the shape and bend of a hook, my first choice for black bass angling is the “ Sproat bend,” and the next best form, in my opinion, is the “ O’Shaughnessy.” In general form and bend the two hooks are identical, but their difference consists in the form of barb, and direction of the point. In the latter peculiarities, the Sproat is fashioned after true scientific principles, being a central- draught hook; that is, the short, squarish, or somewhat angular barb, terminates in an abrupt point, which, if con- tinued upward, would intersect a line drawn from the extremity of the shank and continuous with it. In other words, the direction of the point of the hook is toward the end of the shank. When the Sproat hook is tied on a snell, and the point of the hook is held against the ball of the thumb, and traction made on the snell, the direction of the point of Hooks. 233 the hook is on the same plane, or in the same direction or axis as the line of the snell, thus constituting what is termed a central-draught fish-hook. The wire of the Sproat is a trifle smaller than the O’Shaughnessy, which is another advantage. The latter hook has a long and somewhat hollow point, which is curved outward. The Sproat bend I regard as the very best hook manufac- tured. I first commenced its use thirty-five years ago. Its appearance is somewhat against it, but it is like “a singed cat.” By the side of a delicate, blued, gracefully-shaped Aberdeen, it looks black, and rather clumsy, with its short barb and peculiar bend, but it means “ business.” Its tem- per is just right, and when you strike a fish it goes right through any part of the mouth, never springing out, and never disappointing you. I have had the Aberdeen so soft as to completely straighten and pull out, and so brittle as to break like a pipe stem, but the Sproat has yet to fail me. For staying qualities it is perfection itself. The “ Dublin bend,” or Dublin Limerick, as it is some- times called, and the “ Dublin Limerick forged,” are excel- lent hooks, and are identical in form and bend with the O’Shaughnessy hook, the only difference consisting in the caliber of the wire, which, in the latter, is a trifle heavier. The forged Dublin Limerick has the wire flattened by ham- mering or forging; it is a remarkably strong hook. The “ Cork-shape Limerick ” has an almost round bend, with a straight shank, and a long straight point, which is parallel with the shank in its direction, and a very good hook, being of rather smaller wire than the Sproat. The “ Carlisle ” hooks are made of very small wire, and are very delicate and attractive to the eye, but for black bass fishing I do not admire them, though, until I came across the Sproat hook, I used the round bend Carlisle 234 Book oF THE BLAcK Bass. 3 1 4 5 ie, 3 VK A\ ; 9 10 11 1a 13 14 1. Triple hook. 2. Lip hook. 4 Double fly-hook. 4. Dublin bend. 5. O'Shaughnessy. 6. Chestertown. 7. Limerick. 8. Cork shape. 9. Sproat. 10. Aberdeen. 11. Kirby Carlisle. 12. Gravitation. 13. Kinsey. 14. Snec d. Hooks. 235 (Aberdeen) altogether. Still, many anglers prefer them on account of the small wire, which is not so apt to injure the minnow ; but I might say here, that if a minnow is put on with care, it need not be injured to a greater extent, even with the forged Dublin bend hook, than with the Carlisle. The round-bend Carlisle, or Aberdeen hook, . has a perfectly round bend, and a long straight shank; the barb is long, with the point curving outward. The “hollow point Limerick” is a very old form of hook, and is still a great favorite with many, notably the veterans of the angle, whose experience with this hook dates back to the heyday of youth. The form of the Lim- erick is well known; it has a straight shank, and a very abrupt bend, with a long, straight, and hollow point. The Kirby Carlisle, the Kirby Limerick, and, in fact, any hook with the “ Kirby ” or side-bend I can not recom- mend for any kind of angling. It is the worst possible crook that can be given to a fish-hook, being both unscien- tific and impracticable. The needle-pointed, or hook without a beard or barb, — has been recommended for fly-fishing, but it will not an- swer for the black bass. So long as the fish remains in the water, and a proper tension of line is maintained by the angler, it holds as well as any other hook, but when the fish leaps from the water in its struggles to free itself, like the black bass, there is a great liability of its shaking out such a hook. Artificial flies, tied on extremely small barbless and needle-pointed hooks with a circular bend, have been used in Japan for centuries, and while such hooks may do for the brook trout, and fishes closely allied to it in habits, they are totally unsuitable for the black bass, or any fish that makes such desperate efforts to get away, when hooked. 236 Book oF THE Buack Bass. SPROAT BEND, O'SHAUGHNESSY. ABERDEEN. uu *% % Hooks. 237 The Edgar patent barbless hook, furnished by William Mills & Son, is made upon a very different principle. This hook, while having no barb, has a “keeper” which securely holds the fish after it is hooked, rendering it almost impossible for it to escape, even with a slack line. It is the only “ patent” fish-hook that has any real merit, though it seems to me like taking too much advantage of a fish, and is likely to foster and encourage a careless and shiftless style of angling. Still, it may become quite a favorite hook with many. To my mind the great charm of angling consists in using a proper judgment (born of a thorough knowledge of the fish and its habits) in present- ing the bait, and the exercise of skill and science in hook- ing, playing, and landing it. Mills & Son have applied for a patent on a new form of barbless hook. At the bend of the hook the wire is turned on itself, forming a loop, and then continued up to the point. This loop answers the same purpose as the keeper of the Edgar hook. It has also a vertical eye. Recently the old “ eyed” hook has been revived in Eng- land for artificial flies, but with this difference: the old- fashioned form had the eye vertical, that is, on the same plane with the shank, while the improved cye is either turned up or turned down; though some prefer it turned up, the turned down eye is deemed the best form. Through this eye the snell is passed and fastened by one of several knots'or hitches, each of which has its advocates. But the black bass fisher need not worry his brain as to whether the eye should be turned up or down, nor fret his soul as to the particular knot or hitch by which to attach the snell; for the plan of making the eye of gut or gimp in bass flies is really to be preferred to any form of eyed hook, as the loop of the snell can be readily passed through 238 Book OF THE BLack Bass. the small gut loop at the head of the fly, and over the lat- ter, and then drawn tight, making a very neat and secure attachment — neater and more secure than by any form of eyed hook with knotted snell. The eye of the new hook is so small that, except in large sizes, a doubled gut can not be passed through it, consequently it must be fastened by a single gut with some sort of knot. It is best suited for the very small hooks, on which the trout flies of England are usually tied, and for the very finely drawn, or gossa- mer gut, of which the snells are made. i) 2 >. z The eyed hook is. however. gradually coming into vogue, especially for small trout flies, and to some extent for small bass flies. The Pennell turned-up eye seems to be the favorite, though the Hall turned-down eye is perhaps as good, at least so far as the form of the eye is concerned. I have found a lack of uniformity in the size and form of the eye in both hooks, and in many the eye is not smoothly finished. Heretofore the eyed hooks have all been of the Limerick pattern, but lately thev are being made with the Sproat bend, which is better adapted for small bass flies. There are several kinds of knots used for fastening the Hooks. 239 snell to the eyed hook, which are shown in the accompany- ing illustrations, and which explain themselves. The sim- plest jam knot is as good or better than the more compli- cated ones. a SS OC A needle-eyed hook has also been introduced by Warner that has the eye formed near the end of the shank, much the same as in a sewing needle. With the advent of the eyed hook came a change in the system of numbering them styled the Kendal scale, which is the reverse of the one heretofore universally used — the Redditch scale. Concerning this the late Mr. 8. Alcock has this to say: “Tn Redditch we number from 1 to 20, the size becoming smaller the higher the number, in the same way that the wire is numbered. This is logical, for the finer the wire the more frequently must it be drawn through the plates to reduce it. The sizes larger than No. 1 we number 0, 00, 000, ete. This system has worked well for centuries. “Now, however, a manufacturer employing a very few hands chooses to number his hooks backward, 20 being a large size and 1 a smaller size; those smaller than No. 1 he calls 0, 00, 000, ete.; and Mr. Pennell has written a book in which he adopts this num- bering; but the only reason given for this new system is that ‘ it is sufficiently elastic, allowing of extension either way.’ ” 240 Book OF THE BLAcK Bass. As the hooks that are most in vogue in the United States, as the Sproat, O’Shaughnessy, Carlisle, Aberdeen, Dublin bend, and hollow-point Limerick, are all numbered accord- ing to the Redditch system, and agree very closely in all the sizes, it would be in the nature of a calamity to change it for the Kendal or any other system. SNELLING Hooks. It has been recommended, in tying gut snells to hooks, to heat the shank of the hook and coat it with rubber or other cement, or wax, and to soften the gut by soaking, or to crimp it by biting with the teeth or pinching it with pliers; but let me caution the tyro, and advise him to do nothing of the kind. It destroys the temper of a hook to heat it, and burns off the protective coating; it breaks the fiber of the gut to bite or crimp it; and when the gut is expanded by soaking and tied on, it shrinks upon drying, and leaves the wrapping loose. The best way to tie a gut snell to a hook is to use noth- ing but well-waxed silk thread, and to wrap evenly and tightly. If properly done it will never pull off. Rubber cement loses its life after a time, becoming brittle, and rots the silk wrapping; and so will all cements, sooner or later, from constant wetting and drying. At the best, if they do no good they may do harm, and it is folly to use them when they can better be dispensed with. In tying a hook to gut, use the best sewing silk — the finest for very small hooks and coarser for larger ones; use red shades as they seem to be stronger, and the color is suitable. The silk must be well-waxed, and there is noth- ing better for the purpose than the best light-colored shoe- maker’s wax, which can be folded in a piece of soft leather to prevent soiling one’s fingers. Hooks. 241 Some writers advise laying the gut on the back of the shank, but it is much better and more proper to place it on the front or inside of the shank. When it is on the back the direction of the traction and the strain is away from the end of the shank, and has a tendency to stretch or loosen the wrapping at that point; while with the gut in front of the shank this is obviated, as can be easily demon- strated, by placing the point of the hook against the ball of the thumb and making traction on the snell. Now, then, to tie a tapered hook to gut, proceed as fol- lows: First wax the silk well; then take the hook between the thumb and forefinger of the left-hand (if you are right- handed), with the end of the shank to the right, and the barb uppermost; beginning at about the middle of the shank make several spiral turns of the silk to within one- thirty-second of an inch of the tapered point, then lay the gut along the inside of the shank for half its length, for small and medium-sized hooks, or one-third for large hooks, and begin wrapping the silk around the gut and shank, and wrap firmly, evenly and closely down toward the bend of the hook, using as much strain in wrapping as the silk will bear, and continue the wrapping for a short distance, or six or eight turns, below the end of the gut. Begin the wrapping just below the end of the shank, leaving its tip bare, and finish the wrapping with the invisible knot. The invisible knot is formed in two ways: one by revers- ing the hook in the fingers of the left hand, so that the shank points to the left, and laying the silk along the shank with its end beyond the end of the shank, leaving a loop of the silk to continue the wrapping, around the shank, gut and silk, passing the loop over and around the bend of the hook at each turn, until four or five turns are made, and then drawing the silk back by its end, through the turns, 16 242 Book oF THE Buack Bass. drawing tightly, and clipping off the end closely. It is more easily done than described. Another way of making the invisible knot, or rather a different way of doing the same thing, is to lay a doubled thread of finer (unwaxed) silk along the wrapping, its loop being toward the bend of the hook, and include this doubled thread in the last four or five turns around the shank and gut, but not wrapping quite so firmly as before, and then pass the end of the wrapping silk through the loop, by means of which the wrapping thread is pulled back and out under these last turns, and after drawing snugly and tightly the end is to be closely clipped off. When the wrapping is completed, it is to be well coated with shellac varnish by means of a camel’s hair pencil. ARTIFICIAL FLrzs. 243 CHAPTER XIV. ARTIFICIAL FLIES. “You are to note, that there are twelve kinds of artificial-made flies, to angle with upon the top of the water.’— Izaak WaLton. Fiy-Fisuine and the art of making artificial flies dates back at least to the ancient Greeks and Romans. During the palmy days of the Roman Empire, the rod, line, hook, and artificial fly were well known. Noél de la Moriniére tells us that the lines were generally made of horsehair, single, double, and plaited; and according to Allianus the hair was colored in different ways. The fishing-rod was chosen with reference to the supposed weight of the fish fo be caught, and the resistance it could offer. The hooks were of copper or iron, and coated with tin.. The art of making flies of feathers and other materials has, perhaps, been carried not much further in our own time. It is pos- sible that the national love for fly-fishing was introduced into Britain by the Romans. It is with some degree of trepidation that I approach the subject of artificial flies, for I am afraid that I hold some gery heretical notions on the subject. But of one fact I am positively convinced, and that is, that there is a good deal of humbug in this matter, as evidenced in the many fine-spun theories and hair-splitting arguments that are advocated and advanced (pertaining to the construction and use of artificial flies) by some anglers, but which theo- ‘ries do not hold good in practice. In England, more especially, do anglers proceed to ex- tremes as theorists in the matter of artificial flies for trout fishing. They seem to be divided, principally, into “ col- 244 Book OF THE BLack Bass. orists,” or those who think color of paramount importance to form, and “ formalists,” or “ entomologists,” who main- tain that form.is every thing, and profess to imitate the natural fly, in its proper season, in every particular of form and tinting. But there is no evidence that one class is more successful than the other, as anglers. On the other hand are the followers of Mr. Pennell’s system, or plan, who confine themselves to three “typical” flies — green, brown, and yellow “hackles” — and claim that they are sufficient for all practical purposes, and can be made avail- able for different waters and seasons by increasing or di- minishing the size of the flies, as circumstances seem to demand. While the adherents to this latter theory are fully as successful, from all accounts, as those who have a list of nearly a thousand named flies to choose from, and enjoy the satisfaction of having reduced the perplexing matter to a delightful simplicity, and of obviating the troubles of a repeated changing of the cast of flies as prac- ticed by others, they must sometimes feel a regret deep in their hearts for casting down and sweeping away their idols and cherished traditions, and to a certain extent the poetry of fly-fishing, by their iconoclastic though sensible opinions and practices. Where fish are plentiful and in a “ biting eae almost any fly, be it never so rudely tied, and of the least possible resemblance to any thing in the insect creation, will be successful, even if clumsily cast; on the contrary, there are times when the best-made flies, cast by the most skillful artists, are necessary to induce a rise. Between these ex- tremes must we look for rules for our general guidance, and without occupying further space with arguments, pro and con, it will be sufficient to say that there are certain general rules which apply to the character of the fly to be used at certain times, and which rules are the result of, and ARTIFICIAL FLIES. 245 founded upon, the experience and observations of fly-fish- ers for many generations past. These rules, so far as they apply to black bass fly-fishing, are few and simple: 1. Flies should be small, rather than large, the average trout fly being usually large enough. ' 2. On bright days, and with clear, low, or fine water, flies should be quite small, and of subdued. dark, or neutral tints. 3. For cloudy days, and high, turbid, or rough water, larger and brighter flies should be used. 4. For very dark days, or from sunset until dark, or on moonlight evenings, gray or whitish flies, of good size, should be employed. I shall not go into an entomological description of flies and their counterfeits, for it is neither requisite nor advis- able, so far as bass flies are concerned. For those who feel an interest in this subject, however, I can recommend the several fine works published in England on the con- struction of trout and salmon flies; among the best of which are Ronald’s “ Fly-Fisher’s Entomology,” and Pen- nell’s “ Modern Practical Angler.” The best book, how- ever, ever written on the subject, and the one most useful to the American angler, is “ Favorite Flies and their His- tories,” by Mary Orvis Marbury. I will merely state that the majority of artificial flies are of two kinds, and are intended to represent the perfect winged insects of certain orders, and the larve of others; thus, most trout flies are the pretended imitations of some of the species of the orders Diptera and Neuroptera, the former comprising the two-winged insects, as the gnats, mosquitoes, midges, etc., and the latter the four-winged insects, as the May-flies, dragon-flies, etc. The larval form of fly is supposed to represent a caterpillar, and is 246 Book OF THE BLACK Bass. called a “hackle,” or, more correctly, a “palmer.” It must be borne in mind in this connection that an artificial fly, when wet, presents a much different appearance from the same fly when dry, and our flies should be tied with teference to this contingency. The term “ hackle” is likely to cause some confusion in the mind of the new hand, if not explained, for it is sus- ceptible of several meanings as used by anglers and fly- tyers. The proper meaning of the word is a “ feather ” from the neck or saddle of the cock, and known as a “neck-hackle,” or a “saddle-hackle,” as the case may be. These hackle-feathers are used to imitate the legs or feet of an artificial fly; and as one variety of fly consists only of a body with a hackle wound spirally around this body, from one end to the other, this form of fly has come to be known, in this country at least. as “a hackle,” though, as stated. before, the proper name is “ palmer,” and it is de- signed to imitate a caterpillar, for it is only a body bristling with “legs.” Then there is the “ hackle-fly,” which is a fly with body and, perhaps, a tail, and in addition a hackle-feather tied on at the shoulder, to represent the legs. Some salmon flies have, in addition to wings, tail and feelers, the entire body wound with a hackle, like a palmer. This is known as a “ combination-fly,” and, like all salmon flies, does not pretend to imitate any thing in nature. The conventional “ fly,” or, properly, the winged fly, is the one most generally used. In addition to a body, legs and tail, it has a pair or two of wings, tied on in various positions, flat, cocked, split, ete. It is not my intention to give any instruction in the art of fly-tying, nor do I deem it at all expedient, for it is an art that can not be taught by written directions, without the aid of explanatory cuts and diagrams, and even then ARTIFICIAL FLIES. 247 in but a moderate degree. The best way for one to ob- tain an insight into the mysteries of the art, is to care- fully dissect and take apart the flies of the best makers, for in the taking apart one can acquire more or less of the modus operandi of the putting together. The most approved hooks for bass-flies are the Sproat, O’Shaughnessy, Dublin Limerick, Cork Shape Limerick,. and hollow point Limerick. I consider them best in the order named, though the O’Shaughnessy is thought by many to be the best. It is the same in all respects as the Dublin Limerick, except that it is a little heavier in wire, and it differs from the Sproat only in the barb, the latter having a shorter barb, with the point straight, or pointing toward the extreme end of the shank, forming a true central-draught hook. The barb of the O’Shaughnessy is a little longer, and the point is turned slightly outward. But any of these hooks will give good satisfaction. The most suitable sizes, for bass flies are Nos. 2, 3, 4 and 5, the last being the smallest that should be used under ordinary circumstances, though, for the smallest flies, Nos. 6 and 7 may be employed. These numbers apply to all of the hooks named above. Flies may be tied on a silk-worm gut snell several inches in length, or may have simply a small, short gut- loop. Those with loops can be used as “stretchers” or tail flies; but when used as “ droppers” or bob flies, they must be attached to the leader by a short length of gut, say three or four inches long. Many trout flies are used, as stated, and with good effect in black bass fishing, for really the form and color of the fly does not seem to make much difference with the bass; he does not seem so “ fastidious,” as it is termed, in his choice of flies. Most of the “general” trout flies are taken as patterns for bass flies, as the coachmen, professor, 248 Book OF THE BLACK Bass. soldier, grizzly king, Montreal, queen of the water, king of the water, etc., and all of the “ hackles.” As every angler will become partial, sooner or later, to certain flies, and adopt them as favorites to the exclusion of others, I deem it unnecessary to allude to but few, ex- cept in a general way; and those that I shall particularize are such as I have used many times with most gratifying results. I have had more uniform success, day in and day out, with the black, brown, red, yellow, and gray hackles, than with the winged flies; though some of the latter I have employed with excellent success for high or rough waters, and those with light-colored or white wings can not be surpassed for twilight fishing, or for very gloomy days. There are flies and flies. Nearly every angler has his favorities, both in general and special flies. Very often the preference is purely fanciful, but it is a pardonable weak- ness, to which we are all more or less prone; and then it can not do much harm, for I believe that, in most instances, we are more choice in the matter than the fish themselves. The facts are, as before stated, that, when fish are rising freely, almost any fly will kill; but when they are shy and diffident, it is only flies of certain colors, or combinations of colors, and skillfully cast, that seem to induce a rise. Perhaps, after all, it is the manner of offering, rather than its peculiar features, that renders a particular fly more killing than others at certain times. But that there are some flies that are more generally and uniformly killing, day in and day out, on various waters, is a fact proved by practical experience, and generally admit- ted by fly-fishers. Among these are notably the coachman, grizzly king, professor, Montreal and the several hackles. These were all originally trout flies, but they answer as good a purpose for the black bass when made of the proper ARTIFICIAL FLIES. 249 size, which is not much larger, if any, than the ordinary trout fly. ; We really do not know, exactly, what color or combina- tion of colors, or just what form or size, they prefer. Some- times they will take any thing made of feathers, tinsel, silk, or wool, or a bit of rag, and of any known color; at other times they will notice only certain colors or sizes, and at still other times they will rise to nothing in the semblance of an artificial fly. Then, again, a fly or flies that are kill- ing on some waters are comparatively useless on others. If we knew the “ particular vanity” of the black bass in color or colors, or if he is color-blind, just what form or size is most tempting, we should have an easy task. Ex- perience and observation teach us, however, that the black bass, like most other game-fishes, seems to have a penchant for red, yellow, brown and black, and at times gray and green, and many artificial flies embody one or more of these colors in their construction, and they are usually killing flies. Perhaps this can be better shown in the following table, where the predominating colors of body, wings and hackle are readily seen: NAME OF FLY. Body. Wings. Hackle. Montreal . Red Brown. Red Red Gray. Red Red Gray. Red. Red Gra; Red Red Red. Red Yellow. Black Black Oconomowoc ........... Yellow Brown Dun ueen of the Water.... -.| Yellow, Gray. Red. OfESSOY .... see eee eee ..| Yellow. Gray. Brown. Ferguson. .-| Yellow, Brown Green. (0700) (er cas .-) Black. Yellow. Black. Grizzly King.........- ..| Green. Gray. Gra Seth Green ........... Green. Brown. Re Coachman ...........+ Har]. White. Brown Henshall...... Harl. Gray. White. White Miller. . --| White. te. White. Gray Drake......... .-| Gray. Gray. White. 250 Book OF THE Biack Bass. The foregoing list embraces all of the flies that I use in black bass fishing, except the red, black, brown, gray, and yellow hackles. The last four in the table are especially useful on dark days, or toward evening. Most of the flies in the table are general favorites, and in my own hands have all proved very killing. I merely mention them, to the exclusion of others, as a general guide, for each angler will soon adopt a few flies for his own fishing, none of which may have been mentioned above, but he will nevertheless continue to use them, and swear by them on all occasions; and this is one of the glorious privileges of the art of angling. As a father naturally thinks his own children the best, smartest, and handsomest, I may be pardoned for placing in the above list — and strongly recommending as general flies — my polka, oriole, Oconomowoc, and Henshall, leav- ing to others the praise or condemnation due them. The formulas for their construction are as follows: Polka.— Body, scarlet, with gold twist; hackle, red; wings, black with white spots (guinea fowl) ; tail. brown and white, mixed. Oriole-— Body, black, with gold tinsel; hackle, black; wings, orange or yellow; tail, black and yellow, mixed. Oconomowoc.— Body, creamy-yellow ; hackle, white and dun (hairs from deer’s tail) ; tail, ginger; wings, cinnamon (woodcock). Henshall.—Body, peacock harl; hackle, white hairs from deer’s tail; wings, gray (dove) ; tail, two fibers (green) from peacock’s tail-feather. The Lord Baltimore fly originated with Prof. Alfred M. Mayer, of the Stevens Institute of Technology, Hoboken, New Jersey. Its formula is as follows: Lord Baltimore.— Body, orange ; hackle, tail and wings, black, with small upper wings of jungle-cock. ARTIFICIAL FLIEs. 251 Professor Mayer and I, being natives of Baltimore, and knowing that black and yellow formed a good and taking combination in an artificial fly, each designed, unknown to the other, a fly to embody these colors; and as they are the heraldic colors of the State of Maryland, and were the heraldic colors of Lord Baltimore, Professor Mayer aptly named his trout fly, “ Lord Baltimore ;” while I designated my black bass fly, the “oriole,” from the Baltimore oriole, or hanging bird, which beautiful songster was named in honor of Lord Baltimore, as its colors were the samé as his own — black and orange. The following fly is one of my own designs, and at times is very killing. It is constructed entirely of metallic colors, and I give its formula in order that any one feeling an interest in it may try it: Golden Dustman.—Body, bronze (peacock harl) ; hackle, golden yellow; wings, bronze (wild turkey); tail, fibers from the crest of golden pheasant. Abbey & Imbrie have patented and manufacture what they call the “ fluttering fly.” It is made in the same patterns and in the same manner as the conventional fly, except that the hook is reversed; that is, the tail of the fly is at the end of the shank, while the head is near the bend of the hook, or opposite to the point. Some of the best flies for black bass that I have seen are tied by George H. Burtis, Worcester, Mass. He uses the best material to be obtained, and his flies are at once artistic, beautiful and practical. Charles F. Orvis has long been favorably known for his excellent bass flies, and he sustains his well-earned reputa- tion for careful and superior work, and is indorsed by hundreds of our best anglers. The following is a list of flies that have been employed 252 Book OF THE Buack Bass. for bass fishing, and their construction does not differ much from that described by John Gay two centuries ago: “To frame the little animal, provide All the gay hues that wait on female pride; Let nature guide thee. Sometimes golden wire The shining bellies of the fly require; The peacock’s plumes thy tackle must not fail, Nor the dear purchase of the sable’s tail. Each gaudy bird some slender tribute brings, And lends the growing insect proper wings: Silks of all colors must their aid impart, And every fur promote the fisher’s art.” Professor.— Body, yellow; hackle (legs), golden brown} tail, scarlet ibis; wings, yellow, mottled. Queen of the Water.— Body, dark yellow, gold tinsel; hackle, red; -wings, mallard, mottled. Grizzly King— Body, green; hackle, gray; tail, red; wings, pin-tail duck or mallard. Soldier.— Body, scarlet; hackle, red; wings, gray. Montreal— Body, red; hackle, scarlet; wings, wild turkey. Governor Alvord.— Body, peacock harl; hackle, red; tail, red ibis; under wings, brown, upper wings, drab. Seth Green.—.Body, green, with yellow stripe; hackle, red; wings, brown (woodcock). Abbey.— Body, scarlet, gold twist; hackle, red; tail, golden pheasant ; wings, pin-tail duck. Ferguson.— Body, yellow, gold twist; hackle, green; tail, peacock, yellow and scarlet ; wings, vellow and scarlet, and wild turkey. Kingdom.— Body, white, striped with green; hackle, ted; wings, woodcock (brown). ARTIFICIAL FLIES. 253 Gold Spinner.— Body, orange, gold tinsel; hackle, light red; wings, gray. Captain.— Body, gray, and peacock harl; hackle, red; tail, scarlet, green and wood-duck ; wings, gray. Ibis.— Body, scarlet mohair, silver twist; tail, hackle, and wings of the red ibis. The following flies are also good ones, some being great favorites with certain anglers: Reuben Wood.— Body, white, with red head; hackle, brown; wings and tail, rayed feathers of mallard. Dr. Fowler.— Body, white; tail, scarlet; hackle, scarlet and white; wings, red ibis and white. Green Drake.— Body, white, ribbed with black; hackle, ginger; tail, dark; wings, mottled green and yellow. Gray Drake— Body, dark gray; hackle, gray; tail, dark; wings, gray (mallard). Brown Drake.—Body, golden brown; hackle, brown ; tail, dark brown; wings, golden brown. Holberton.— Body, orange, gold tinsel; hackle, peacock harl and scarlet; tail, wood-duck and scarlet; under wings, red ibis and yellow; upper wings, peacock and wood-duck. Shoemaker.— Body, alternate rings of salmon and gray; hackle, light red; tail, wood-duck; wings, mallard (gray). Superior.— Body, dark claret; hackle, brown; tail, blue macaw; wings, wild turkey. General Hooker.— Body, alternate yellow and green tings; hackle, red; tail, wood-duck; wings, tail feathers of ruffed grouse. Quaker.— Body, gray; hackle, yellow; wings, horned owl’s wing. King of the Water.— Body, scarlet, gold tinsel ; hackle, ted; wings, bright mottled, mallard. 254 Book oF THE Buiack Bass. No. 1. Polka, No. 2. Coachman. -No. 3. Hackle. No. 4. Bumble Bee. No. 5. Abbey. No. 6. Grizzly King. ARTIFICIAL FLIEs. 255 McLeod.— Body, emerald green, with gold twist; tag, yellow and red floss; wings, dark mottled brown; tail, green drake, with red ibis and mottled yellow; hackle, yellow; antenne or feelers, scarlet. Imperial.— Body, red, with silver twist; tag, silver; tail (whisk), red and white; hackle, black and white; wings, large, grayish white, bordered with black; feelers, scarlet. Green and Gold.— Body, emerald green, gold twist; tag, scarlet; tail, white and read; hackle, yellow; wings, olive green. La Belle— Body, pearly blue, silver twist; tag, red and gold; hackle, blue; wings, pure white; tail, red and white. Royal Coachman.— Body, scarlet, and peacock har! ; tail, pin-tail duck; hackle, brown; wings, white. — The White Moths, or Millers, are excellent flies for moon- light evenings, or at dusk. They may be pure white, or all white with yellow body, or all white with gray wings. The bodies should be made full and fluffy. The hackles and palmers are made with-bodies of vari- ous hues, as black, green, red, or yellow, or peacock harl, with either black, red, brown, yellow or gray legs. A pure white hackle is very killing about dark. A most excellent hackle is made from the -hairs of a deer’s tail, somewhat in the fashion of the “ bob,” so extensively used in Florida and Texas. The three “typical” hackles of Mr. H. Cholmondely- Pennell, and which he recommends to the exclusion of all other flies, are described as follows: Green.— Dark green body; very dark green hackle for both legs and whisk. Brown.— Body, dark orange; fiery or cinnamon-brown hackle for legs and whisk. 256 Book OF THE BuLack Bass. Yellow— Body, golden yellow; darkish golden-olive ‘hackle for legs and whisk. As I have described quite enough for the beginner, and, perhaps, too many, I will only allude to some by name, which may often be found equal to the above, and, for some waters, superior: Bumble bee, jungle cock, Hoskins, California, moose- head, widow, academy, blue jay, Page, yellow sally, blue and drab, pheasant, raven, claret, tippulium, Davis, Tan- ner, white and green, motley, premier, black and tan, black and gold, purple bass, fire-fly, little egg, gray coflin, brown coflin, sand-fly, stone-fly, hawthorn, dark mackerel, etc. It will be seen that the angler has quite an extensive list to choose from, for most of the flies named are kept in stock by our best dealers. As a rule, the smallest bass flies should be selected for general fishing; and those of. subdued tints will be found the most successful, saving on the exceptional occasions already referred to. As has been mentioned, most of the flies named are patterned after trout flies of the same names; and, while some of the latter are large enough, quite a number are too small, and must be enlarged somewhat for bass flies. But there are flies, and enough, to suit those of every taste, even should the angler be so fastidious and dainty as “Ye Sunberry Fisher,” as described by “ Punch:” “Ye Sunberrye fysher has flies of all feathers, For all sorts of seasons, in all sorts of weathers. Flies when ye Springtide is blustrie and showerie, Flies when ye Summer is grassie and bowerie, Flies when ye Autumn is golden and grainie, For hot weather, cold weather, mistie, or rainie. Red-spinner, palmer, black peacock and gray, Yellow dun, golden dun, March brown, and May, Sand-fly and stone-fly, and alder and gnat, Black midge and marlow bug — all round his hat.” ARTIFICIAL FLIEs. 259 The Japanese are, perhaps, the most artistic and expert fly-tyers in the world. Some of their creations in this line ure indeed marvelous. They excel particularly in the smallest flies, which have short, plump bodies, and hackles that stand nearly at right angles to the body. They are mostly red, brown, black and gray, are tied on needle- pointed, barbless hooks, and with a minute gilt head; they are remarkably life-like when cast on the water. They also tie flies on barbed hooks, and with wings, but mostly for export. At the Chicago Columbian-Exposition I was much im- pressed with the display of artificial flies in the Japanese exhibit in my department. One day, as I was judging their exhibit of fishing tackle, accompanied by the members of the jury of award and a number of Japanese officials, I called their attention to a case of artificial flies that were tied in bunches and hung in front of the exhibit. The case was open to inspection at all times, not being covered with glass. I remarked: “ Now, here are some flies that are very life-like. They look as if one could squeeze the juice out of them; as if they might take wing and fly away.” At that I lifted up a bunch with my lead-pencil, when, lo and behold, one flew out from the bunch, balanced itself on its wings a moment, and then took an upward flight, disappearing in the sky- light of the building. My auditors stood open-mouthed with astonishment, thinking, doubtless, that I had per- formed some trick of legerdemain. I was startled for a moment, myself, until I saw that it was a moth that had been having a feast of feathers while hiding behind the bunch of flies. 17 208 Book oF THE BLacK Bass. CHAPTER XV. ARTIFICIAL BAITS. “And therefore I have, which I will show to you, an artificial minnow that will catch trout as well as an artificial fly; and it was made by a handsome woman that had a fine hand, and a live minnow lying by her.”— Izaak WaLTon. ProBaBLy in no direction has there been more ingenuity displayed than in the production of artificial baits, such as trolling spoons, spinners, propellers and artificial minnows, frogs, crustacea, insects and nondescripts. TROLLING-Baits — Spoon-Batts. The most commonly-used artificial bait for black bass is the spoon-bait or trolling-spoon. It is now made of all shapes, and many sizes; but all are made upon the same general principle, and are merely variations of the original trolling-spoon, which was fashioned from the bowl of a spoon, a single hook being soldered to one end, and a hole drilled in the other end for attaching the line. By trailing or trolling such a spoon at the end of a line from a moving boat, it revolves gracefully beneath the surface of the water, the burnished surfaces flashing at each revolution, and proves quite an effective lure. The changes that have been rung upon the original oval metal spoon, with a single hook, have been, to say the least, remarkable; and it is, indeed, surprising to see the number of forms that have been evolved from that simple implement. Every conceivable shape into which the old spoon could be cut, bent or twisted, and still have it re- volve, has been resorted to; it has been fluted, hammered ARTIFICIAL Baits. 259 and corrugated ; grooved, ribbed and perforated ; embossed, painted and nickel-plated; and doubled and trebled, and made to spin around floats and balls and metal minnows and flies, until the brain begins to whirl, and the eyes become dazed in their contemplation. Some are fearfully and wonderfully made, and are the most cruel and murder- ous-looking instruments of torture ever devised for the use of the followers of the meek and gentle Walton. There is nothing better than the original spoon bowl with a single hook. The double and triple hooks, usually attached to the modern spoons, are liable to be crushed and broken by the jaws of a large fish, if hooked in a position favorable to this contingency. Why do mannfacturers persist in affixing the triple hook, or triangle, to trolling-spoons, when a single hook is so much more efficient, preferable and humane? There is nothing so effective as the single hook for any kind of fish- ing. The fish is more certain of being hooked, more cer- tain of being landed, and if he breaks away does not have his mouth so torn and lacerated as by the villainous triple hook or gang. I have found dead bass with the entire pre- maxillary bone (upper lip and jaw) torn off by these mur- derous implements. I never see or hear of an angler using or recommending a gang of three or more hooks for trolling the live minnow without setting him down as a pot-fisher ; and all humane and genuine anglers — those who love fair play and use light and elegant tackle — should deprecate and discourage the cruel practice. Trolling-spoons are all made with a concave and a con- vex surface; the latter surface being brightly polished or burnished, while the former is generally painted, and usu- ally of a red color. They are made of tin or brass, and often plated with nickel, silver or gold; but so long as ‘260 Book OF THE BLAckK’ Bass. spoon-baits are brightly burnished, it matters not what the material is, for the black bass is not a judge of metals, but will grab at any thing bright and in motion. The depending hook or hooks may be plain, or dressed with a tuft of feathers or braid, called, by courtesy, a “ fly;” but these fanciful additions, while pleasing to the angler’s eye, do not enhance the “taking” qualities of ~ the lure, for it is the flashing and glancing of the revolv- ing spoon that attracts the fish, and it can not be made more effective by these ornamental appendages, or, as I have sometimes seen, by the addition of a live minnow, or a strip of fat pork! One or two brass swivels should always be attached to the spoon-bait or line, to prevent twisting or kinking. Particular attention should be paid to the hooks of troll- ing-spoons, for many of them are of inferior quality. The trolling-spoon has its legitimate uses, when it is properly made and judiciously employed. There are situ- ations where the small revolving spoon with a single hook can be cast with a light rod and still remain within the pale of legitimate angling; but there is never any excuse for using more than a single hook. As a rule, most persons use spoons too large for black bass, using generally pickerel baits. For the black bass, the spoon should be no larger than the bow] of an ordinary sized tea-spoon, for trolling with the hand-line; and when trolling with the rod, they should be still smaller. I am glad to note that some of our progressive manu. facturers- have become convinced that a single hook is better for trolling- and casting-spoons than the triangle or triple-hook, and at the same time more humane. It is a pleasure to me to mention some of them, in this comnec- tion, with a description of their wares, for I have long ARTIFICIAL Baits. 261 | contended for the relegation of the es and. the adop- tion of the single hook. The Andrew B. Hendrix aaa ee a large line of. single-hook lures, which : are kept in stock by: retail’ dealers. Their bass fly- spoon, though made of polished tin, is very effec- tive either for trolling or casting, being -of the most suitable size. ee is fur- nished with a steel snap, by which either a naked hook or a fly can be af- fixed. One with a still smaller spoon, which is nickel or gold. plated, is still better for casting. It has a spring- brass snap and brass box-swivel, by which can be at- tached a Sproat hook or a fly. Another one is the fluted casting-spoon, either nickel plated or enameled in white. It is furnished with a Sproat hook and double gut loop. - 262 Book OF THE BuLack Bass. The “Irresistible” single-hook trolling-bait made by George H. Burtis, Worcester, Mass., is an elegant article with a gold-plated spoon, a long reinforced gut snell, and a first-class fly, with two bronze box-swivels and a twisted gut leader. It is shown at the bottom of the preceding page. John J. Hildebrandt, Logansport, Ind., makes a line of single-hook lures which are very \ popular with the y, anglers of the middle west. His trolling-spoon is fitted with a good, serviceable hook, and is a well-made and efficient article. It is made to catch bass and not for show or ornament. His fly-spoons are likewise practical, substantial lures, as they are made by a practical bass angler. He makes also trolling baits with two spoons, some furnished with deer- tail flies. It is worthy of note that the flies are attached to the shaft of plated piano wire by small, patented split- rings, so that they can be readily changed. Swivels are not necessary, inasmuch as the baits swim so perfectly that ARTIFICIAL Barts. 263 the line is not twisted. In playing a fish the blades will reverse so that weeds are not liable to catch on them. They show decided improvement in every way. The spoons are especially neat and of small size, just what I have advo- cated for years. Abbey & Imbrie have patented a novel trolling device, with single hook, called the = ghost,” made of aluminum, and constructed on entirely new principles. Its rotary mo- tion may be regulated by curving or straightening the fins. It revolves freely upon the slightest motion, and is es- pecially recommended for surface trolling or shallow water. They also furnish single-hook casting and trolling-spoons, and weedless casts. THE GHOST H. R. Stewart & Co., Chicago, have patented and manu- facture two novelties called the “ pilot,” and “ turn-a-frog.” The former has two pair of aluminum wings, at right angles with each other, with a swivel at each end. It is 264 Book oF THE Buack Bass. designed to regulate the depth at which it is desired to maintain a trolling-spoon or other bait, and is attached at some distance from them. When the line is attached to one end it runs near reversing it, it runs deeper, and as it al- ways swims upright it prevents twisting of the line. The “ turn-a-frog ” is also constructed with two pairs of fins, two horizontal and two vertical, and can also be re- versed. It is in- Cc. tended to keep a frog or minnow in an upright position when cast or trolled, and will run deep or shallow as required. Barnard & Markham, Jackson, Mich., make the “ Bur- gess weedless spinner,” which is quite a unique lure. It consists of a long- shanked Carlisle hook to which is affixed a \. spinner of an odd, but } effective, shape. It has two wire fenders which precede the hook, thus preventing its catching in weeds or other ob- struction. It is well spoken of by those who have used it. It is designed, especially, for very weedy waters, where it is useless to troll with the ordinary spinners. ARTIFICIAL Batts. 265 Other trolling-spoons or baits are made in fanciful shapes; also many styles of minnows, propellers, spinners, etc., but they are no better, and many of them not so good as those before mentioned ; for the nearer a spinning spoon- bait approaches the original spoon, already referred to, the more practical and useful it becomes. There is nothing in this line more beautiful than the abalone shell spoon; and it will always be a “spoon,” for being made of shell it can never be bent or twisted into the fanciful forms of some of the metal ones. It is very ef- fective as a lure, and the smallest sizes are well adapted for the fly-rod in broken waters. ARTIFICIAL MINNowWs. Artificial minnows for trolling, spinning, or casting, are made of metal, glass, wood, and rubber, large and small, and gilded, silvered, or painted in attractive ways. Some of them are quite successful as baits, while others are com- paratively worthless. They are made both in our own country and in England, and as their numbers, and styles, and forms are constantly increasing, J do not deem it ad- visable to particularize or give special descriptions. While I have experimented with many of them, I do not employ them in angling for the black bass. For trolling or spinning, none of them are so effective as the spoon-baits; while for casting, they are not to be compared with the natural minnow, alive or dead. The most effective are made with soft rubber or silk bodies, with propellers, which cause them to spin. The most successful is the “ phantom.” , 266 Book OF THE BLack Bass. ARTIFICIAL Insects, Etc. Artificial insects, as bees, grasshoppers, crickets, beetles, May-flies, dragon-flies, and likewise artificial mice, frogs, crawfish, hegramites, shrimps, worms, etc., are now made which resemble the original creatures very closely. They are to be used in surface fishing, in the same way as arti- ficial flies, and must be kept in constant motion, otherwise the bass soon discover the deception; but if skillfully used, they are sometimes successful baits. They certainly have the recommendation of cleanliness and general convenience as compared with their original prototypes. Many years ago I was trout fishing on Slate river, the inlet of Gogebic lake, and was returning down stream, homeward bound on account of a heavy rain. I sat in the bow of the boat casting under the banks on either hand as my boatman paddled noiselessly along. On reaching a wider portion of the stream I observed a field-mouse swim- ming across, and when it reached the center of the pool a fine trout rose for it, but as he did so, saw me, turned tail and disappeared. I secured the mouse with the dip-net, and upon my arrival at the hotel I imparted what I had seen to a friend who was very anxious to kill a large trout. The next day he repaired to the spot and succeeded in taking it with the mouse; it weighed fully one and a half pounds, and was a good fish for that stream. THE Bos. Of all baits or lures used in black bass angling, one of the rudest in structure, the most nondescript in appear- ance, yet one of the most effective and killing in actual practice, is the “bob” of the extreme southern states. It has been in use in Florida for more than a century, ARTIFICIAL Batts, 267 and was first described by that quaint old naturalist, Bar- tram, in 1764. His description and method of using it, are identical with the “bob” and its use at the present day in Florida, Louisiana, and Texas. The “bob” is composed of a triple hook, or three hooks tied back to back, and invested with a portion of a deer’s tail, in the manner of a large, bushy, hackle, often inter- mixed with red and white feathers, or strips of scarlet cloth. It forms a tassel or tuft, somewhat similar to the so-called triple-hook “fly” attached to most trolling- spoons. A single hook, however, is much to be preferred to the triple-hook. 268 Book. oF THE Buack Bass. CHAPTER XVI. NATURAL BAITS. “And, good master, tell me what baits more you remember.”—. Izaak WaLToN. Minnows. Amone anglers, the term minnow is used to express any small fish used for bait, whether adult fish of certain fami- - lies, or the young of others. But the term properly be- longs to the family Cyprinip#, which comprises numer- ous genera, and some of the genera are composed of many species. The most generally diffused species are Notropis cor- nutus, the common shiner; Semotilus corporalis, the com- mon chub; Hybopsis kentuckiensis, the horned chub, and the stcel back, Campostoma anomalum. The shiner is, by all odds, the best bait for the black bass, being quite silvery, as its name implies, and shows well in the water. It is not so hardy, or long-lived, on the hook, as the chub or steel back; but on account of its white and silvery ap- pearance it is especially desirable for turbid or rough water, and on cloudy or dark days, though it is, for that matter, a good bait at all times. The chubs are good bait on bright days with clear and still water; they have rather tough mouths, endure the hook well, and are rather more lively than shiners, and on these accounts are preferred by many anglers. The young of some of the species of CatostTomIDz~ (suckers), are also very good baits on sunny days, with clear and low water; their tough, leathery, and projecting “ Narurat Barts. 269 ‘lips are well’adapted for the hook. a are quite hardy and lively. The young of Perca americana (jellow al are ex- -cellent baits on ponds and lakes, early or late in the season, especially if the spinous dorsal fin be clipped off with a sharp knife, or a pair of scissors. They show well in the ‘water, and often prove an attractive lure during the seasons mentioned. As a rule, good-sized | minnows should be employed, say from thiee to four inches long. The large minnows are livelier, more hardy, and live much longer on the hook than the small ones. A half-pound bass will take the largest minnow as easily and as readily as the smallest ‘one, so there is no fear of using minnows too large. It is true, that at times, the largest bass seem to take to the smallest minnows, but on these exceptional . occasions they are off their feed, to a certain extent, for, usually, the largest bass takes the largest minnows. In baiting with the minnow, the hook should be entered through the lower lip and out through the nostril; if this is carefully done, the minnow will live a comparatively long time. . Sometimes, with- small minnows, the hook is _passed out through the socket of the eye; but this should only be done with dead minnows. Another excellent way, especially with large minnows, is to pass the hook through both lips, the lower one first; and out through.the upper one. When minnows are hooked’ in either of these ways, a -dead one is often‘as-good as a live one, for the moving of ‘the line causes them-to move in a natural manner. Where the water is without a current, as on ponds or lakes, and where the minnows are-quite small, they may be, for. still fishing, but under no other circumstances, hooked just 270 Book oF THE BuiacKk Bass. back of the dorsal fin, and just above the backbone. But in hooking a minnow in this way, the angler should bear in mind the injunction of Father Izaak, in reference to hooking the live frog: use him as though you loved him. Chubs and suckers should always be hooked through the lips, which are comparatively tough. The angler can not be too careful of his minnows. The water in the bucket should be frequently changed, without waiting for them to appear at the surface to breathe — the usually accepted indication to change the water — for their vitality and strength are already impaired when this takes place, and many of them can not be revived afterward. When available, especially in very hot weather, a piece of ice should be placed in the minnow pail, and covered with a woolen cloth. A little salt, added to the water in the pail, is very beneficial and adds to the preservation of minnows. It is a good plan, when practicable, to use two minnow- buckets, one of which, containing most of the minnows as a reserve, should be sunk in the water, and a few minnows taken out, as needed, for the bucket in use. In this way, the entire stock can be utilized in good condition. In carrying minnows to any distance, they should not be too much crowded in the pail; fifty minnows is enough for a five-gallon bucket. When more than this number is re- quired, additional pails should be provided. A handful of water-weeds in the pail will prevent the minnows from being so much injured, as they otherwise would be, when conveyed over rough roads. When it is not practicable to allow of a frequent chang- ing of the water, the latter may be oxygenized or aerated by inserting a rubber, or other tube, well toward the bot- tom of the pail, and pumping air through it by means of NATURAL Batts: 271 a rubber bulb, such as is attached to’a pump-syringe. It is worse than useless to blow through such a tube with the mouth, for the breath, being deprived of its oxygen in the lungs, carbonic acid gas takes its place, which is poi- sonous to the minnows; yet I have frequently seen this done by individuals, who erroneously supposed that they were freshening the water, because of the numerous bub- bles produced. A still better method of aerating the water is to dip it up with a cup, and pour back again from a height of one or two feet. Dead minnows are now preserved and put up in small bottles for the great convenience of the angler. They answer every pur- ” pose, as a dead minnow is just as good as a live one if kept in constant motion. I have seen the minnows thus prepared by The Curtis-King Company, Milwau- kee, Wis. They are mostly shiners about three inches long. As minnows are be- coming scarce in some sections of the country, this enterprise is greatly to be commended, both as a boon to the angler, and in mercy to the minnow. King’s prepared shiner bait is now kept in stock by Abbey & Imbrie and other dealers. THE HELGRAMITE. The larva of the horned corydalis (Corydalis cornuta), an insect belonging to the order Neuroptera, is variously called “helgramite,” “dobson,” “grampus,” “ dobsell,” “helion,” “kill-devil,’ “crawler,” and other eupho- 272 Book oF THE Buack Bass. nious names. The male of the perfect, winged-insect has long an- tenn, or horns, from which its specific and common names are derived. It exists for several years in the larval state, when it is generally known as the “ helgramite,” being a curious, flattened, and, to most persons, a repulsive-looking worm, growing to a length of two or three inches, and about a half inch in width. It has a head and pincers resembling, somewhat, those of a beetle; has six legs along the thorax; while the body is composed of a number of rings, to which are attached fringes bearing some likeness to small legs; the body ter- minates in two short appendages, or tails, on each of which are two small hooks. The color is a dark, dirty, brown. The helgramite, by means of its hooks and pincers, clings readily and tenaciously to different objects, and hides securely under rocks, boulders, drift- wood, logs, ete., even in swift-running streams. They may be found clinging to the decaying timbers of old dams and bridges, and in the crevices of submerged stone-work at these a places. They are found on the “riffles” of streams, under the boulders and flat stones, and may be taken in these situations with the minnow-net, by stretching the latter across the foot of the riffle; when the stones above the net are turned over, the helgramite, being thus disturbed, curls himself into a ball drifts into the net. NatTURAL Barts. 273 They can be found, in fact, hiding under almost any submerged object in the shallow portions of streams. They feed upon decaying wood and vegetation, and other substances. They can be kept alive for almost any length of time, in a vessel half filled with wet pieces of rotten wood, and damp aquatic vegetation. In this way the angler can always have a ready supply of bait on hand. The helgramite is hooked by inserting the point of the hook under the cap or shell that covers the neck, from behind forward, and bringing it through next to the head. It is a capital bait for the black bass, especially when the bass are found on the riffles or rapids, and in shallow water. , THE CRAWFISH. The crawfish (Cambarus), sometimes called crayfish and crab, is, in somé localities, and at certain seasons, a good bait, especially when casting its shell, when it is called a “ peeler” or a “shedder.” The crawfish exists wherever the black bass is found, in greater or less quantities. In waters where it is very abundant it forms an excellent and killing bait. “Distinct species live in the mountain streams and in the springs at their sources. Some frequent the marshes of the lowlands (both the fresh and salt marshes), either near the streams, or adjacent to the bays, sounds, or ocean. Some occur beneath stones in rivers, creeks, or branches; in the muddy basis; beneath stones in the rapids; among grass and weeds in more quiet places, and in coves; under shelving grassy banks; in holes at the bottom of ponds, lakes, dams, and mill-races. Others bore holes in the meadows, or even in the hill-tops near water; and in bringing up thé mud and clay from their tube-like holes, pile it as a chimney at the entrance. These species at 18 274 Book OF THE Buack Bass. particular times place a plug of clay in the orifice of the chimney and seal themselves in for a certain length of time. Still others reside in the drains and mud of the rice-fields and plantations of the south, and sometimes burrow through the embankments, allowing the water to flood the region.” The crawfish is used as a bait for the black bass only in still-fishing, when it serves a good purpose. In its usual state it should be hooked through the tail, but “ soft- craws ” or “ peelers” may be hooked through the head or body. They may be kept alive a long time in damp aquatic grass, moss, or weeds. GRASSHOPPERS AND CRICKETS. Grasshoppers and crickets are at times very taking baits. They should be used as surface baits entirely, and should be employed only when a brisk breeze is blowing, and on the windward side of the water; for it is at such times that they are blown into the water, and the bass are then on the look out for them. The water, also, being broken into ripples by the breeze, enhances the angler’s chances of success. These insects should be hooked through the upper part of the thorax or body, small hooks being used. Froas. On marshy streams and ponds, young frogs are often used for baits, with good success, in still-fishing. They may be hooked through the lips, or through the skin of the back. They should be of small size, and kept in pretty constant motion, as they are inclined to bury themselves in the mud, or hide under stones, on the bottom, or crawl out upon objects on the surface, if left too long to their own. devices. Natura. Baits. 275 Salt-water shrimps, when they can be procured, are good baits for black bass, alive or pickled, that is, pre- served in salt or strong brine. I have seen black bass caught with cut bait, and even the humble “wum;” but the angler who is reduced to such severe straits, is more to be pitied than envied. Frog-casting with a very short rod, five or six feet long, is now practiced by some anglers, casting overhead, as with the artificial fly. It is a method well adapted for very weedy waters. 276 Book OF THE BLAck Bass. CHAPTER XVII. MISCELLANEOUS IMPLEMENTS. “ My rod and my line, my float and my lead, My hook and my plummet, my whetstone and knife, My basket, my baits, both living and dead, My net and my meat, for that is the chief: Then I must have thread, and hairs green and small, With mine angling-purse, and so you have all.” — Izaak WALTON. THE list of miscellaneous implements is constantly being added to, to meet the wants or requirements of anglers. It is not only interesting, but surprising, upon.looking over the catalogues of our large dealers, to observe the improve- ments and inventions that are being nfade, each season, in this department. Every thing that can be devised or thought of to increase the angler’s pleasure or comfort is put into practical shape. THE Fiy-Boox. Among the necessary adjuncts to the fly-fishers’s outfit is the fly-book, whose pages, well-filled, are more interest-. ing to the angler than the best written pages of classic lore, poetry, or fiction. Fly-books are now made of many patterns and sizes, and of various grades of quality and material, They are constructed of calf-skin, pig-skin, morocco, or russia-leather, with parchment leaves for holding the flies. Those with metal-clip, for keeping the flies separate and at full length, are the best and most satisfactory, for obvious reasons. They are made in vari- MIscELLANEOUS IMPLEMENTS. 277 ous lengths, from five to seven inches; and of a capacity for holding from three dozen to a gross of flies. Every manufacturer has patented at least one fly-book, and some of them, two or three; and where there is 80 much competition there is sure to be production of good articles. It is really hard to choose between those now made, and the choice must be left entirely to the angler’s taste or fancy as to the different methods of securing the flies, and also as to details of construction and finish. One of the most recently improved fly-books is the “ Monarch,” made by William Mills & Son, New York. It is made in several styles of leather, and of varying capacity, holding from two to eight dozen flies, and is of several sizes. Quite a novel and useful feature is a transparent cel- luloid pocket to each leaf of the book, in which can be placed casts, leaders or eyed flies, and which are visible without removal from the pockets. It has the usual metal scalloped band at the top and bottom of each page for the hooks of snelled flies, and two rows of spiral springs for holding the snells secure and apart. Other good fly-books are made by The Thos. H. Chubb” Rod Co., Abbey & Imbrie, Thomas J. Conroy, and Malcolm A. Shipley. J have used fly-books made by these parties, and all are to be commended, in the best grades, for work- manship, durability and convenience. 278 Book OF THE BLACK Bass. The fly-books of Charles F. Orvis have waterproof and mil- dewproof leaves. They are | made in several sizes and styles. They have improved metal clips and a parchment band for keeping the snells in position. Their capacity is from four dozen to a gross of flies. Fry anp LeapER Boxes. A new article is a combined fly and leader box of alumi- num introduced by The T. H. Chubb Rod Co., which has an aluminum comb at each end for securing snelled flies. The snells, together with leaders, are covered by felt leaves, which are kept soft and pliable by the moist felt. MISCELLANEOUS IMPLEMENTS. 279 Abbey & Imbrie furnish the “De Witt” fly and leader box similar to the above. It is made of aluminum with aluminum comb partitions, and has three pieces of thick felt. It is quite moderate in price. An excellent fly-case for eyed flies is made by Charles F. Orvis. It has cork «strips to which the flies are firmly affixed, and which are firmly held in position by metal on three sides. It is well made and sells for a moderate price. Abbey & Imbrie furnish a metal leader-box, the “ Hamil- ton,” which is fitted with felt leaves for keeping leaders moist. It is of a convenient size for the pocket, with round corners. = No fiy-fisher should be without a leader-box - of this kind. It saves soaking leaders before beginning his fishing, or the more tedious process of rubbing them with India rubber, thereby causing vexatious delay. There is nothing handier than a good tackle-book made of good leather, in the bellows or accordeon style, so that like an omnibus it is never full. It should have half a 280 Book oF THE Brack Bass. dozen pockets for leaders and snelled hooks, with small, supplementary cor- ner pockets for loose hooks sinkers, swivels, spoons, etc. Where looped leaders, double-looped snells and short-looped flies, or eyed- hook flies are used, it is just the article for holding the surplus stock. It should be closed by a long and stout leather strap and flat loops. CREEL, or FISH-BASKET. For fly-fishing, or bait-fishing, when wading a stream or fishing from the bank, a creel is very useful and con- venient for holding the angler’s catch. Fish are preserved in much _ better shape, condition and appearance by its use, and it is altogether more satis- factory than the shiftless way of “stringing” the bass, and allowing them to become water-soaked and flabby, by immersing the “string” in the warm and shallow water near the shore, or even by “towing ” them after the angler, if wading. For black bass, the largest treut creels will answer every purpose; say Nos. 3 or 4, having a capacity of twenty or twenty-five pounds. The shoulder-strap should be leather or webbing, with a shoulder-pad, to prevent cutting or bruising the shoulder. Fish-baskets or creels should always be well washed, and MIScELLANEOUS JMPLEMENTS. 281 carefully dried after use, to keep them clean and sweet. When washing them, a little carbonate of ‘soda or carbolic acid should be added to the water to destroy the “ ancient and fish-like smell:” The best and safest basket sling is like the one furnished by William Mills & Son, which consists of a broad webbing band to go over the left shoulder, and a leather waist strap fastened with a snap-hook, by means of which it can be instantly detached and the basket removed, should the angler fall into deep water. It is much handier than the old plan of slinging the basket from the right shoulder, as the right arm is left entirely free for casting. LanvineG-NETs. There is no reason why the angler can not now be suited in landing-nets, for they are made in every style, from the 282 Book oF THE Buiack Bass. simple wooden-bowed net to the more elaborate and port- able net-frames of whalebone, steel and brass. For boat fishing, the landing-net should have a long handle, which is best when made in two pieces, with a strong brass ferrule joint. It should be as light as possible, and on this account bamboo cane is the very best material for the handle. The rim or ring should be ten or twelve inches in diameter, of brass, solid or collapsing; the latter are the most portable and convenient, and are made with one or more hinge joints. The net should be deep, and of a tolerably coarse mesh; linen is the most durable material, though cotton will answer. For fishing from the bank, or for wading the stream, a short-handled trout net is to be preferred, as it is more easily carried and answers every purpose better than the long-handled net. Those with oval, wooden rims are the lightest, and are as good as any. The long-handled net will answer here by using but one joint of the handle. There should be a blunt hook, or ring, at the end of the handle for attaching to the creel-strap, so as to leave both hands free for casting, and playing the fish. The “ Harrimac” brass collapsing net ring made by A. F. Meisselbach & Brother is constructed on the same MISCELLANEOUS IMPLEMENTS. 283 plan, with lock joint, as the expensive English whalebone collapsing net-ring. An advantage of this ring is that the net can be left on when folded. The “JI-D-L” short-handled net ring is made on the same plan by the same firm. § It is coated with rub- ¥ ber enamel, and has a rubber elastic cord by which it is carried over the shoulder. It will be seen that it is not necessary to remove the cord from the shoulder when landing a fish, owing to its stretching enough to allow this to be done. The wooden frame short-handled net made by The T. H. Chubb Rod Co., though not col- lapsing, is a very handy style of net for wading. It has a rubber cord to go over the shoulder. When not in use the net can be carried on the back, entirely out of the way. A very useful article is a minia- ture dip-net for dipping minnows out of the bucket. It is furnished by Abbey & Imbrie, complete, at a very moderate price. ==" Minnow-NEts AND TRAPS. For catching minnows for bait-fishing, the most expe- ditious way is to use a linen or cotton minnow-seine, from 284 Book oF THE BLack Bass. three to five feet wide, and from five to fifteen feet long. These seines can be purchased mounted or unmounted. The mountings consist of cork and lead-lines, with their floats and sinkers, and two handles or brails. The mesh should be quite fine. A very simple and effective portable net is described as follows: “Take a bung or round block of wood of two and one-half to three inches in diameter, and bore four holes opposite to each other in tne edge of it. Then insert a piece of umbrella-rib, about twelve to fourteen inches long, in each hole. The holes must be made deep and small enough for the wire to fit tight. The paragon wire is the best. Leave the end of the rib that has the little eye in it outside. Lay the bung and wires on a square piece of mosquito-netting, and stretch it and sew it firmly at the four corners to the eyes in the ribs. In the center of the bung put a screw-eye, and in the center of the mosquito- net sew a piece of string, leaving ends about eight inches long. Any straight, stiff stick picked up on the shore serves as a handle, being made fast to the net by «a strong piece of twinc through the screw-eye, and with a piece of bread tied in the net with the string, and perhaps a small, flat stone to make it sink, it is ready to catch minnows. They will come over the net for the bread, and when it is raised quickly the resistance of the water causes it to belly, and the minnows will not get out. When bait enough has been taken, pull the wires out of the holes, drop the bung into the net, and roll it up on the wires.” Another simple affair is thus described : “A globe of wire netting split in two, fastened at the bottom by hinges, and attached to a stick by strings from the top — this is the whole affair, save a small place in the center for bait. The two hemispheres are so arranged as to open partially from their own weight, if allowed to touch bottom; or they can be separated by pulling one of the strings above mentioned. As minnows are generally found in shallow, clear water, it is easy to see when enough have entered the trap, to close and draw it out. This MISCELLANEOUS IMPLEMENTS. 285 invention does away entirely with seining, and the disagreeable necessity of wading in the water. The pole or stick upon which the trap is hung may be made of any desired length, and jointed, thus permitting the entire apparatus to be packed in a small space.” Malcolm A. Shipley, Philadelphia, furnishes a folding net, much like one I have frequently used. It is a very convenient article, occupying but small space when folded. When ready: for use it is about three feet square. The glass minnow trap patented and sold by Charles F. Orvis, has been on the market for many years, and has proved a great success. It is constructed of heavy flint glass, about twelve by twenty- four inches. It is lowered into the water, and some bread crumbs placed inside. The cord by which it is lowered should be buoyed, if the angler is to remain away very long. The galvanized wire trap furnished by Wm. Mills & Son, is another in- genious device. It is to be lowered into the water and baited, the minnows having access at either end. The two halves nest together, so that with a common water pail it can be utilized as a minnow-bucket. It is, when set up, about nine by twenty inches. 286 Book oF THE Buiack Bass. Minnow-BvuckKEts. To the bait-fisher for black bass, the proper form of bait- can is quite an important item. There are two general styles, one for boat-fishing, and one for stream-fishing. The best plan for a minnow-bucket for boat-fishing, and where a large pail can be utilized, is to have two pails, one fitting within the other. This form of pail is generally and conveniently made as follows: The outer bucket is of heavy tin, and made round, with a capacity of from two to five gallons; a stout wire bail or handle is attached, with a wooden or tin hand-piece. The inner bucket is also made of tin, to fit somewhat loosely in the outer one; but the top of this bucket should be an inch below the top of the outer pail. It has an opening, fitted with a-lid on top, through which the hand can be readily inserted ; and has a tin-hasp and loop for fastening securely. In addition, there is a flat tin-handle, in the form of an arch, on the top of the lid, by which the inner pail can be easily lifted out. The inner pail is freely perforated on the top, bottom and sides, so that, upon raising it, the water leaves: it rapidly, and a minnow can thus be readily selected. When- ever necessary, the inner pail can be taken out, the top securely fastened by the hasp and loop, and the pail sunk in the water to revive the minnows, while the angler is taking his lunch or siesta. Both pails should be well painted, inside and out. A better plan is to have the inner pail formed of copper or galvanized iron wire-cloth. For fishing in a stream, where the angler is a-foot, a much smaller and lighter bucket must be used, on the score of portability and general convenience. In this case, the bucket is made single, usually, and of an oblong or oval shape, to admit of its being more readily carried. It is fitted with a handle or bail, and the top is soldered in, an MISCELLANEOUS IMPLEMENTS. 287 inch or two below the rim of the bucket; and this top only is perforated. There is also a lid in the top, which is usu- ally secured by a bolt of stout wire. A double pail, the inner one being made principally of copper or galvanized iron wire-cloth, would be vastly more convenient, without adding much to the weight. The most recent improvement in minnow-buckets that I have seen is the telescopic minnow and live bait bucket patented and made by the Hall Manufacturing Company, Cleve- land, Ohio. It is made round -zeqqmm and oval, and of several sizes. The No. 1 oval bucket has a mid- dle compartment for minnows, and two end compartments for | frogs or other live baits, or ice. The round and smaller sizes are for minnows only. It is made "Open. on a common-sense plan and is the best thing of its kind that I have seen. It is con- structed in a substantial man- ner of oxydized copper on tin, or japanned green and_lac- quered. A very convenient receptacle for carrying live frogs, crawfish, crickets or helgramites is the live-box sold by Wm. Mills & Son. It has two compartments and is strongly made of galvan- ized wire cloth. The top has a sliding cover. Its size is about six by twelve inches. 288 Book OF THE Buack Bass, FLoats, or Corks. The float should never be used when it can be dispensed with, as it is detrimental to good casting, and is always in the way. It becomes necessary, however, in shallow streams, where the bottom is covered with snags, roots, weeds and other obstacles, and may be used in still-fishing, where crawfish, frogs or helgramites are used as bait; but, when used, it should be as small as possible, consistent with the weight of the sinker required, and should be em- ployed for the sole purpose of keeping the hook away from the bottom, and not as an object of intense and constant observation to indicate a bite. -An egg-shaped, oval, long or barrel-shaped cork-float may be used ; or, still better, perhaps, a swan-quill or por- cupine-quill float may be employed with advantage, in situ- ations referred to above. There are several styles of adjustable floats that can be attached or detached without removing the hook. One of the best is one with wire spirals at each end. The Mascot float made by the Multi-Novelty Company, Burlington, Iowa, can be readily attached by doubling the line, inserting it through the hole in the float, and looping it over the-end. The same company make the Pacetty float, which is designed to overcome the difficulty of using a float in casting the minnow. The line runs freely through a tube in the float, and in casting it rests against the sinker or swivel, but when the bait reaches ‘the water the weight of the minnow and swivel carries the line slowly through the float until it meets a check fastened at the required distance. For weedy waters it answers a good purpose. The Bristol automatic float is made by the Horton MiscELLannous Implements. 289 Fioats. 1. 1. Mascot float. 2. Cork float. 3. Quill float. 4. 4. Bristol float. 5. Pacetty float. 6. Adjustable. 19 290 Book OF THE Buiack Bass. Manufacturing Company, Bristol, Conn. It is intended also for use in casting the minnow. It is adjusted accord- ing to the depth of the water, and holds securely; but on reeling the line, and when the float reaches the tip of the rod, a cam is released allowing the rest of the line to be reeled up freely, and the fish landed the same as if no float were used. THe SwIvet. A brass or bronze box-swivel should always be employed in bait-fishing for black bass. It prevents, in a great meas- ure, the twisting, kinking and snarling of the line, so annoying to the angler. In rod-fishing, the smallest sizes — Nos. 5 or 6 —are large enough; and, usually, no addi- tional weight or sinker will be required. The line should be made fast to one ring, and the snell of the hook attached to the other. In trolling, two swivels can be used with advantage — one attached to the snell of the hook or spinner, and the other attached to the line some two or three feet above. In trolling with the hand-line, larger swivels may be used —as Nos. 2 or 3. Brass or bronze swivels should always be used, as they do not rust, a strong objection to steel swivels. When sinkers are used in addi- tion, they should be attached about a foot above the swivel. There are various other kinds of swivels of more or less utility, one of which has a swivel at one end and a spring catch at the other. Another is a swivel with spring catches at both ends. Then there is the triple swivel, and the spreader swivel, though the latter are used more for salt- water fishing. MIscELLANEOUS IMPLEMENTS. 291 CxS ORCEESO 3 9 SINKERS AND SWIVELs. 1. Adjustable. 2. Ringed. 3. Swivel. 4. Rangeley. 5. Lead coil. 6. Split shot. 7. Mackinac. 8. Bronze box-swivel. 9. Brass box-swivel. 292 Book oF THE Buack Bass. SINKERS. Generally, in black bass angling, no sinker, in addition to the swivel, is necessary, the latter being heavy enough to keep the live bait beneath the surface. But there are cases and times when the sinker is brought into requisition ; for example, where the minnows used for bait are large and strong and keep on the surface, or when the stream is quite rapid or current swift. When the ordinary ringed-sinker is used without a swivel, the line should be tied in one ring, and the snell of the hook looped in the other. The smallest-sized sinker is usually heavy enough, though sometimes a larger size is necessary. Buckshot or small bullets should not be used when the oval sinker can be had, as they offer too much resistance to the water, and often cause the line to twist or kink. The adjustable sinkers are the best sinkers to use, and should take the place of the old-fashioned ringed leads. The simplicity and effectiveness of the various devices by which they can be put on and taken off the line, without disturbing hook or bait, should receive the approval of all anglers, and render their adoption universal. They insure neatness and dispatch, qualities not to be despised in angling. Most of the sinkers produced in this country are made by Edward Pitcher, Brooklyn, N. Y. They are ringed, the rings fast at each end, or with swivels, which turn freely. Then there is the adjustable sinker with spiral wire at each end. The Rangeley sinker is also adjustable. It is grooved through the middle, and has an ear at each end, which is to be bent over on the line, forming an oblong sinker. MISCELLANEOUS IMPLEMENTS. 293 The lead-coil sinker can be cut to suitable length, ad- justed to the line and fastened by squeezing it tight. The Mackinac sinker is a round sinker, divided into two halves, in one of which is a screw and in the other a corre- sponding hole, by means of which it is adjusted and made fast to the line. The split-shot sinker is useful where a light one is re- quired, and is easily adjusted. Lint RELEASER. A useful implement that will be ap- preciated by the fly-fisher on brushy streams is furnished by William Mills & Son. Should the angler get “hung up” on the branch of a tree out of his reach, its release is an easy matter should he have this article in his pocket. He inserts the tip of his rod under the rubber band and raises the rod, with the “releaser,” straddles the twig or branch with it, and withdraws the rod. A slight pull on the string attached to the instrument cuts the twig, and the angler is again ready for the fray. It is furnished with a leather case for con- venience of carrying. 294 Book oF THE BuLack Bass. CLEARING-RING. The hook, in angling, often becomes fast or foul in snags, roots, rocks, or grass, and frequently is thereby lost or broken, to the disgust of the angler. By the employment of a clear- ing-ring the hook can almost invariably be easily detached from these obstruc- tions without damage. These are rings made expressly for the purpose, com- posed of brass or iron, with a hinge to admit of their being readily adjusted to the line. The method of using them is as follows: The ring is opened at the hinge and the Jine encircled, when the ring is again closed and allowed to run down the line to the point of obstruction; the weight of the ring detaches the hook, when it is drawn up, a hand-line being attached to the ring for this purpose. Jf the hook is very firmly fastened to the root or snag, the ring is raised a few feet by its cord and allowed to drop suddenly, when its weight will usually clear the hook.